UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual: Industrial Measurement and Control

UDC 6300
Process Controller
Product Manual
51-52-25-45
1/03
Rev. C
Industrial Measurement and Control

Copyright, Notices, and Trademarks
Printed in U.S.A. – © Copyright 1999 by Honeywell Inc.

Rev. C
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate,

Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in
its written agreement with and for its customer.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential
damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to
change without notice.
This document was prepared using Information Mapping® methodologies and

formatting principles.
UDC 6300 is a trademark of Honeywell Inc.

Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc.

Honeywell Inc.
1100 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034
ii UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

About This Publication
How this manual is This Product Manual is divided into 11 sections. These sections contain
organized all the information you need to configure, operate, monitor, and
troubleshoot your controller.
To find information quickly, use the comprehensive Table of Contents in
the front of the manual and the Index located in the back of the manual.
Warranty The device described herein has been manufactured and tested for correct
operation and is warranted as follows:
The Process Controller carries an 18 month warranty. This warranty
includes immediate technical assistance via a toll free telephone
number and complete replacement of the controller, if necessary.
Contacts
World Wide Web
The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our industrial automation and control
customers.
Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL)
Corporate http://www.honeywell.com
Industrial Measurement and Control http://www.honeywell.com/imc
International http://www.honeywell.com/Business/global.asp
Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.
Organization Phone Number
United States and Canada Honeywell Inc. 1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support

1-800-525-7439 Service
Asia Pacific Honeywell Asia Pacific Inc. (852) 2829-8298

Hong Kong
Europe Honeywell PACE, Brussels, Belgium [32-2] 728-2111
Latin America Honeywell Inc., Sunrise, Florida U.S.A. (954) 845-2600
1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual iii

Symbol Definitions
This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the
Product Manual for additional information. This symbol appears next
! to required information in the manual.
WARNING, risk of electric shock. This symbol warns the user of a

potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater
than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc may be accessible.
Protective earth terminal. Provided for connection of the protective

earth (green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
iv UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

Table of Contents
SECTION 1 – OVERVIEW.................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Introduction................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Operator Interface ........................................................................................ 4
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION........................................................................................... 7
2.1 Overview....................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Model Number Interpretation........................................................................ 9
2.3 Preliminary Installation Procedure .............................................................10
2.4 Mounting.....................................................................................................13
2.5 Wiring .........................................................................................................15
2.6 Wiring Diagrams .........................................................................................17
SECTION 3 – CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................27
3.1 Overview.....................................................................................................27
3.2 Configuration Prompts................................................................................28
3.3 How To Get Started....................................................................................30
3.4 Configuration Tips ......................................................................................31
3.5 Configuration Procedure ............................................................................32
3.6 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group..............................................................34
3.7 Tuning L2 Parameters Set Up Group (Cascade or 2 Loop) ......................37
3.8 SP Ramp/Program Set Up Group ..............................................................39
3.9 Accutune Set Up Group .............................................................................40
3.10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group ...................................................................42
3.11 Advanced Math Parameters Set Up Group ..............................................48
3.12 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group ............................................51
3.13 Input 1 Through 4 Parameters Set Up Group...........................................52
3.14 Input 5 Parameters Set Up Group ............................................................53
3.15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group ...............................................54
3.16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group ...............................................56
3.17 Options Set Up Group ..............................................................................58
3.18 Communications Group ............................................................................60
3.19 Alarms Set Up Group................................................................................62
3.20 Display Parameters Set Up Group ...........................................................65
3.21 Calib Group...............................................................................................66
3.22 Status Group.............................................................................................66
3.23 Configuration Record Sheet .....................................................................67
SECTION 4 – CONFIGURATION PROMPT DEFINITIONS ............................................71

4.1 Overview.....................................................................................................71
4.2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group..............................................................72
4.3 Tuning Loop 2 Parameters Set Up Group..................................................76
4.4 Setpoint Ramp/Rate Set Up Group ............................................................77
4.5 Accutune Set Up Group .............................................................................79
4.6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group.....................................................................82
4.7 Advanced Math Parameters Set Up Group................................................98
4.8 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group............................................104
4.9 Input 1 Through 4 Parameters Set Up Group ..........................................106
4.10 Input 5 Parameters Set Up Group ..........................................................108
4.11 Control Parameters Set Up Group..........................................................111
4.12 Control2 Parameters Set Up Group .......................................................116
4.13 Options Set Up Group ............................................................................120
4.14 Communications Set Up Group ..............................................................128
4.15 Alarms Set Up Group..............................................................................133
Table of Contents, continued
1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual v
4.16 Display Parameters Set Up Group ......................................................... 138
4.17 Calibration Data ...................................................................................... 141
4.18 Status Test Data ..................................................................................... 141
SECTION 5 – OPERATION............................................................................................ 143

5.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 143
5.2 How to Power Up The Controller ............................................................. 144
5.3 Enter a Security Code .............................................................................. 146
5.4 Monitoring Your Controller ....................................................................... 147
5.5 Start Up Procedure................................................................................... 153
5.6 Operating Modes...................................................................................... 154
5.7 Setpoints .................................................................................................. 158
5.8 Setpoint Rate............................................................................................ 165
5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp............................................................................... 166
5.10 Using Two Set of Tuning Constants ....................................................... 169
5.11 2 Loops of Control Overview .................................................................. 172
5.12 Configure 2 Loop of Control ................................................................... 177
5.13 Monitor 2 Loops of Control ..................................................................... 180
5.14 Operate 2 Loops of Control .................................................................... 183
5.15 Input Math Algorithms............................................................................. 184
5.16 Logic Gate Operation.............................................................................. 187
5.17 Digital Outputs ........................................................................................ 189
5.18 Digital Input Option (Remote Switching)................................................. 192
5.19 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression ............................................................... 198
5.20 Accutune™ ............................................................................................. 199
5.21 Input 5 - Pulse Input................................................................................ 208
5.22 Three Position Step Control ................................................................... 210
5.23 Auto/Manual Station ............................................................................... 212
SECTION 6 – INPUT CALIBRATION ............................................................................ 217

6.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 217
6.2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values ................................................... 218
6.3 Input 1, 2, 3, or 4 Preliminary Information ................................................ 219
6.4 Input 1, 2, 3, or 4 Set Up Wiring............................................................... 221
6.5 Input #1, 2, 3, or 4 Calibration Procedure ................................................ 222
6.6 Input 5 - Low Level Inputs Preliminary Information.................................. 224
6.7 Input #5 - Low Level Inputs Set Up Wiring............................................... 226
6.8 Input #5 - Low Level Inputs Calibration Procedure .................................. 230
6.9 Input #5 - Pulse Input Preliminary Information......................................... 232
6.10 Input #5 - Pulse Input Calibration Procedure ......................................... 233
6.11 Input #5 - Pulse Input Verification........................................................... 235
6.12 Restoring Factory Calibration ................................................................. 236
SECTION 7 – OUTPUT CALIBRATION ........................................................................ 241

7.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 241
7.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration................................................... 242
7.3 2nd Current Output................................................................................... 245
SECTION 8 – TROUBLESHOOTING / SERVICE ......................................................... 249

8.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 249
8.2 Troubleshooting Aids ............................................................................... 251
8.3 Power-up Tests ........................................................................................ 253
8.4 Status Tests ............................................................................................. 254
8.5 Background Tests .................................................................................... 257
8.6 Controller Failure Symptoms.................................................................... 259
Table of Contents, continued
8.7 Troubleshooting Procedures .................................................................... 260
vi UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

8.8 Parts Replacement Procedures ...............................................................266
8.9 Maintenance .............................................................................................277
SECTION 9 – PARTS LIST ............................................................................................279

9.1 Exploded View..........................................................................................279
1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual vii

Figures
Figure 1-1 Operator Interface Displays and Indicators............................................................. 4

Figure 2-1 Model Number Interpretation .................................................................................. 9
Figure 2-2 Power Select Jumper Placement .......................................................................... 11
Figure 2-3 Dimensions............................................................................................................ 13
Figure 2-4 Composite Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 17
Figure 2-5 Line Voltage Wiring ............................................................................................... 18
Figure 2-6 High Level Input Connections ............................................................................... 19
Figure 2-7 Optional Input 5, Low level Input Connections...................................................... 20
Figure 2-8 Optional Input 5-Pulse Input Connections ............................................................ 21
Figure 2-9 Current Output Connections ................................................................................. 22
Figure 2-10 Second Current Output Connections .................................................................... 23
Figure 2-11 Digital Input Connections ...................................................................................... 24
Figure 2-12 Digital Output Connections ................................................................................... 25
Figure 2-13 Communications Option Connections................................................................... 26
Figure 3-1 Overview of UDC6300 Prompt Hierarchy ............................................................. 28
Figure 4-1 Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm............ 95
Figure 4-2 Example of Eight Segment Characterizer............................................................. 97
Figure 5-1 Operator Interface ............................................................................................... 147
Figure 5-2 Functional Overview Block Diagram of a Single Loop Controller - Loop #1...... 173
Figure 5-3 Functional Overview Block Diagram of Loop 2 of a 2 Loop Controller ............... 174
Figure 5-4 Functional Overview Block Diagram of Internal Cascade of a 2 Loop Controller175
Figure 5-5 Hi/Lo Override Selector....................................................................................... 176
Figure 5-5 Auto/Manual Station Using Digital Input #1 and Backup Control Feature .......... 212
Figure 6-1 Input #1, 2, 3, or 4 Wiring Terminals ................................................................... 219
Figure 6-2 Wiring Connections for 1 to 5 Volts or 4 to 20 mA .............................................. 221
Figure 6-3 Input #5 - Low Level Inputs Wiring Terminals..................................................... 224
Figure 6-4 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath ....................... 226
Figure 6-5 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision Resistor ......... 227
Figure 6-6 Wiring Connections for RTD (Resistance Thermometer Device) ....................... 228
Figure 6-7 Wiring Connections for Radiamatic, Millivolts, Volts, or Milliamps...................... 229
Figure 6-8 Test Equipment connections for Calibrating Pulse Inputs .................................. 235
Figure 7-1 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional Output........................ 243
Figure 7-2 Wiring Connections for Calibrating 2nd Current Output ..................................... 246
Figure 8-1 Chassis Removal ................................................................................................ 267
Figure 8-3 Bezel/Keyboard/Display Assembly ..................................................................... 270
Figure 8-4 Keyboard and Display Board Removal ............................................................... 270
Figure 8-2 Replacement Parts Identification ........................................................................ 268
Figure 8-5 Printed Wiring Board Identification...................................................................... 271
Figure 8-6 Power Select Jumper Location ........................................................................... 273
Figure 9-1 UDC 6300 Exploded View................................................................................... 279
viii UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

Tables
Table 1-1 Function of Keys........................................................................................... 5

Table 2-1 Operating Limits ........................................................................................... 8
Table 2-2 Preliminary Installation Procedure .............................................................10
Table 2-3 Mounting Procedure ...................................................................................14
Table 2-4 Permissible Wiring Bundling.......................................................................15
Table 3-1 Configuration Tips ......................................................................................31
Table 3-2 Configuration Procedure ............................................................................32
Table 3-3 Tuning Group Function Prompts ................................................................35
Table 3-4 Tuning L2 Group Function Prompts ...........................................................37
Table 3-5 SP Ramp Group Function Prompts............................................................39
Table 3-6 Accutune Group Function Prompts ............................................................41
Table 3-7 Algorithm Group Function Prompts............................................................42
Table 3-8 Advanced Math Group Function Prompts ..................................................48
Table 3-9 Output Algorithm Group Function Prompts ................................................51
Table 3-10 Input 1 through 4 Set Up Groups Function Prompts..................................52
Table 3-11 Input 5 Group Function Prompts ................................................................53
Table 3-12 Control Group Function Prompts ...............................................................54
Table 3-13 Control2 Group Function Prompts .............................................................56
Table 3-14 Options Group Function Prompts...............................................................58
Table 3-15 Commun Group Function Prompts ............................................................60
Table 3-16 Alarms Group Function Prompts ................................................................62
Table 3-17 Display Group Function Prompts ...............................................................65
Table 4-1 Tuning Group Prompt Definitions ...............................................................72
Table 4-2 Tuning L2 (Loop 2) Group Prompt Definitions ..........................................76
Table 4-3 Setpoint Ramp/Rate Group Definitions ......................................................77
Table 4-4 Accutune Group Definitions........................................................................79
Table 4-5 Algorithm Group Definitions .......................................................................82
Table 4-6 Advanced Math Group Definitions .............................................................98
Table 4-7 Output Algorithm Group Definitions .........................................................104
Table 4-8 Input 1 through 4 Group Definitions .........................................................106
Table 4-9 Input 5 Group Definitions..........................................................................108
Table 4-10 Control Group Definitions .........................................................................111
Table 4-11 Control2 Group Definitions .......................................................................116
Table 4-12 Option Group Definitions ..........................................................................120
Table 4-13 Communications Group Definitions..........................................................128
Table 4-14 Alarms Group Definitions .........................................................................133
Table 4-15 Latching and Non-latching Alarm Configuration ......................................137
Table 4-16 Display Group Definitions.........................................................................138
Table 5-1 Power Up Diagnostic Tests ......................................................................144
Table 5-2 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys ..........................................145
Table 5-3 Procedure for Entering a Security Code ..................................................146
Table 5-4 Lower Display Key Parameter Prompts ...................................................150
Table 5-5 Error Messages ........................................................................................152
Table 5-6 Procedure for Starting Up the Controller..................................................153
Table 5-7 Operating Mode Definitions......................................................................154
Table 5-8 Changing Operating Modes .....................................................................155
Table 5-9 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode ...............................156
Table 5-10 Procedure for Selecting the Local Setpoint Source .................................158
Table 5-11 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoints ...........................................159
Table 5-12 Procedure for Switching Between Local Setpoint 1 and 2 .......................160
Table 5-13 Procedure for Switching Between Local Setpoint 3 and Local
Setpoint 1 or 2......................................................................................161
Table 5-14 Procedure for Selecting the Remote Setpoint Source .............................162
Table 5-15 Procedure for Switching Between Local and Remote Setpoints ............163
Table 5-16 Setpoint Selection Indication ....................................................................164
Tables, continued
1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual ix

Table 5-17 Procedure for Configuring a Setpoint Ramp ............................................ 166
Table 5-18 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp ................................................. 167
Table 5-19 Procedure for Selecting Two Set of Tuning Constants............................ 169
Table 5-20 Procedure for Setting Switchover Values ................................................ 170
Table 5-21 Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant Values........................................ 170
Table 5-22 Procedure for switching PID SETS from the Keyboard ........................... 171
Table 5-23 Control Loop Selections ........................................................................... 172
Table 5-24 Procedure for Selecting 2 Loop Algorithm ............................................... 177
Table 5-25 Procedure for Selecting Output Algorithm ............................................... 177
Table 5-26 Procedure for Selecting Control Parameters ........................................... 178
Table 5-27 Procedure for Selecting Tuning Parameters............................................ 179
Table 5-28 Digital Display Indication - 2 Loops ......................................................... 180
Table 5-29 Bargraph Indication - 2 Loops ................................................................. 181
Table 5-30 Logic Gates Constraints and Dynamic Operation Status ....................... 188
Table 5-31 Latching and Non-Latching Alarm Operation........................................... 189
Table 5-32 Digital Input 1 and 2 Option Action on Contact Closure .......................... 192
Table 5-33 Digital Input Combinations “DIG IN 1”...................................................... 194
Table 5-34 Digital Input Combinations “DIG IN 2”...................................................... 194
Table 5-35 Digital Input 1 and 2 Combination Operation ........................................... 195
Table 5-36 Digital Input 3, 4, 5, 6 Option Action on Contact Closure ........................ 196
Table 5-37 Accutune Rules and Regulations ............................................................. 200
Table 5-38 Procedure for Starting TUNE (Demand) Tuning ...................................... 201
Table 5-39 Procedure for Using TUNE at Start-up for Duplex ................................... 202
Table 5-40 Procedure for Using SP Only Tuning at Start-up ..................................... 203
Table 5-41 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up for Duplex............................ 204
Table 5-42 Adaptive Tune Error Prompt Definitions .................................................. 207
Table 5-43 Controller Configuration Selections for Pulse Input ................................. 209
Table 5-44 Procedure for Setting the 3PSTEP Motor time ........................................ 210
Table 5-45 Procedure for Displaying the 3PSTEP Motor Position............................. 211
Table 5-46 Auto/Manual Station Mode Configuration Procedure .............................. 214
Table 6-1 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0% and 100% Range Values... 218
Table 6-10 Restoring Factory Calibration................................................................... 236
Table 6-2 Equipment Needed................................................................................... 220
Table 6-3 Input #1, 2, 3, or 4 Calibration Procedure ................................................ 222
Table 6-4 Equipment Needed................................................................................... 225
Table 6-5 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using An Ice Bath .. 226
Table 6-6 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision
Resistor.................................................................................................. 227
Table 6-7 Input #5 Calibration Procedure ................................................................ 230
Table 6-8 Input #5 - Pulse Input Calibration Procedure ........................................... 233
Table 6-9 Pulse Input Verification Setup .................................................................. 235
Table 7-1 Set Up Wiring Procedure Current Proportional Output............................ 242
Table 7-2 Current Proportional Output Calibration Procedure................................. 244
Table 7-3 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 2nd Current Output .................................... 245
Table 7-4 2nd Current Output Calibration Procedure .............................................. 247
Table 8-1 Error Message Prompts ........................................................................... 251
Table 8-2 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version ....................................... 252
Table 8-4 Procedure for Displaying the Status Tests Results ................................. 254
Table 8-5 Status Tests ............................................................................................. 255
Table 8-6 Background Tests .................................................................................... 257
Table 8-7 Controller Failure Symptoms.................................................................... 259
Table 8-8 Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms .............................................. 260
Table 8-9 Troubleshooting Current Proportional Output Failure.............................. 261
Table 8-10 Troubleshooting Time Proportional Digital Output(s) Failure................... 262
Table 8-11 Troubleshooting Alarm Digital Output(s) Failure...................................... 263
Table 8-12 Troubleshooting a Keyboard Failure........................................................ 264
Tables, continued
Table 8-13 Troubleshooting a DMCS Communications Failure................................. 265
x UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

Table 8-14 How to Remove the Chassis ....................................................................267
Table 8-15 Bezel/Keyboard/Display Assembly Replacement Procedure ..................269
Table 8-16 Access the Printed Wiring Boards............................................................271
Table 8-17 MCU/Inputs PWB Replacement Procedure .............................................272
Table 8-18 Communications Option Board Replacement Procedure ........................274
Table 8-19 Digital I/O PWB Replacement Procedure ................................................275
Table 8-20 Option Input Board Replacement Procedure ...........................................276
Table 9-1 Parts Identification ....................................................................................280
Table 9-2 Parts Not Shown.......................................................................................281
Table 9-3 Gray Vutronik Mask Kits...........................................................................281
1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual xi

Acronyms
3PSTEP............................................................................................ 3 Position Step Control

EMI ..........................................................................................Electromagnetic interference
HID .................................................................................................. high intensity discharge
MOVs ................................................................................................. Metal Oxide Varistors
PID ............................................................................. Proportional, Integral, and Derivative
RC ....................................................................................................resistance-capacitance
RFI.......................................................................................... Radio frequency interference
RH .............................................................................................................Relative Humidity
RTD .................................................................................. Resistance Thermometer Device
SCRs ...........................................................................................Silicon controlled rectifiers
UDC......................................................................................................... Process Controller
xii UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

References
Publication Publication Number

Title
UDC3000/UDC5000/UDC6000/UDC6300 51-51-25-35
RS422/485 Communications Option Manual
UDC6300 MODBUS 485RTU Communications Option manual 51-51-25-53
PM/APM UDC6300 Integration Manual PM12-520
1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual xiii

xiv UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03
Section 1 – Overview
1.1 Introduction
Function The UDC 6300 Process Controller is a microprocessor-based controller that

handles basic control strategies and is easily upgraded to higher
functionality to meet advanced control strategies such as 2 Loops of control,
Cascade, Feedforward control or those requiring logic or math functions.
The controller has four high-level, and an optional low level, isolated loop
related analog input signals.
The controller produces current outputs and four Digital Outputs or Digital
Inputs based on operator-entered data plus two more dedicated Digital
Inputs.
See the block diagrams for:
• One loop of control - Figure 5-2
• Two loops of control - Figure 5-3
• Internal Cascade control - Figure 5-4
CE Conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the

(Europe) following European Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage
Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive. Conformity of this
product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed.
Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and
the special conditions for CE conformity in Section 2.1, may invalidate
this product’s conformity with the Low Voltage and EMC Directives.
ATTENTION
The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area may cause harmful interference. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the
equipment is used closer than 30 meters (98 feet) to the antenna(e). In special cases, when highly
susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the user may have to employ additional mitigating
measures to further reduce the electromagnetic emissions of this equipment.
Continued on next page
1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1

1.1 Introduction, Continued
Inputs Four high-level inputs are standard. They can be:

• 1 to 5 Volts,
• 4 to 20 mA, or
• 10 to 50 mA
A fifth input is available as an option and can be one of several types:
• a low-level Thermocouple or RTD sensor
• a linear input (mA, Volts, mV, or Radiamatic)
• a pulse counter input for use with frequency output devices. This Pulse
counter input can be used as a frequency input or as a setpoint adjustment
input whereby each pulse is counted as one least significant digit change
to the setpoint. A digital input selection determines the direction of
setpoint change.
Any input can be used as:
• the process variable for either loop
• remote setpoint signal
• for computing the weighted average of two inputs
• Input for Math algorithms such as feedforward Summer or Multiplier,
Input Summing with Ratio and Bias, HI/LO Input Select with Ratio and
Bias, Multiplier/Divider.
Outputs The controller has a current output and is available with an optional
second current output for control, or a signal representing any of several
controller parameters for control or recording purposes.
Output Algorithms Depending on how many loops you configure, the UDC6300 is available
with various preselected output algorithms including:
• On/Off,
• On/Off Duplex,
• Time Proportional Simplex or Duplex,
• Current Proportional Simplex or Duplex,
• Current/Time Duplex.
Digital Inputs / Four points, each of which can be an open-collector type Digital Output
Outputs for alarm and control, or a Digital Input. There are also two dedicated
Digital Inputs.
2 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

1.1 Introduction, Continued
Control Algorithms Depending on the Control output type specified, the controller can be
configured for the following control algorithms:
• On/Off control,
• PID-A Equation,
• PID-B Equation,
• PD with Manual Reset.
• 3 Position Step Control
Duplex control can be configured for all algorithms except 3 Pos Step.
Options Available options include:

Dual Loop / Internal Cascade Two independent loops of control or
internal cascade linking of the primary
and secondary controller in one device.
Includes output override algorithm.
Accutune Automatically adjusts the PID tuning
parameters as necessary while controlling
at setpoint in the automatic control mode.
Second Current Output Fully isolated and configurable as control
output or auxiliary output
Transmitter Power 24Vdc power to supply one or two, 4 to
20mA transmitters for the high level
inputs.
Communications Serial communications link integrates
with CRT-based RS422/485 or DMCS.
Math Options Two pre-configured algorithms have easy
implementation into either control loop.
They can be linked or used individually
and are capable of using any input with
its’ Ratio and Bias.
Gain Scheduling - 8 Gain values may be
applied to 8 Process Variable (PV) bands
for use on known non-linear processes.
Two 8-Segment Characterizers - can be
applied to Input 2, Input 4, Loop 1 Output,
or Loop 2 Output.
Polynomial Curve Characterizer-- a fifth
order polynomial equation can be used on
any one of the five analog inputs.
Totalizer Function - displays actual
current totalized value of up to 8 digits.
Digital Logic Gates - up to 5 gates can be
configured. For each gate you can select
from 8 gate types; each gate having two
input sources and one output use.

1.2 Operator Interface
Displays and Figure 1-1 shows the operator interface and defines the displays and
indicators indicators. The function of the keys is shown in Table 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Operator Interface Displays and Indicators
6300
Lower display – nine characters
Upper display – nine characters
• Normal Operation: displays the PV • Normal Operation: displays
operating parameters and values
process variable (4 digits)
SP 6300
• Configuration Mode: displays or I.D. tag
parameter value or selection • Configuration Mode: displays
function groups and parameters
100
°F °C Annunciators – illuminate as
Three bargraphs,
each appropriate
containing 81 discrete bars plus 80 L12
two arrows, are used to display: °F°C = Temperature units bein
CAS displayed
60 L12 = Loop display indication
Setpoint SP23
CAS = Cascade mode
RSP SP23 = Indicates local setpoint
40 being used
Process variable CSP RSP = Remote setpoint being
used
Output 20 MAN CSP = Computer setpoint
AUTO MAN = Manual control mode
AUTO= Automatic control mod
Bargraphs and alarm 0 1234 1234 = Indicates digital output
annunciators flash on alarm SP PV O alarm conditions
condition until acknowledged
FUNC LOWR MAN RSP SP1

L1/L2 DISP AUTO CAS SP2
SET ALM
UP ACK
21742

1.2 Operator Interface, Continued
Function of keys Table 1-1 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its function.
Table 1-1 Function of Keys

Key Function
SET • Places the controller in the Configuration Set Up group

UP select mode. Sequentially displays Set Up groups and
allows the FUNC key to display individual functions in
each Set Up group.
• A manual check of all the displays can be invoked. Press
the SET UP key and hold in, then press FUNC key.
All segments of the displays will be illuminated.
FUNC • Used in conjunction with the SET UP key to select the

L1/L2 individual functions of a selected Configuration Set Up
group.
• Press the FUNC key and key to start/halt setpoint

ramp
• Also toggles between Loop 1 and Loop 2 display.
LOWR • Selects any one of 26 operating parameter to be shown in

DISP the lower display. See subsection 5.4 for list.
• Used to exit Set Up.
MAN • Alternately selects:

AUTO AUTO Lower display automatically displays setpoint
value in engineering units.
MAN Lower display automatically indicates output in %.
RSP • Alternately selects Local Setpoint 1 and Remote Setpoint

CAS or Local Setpoint 3.
• Changes the controller from local to remote and vice
versa.
• Also, switches into or out of Internal Cascade Control.
SP1 • Toggles between Local Setpoint #1 and #2.

SP2
ALM • Press to acknowledge new alarm condition and stop

ACK bargraph flashing.
• Provides direct access to alarm group.
• Increases the setpoint, output, or configuration values
displayed. The value displayed is entered by advancing to
the next display.
• Decreases the setpoint, output, or configuration values
displayed. The value displayed is entered by advancing to
the next display.

Section 2 – Installation
2.1 Overview
Introduction Installation of the controller consists of mounting and wiring the

controller according to the instructions given in this section. The Process
Controller is industrial control equipment that must be panel mounted.
The wiring terminals must be enclosed within the panel.
Read the pre-installation information, check the model number
interpretation and become familiar with your model selections, then
proceed with installation.
What’s in this This section contains the following information:

section?
Topic See Page
2.1 Overview 7
2.2 Model Number Interpretation 9
2.3 Preliminary Installation Procedure 10
2.4 Mounting 13
2.5 Wiring 15
2.6 Wiring Diagrams 17
Controller If you are replacing a UDC6000 or an existing UDC6300 you can keep
Replacement the old configuration data by removing the EEPROM from the old unit
and placing it in the new unit. Refer to Subsection 8.8 for location of the
EEPROM and instructions.

2.1 Overview, Continued
Pre-installation If the controller has not been removed from its shipping carton, inspect
information the carton for damage and remove the controller. Inspect the unit for any
obvious shipping damage and report any damage due to transit to the
carrier.
Make sure a bag containing mounting hardware is included in the carton
with the controller.
Check that the model number shown on the inside of the case agrees with
what you have ordered.
CE Conformity Shielded twisted pair cables are required for all Analog I/O, Process
special conditions Variable, RTD, Thermocouple, dc millivolt, low level signal, 4-20 mA,
(Europe)
Digital I/O, and computer interface circuits. For performance Criterion A
under special conditions, DO NOT set alarm outputs to LATCHING (ref.
Sections 3.19, 4.15, and 5.17)
Refer to Appendix B - Severe Electrical Noise Environments for
additional installation guidance.
Operating limits We recommend that you review and adhere to the operating limits listed
in Table 2-1 when you install your controller.
Table 2-1 Operating Limits
Condition Specifications
Ambient Temperature 32 to 140°F (0 to 60°C)
Relative Humidity 5 to 90% RH at 40°C (104°F)
Vibration
Frequency 0 to 200Hz
Acceleration 0.2g
Mechanical Shock
Acceleration 5g
Duration 30ms
Power
Voltage 20 to 30 Vac/dc
96 to 132 Vac
192 to 264 Vac
Frequency(Hz) 49 to 51
59 to 61
Transmitter Supply 22 to 26 Vdc
Voltage (at input @ 50mA
terminals)
Power Consumption 20VA Maximum

2.2 Model Number Interpretation
Model number The model number interpretation is shown in Figure 2-1. Write the model
number into the spaces provided and compare it to the model number
interpretation. This information will also be useful when you wire your
controller.
Figure 2-1 Model Number Interpretation

Key Number Table I Table II Table III Table IV Table V
PC 6 30 0
Key Number Product Manual
Controller E English
PC6301Standard I/O(4 Inputs + 1 Current Output) F French
PC6302Standard I/O and Digital I/O* G German
PC6303Standard I/O, Digital I/O *and
Second Current Output
Options
Indicator
PC63044 Inputs Only O None
PC63054 Inputs + Digital I/O* T Customer ID Tag
PC63064 Inputs + Digital I/O *+ C CSA Approved*
Auxiliary Current Output F Factory Mutual Class 1, Div. 2 Appro
A FM and CSA Certified*
Power B FM, CSA and Customer ID Tag*
D FM and Customer ID Tag*
S 24 Vac/dc Only E CSA and Customer ID Tag*
U 24 Vac/dc, / 115 Vac / 230 Vac (Universal) *Pending
Communications
Optional Input (Qty 1)
0__ None
1__ DMCS 0 None
2__ RS422/485 ASCII 1 Thermocouple
3__ TPS Integration 2 RTD, Honeywell Radiamatic (RH
4__ MODBUS 485 RTU Millivolts, or 1 to 5 Volts
3 0 to 10 Volts dc
5 4 to 20 Milliamps dc
Software Options 6 10 to 50 mA
_ 0 _ None 7 Pulse Input
_ A _ Adaptive Tuning (A/T)
_ B _ Math Algorithms + A/T Standard Inputs (Qty 4)
_ C _ 2 Loops/Cascade + A/T
_ D _ 2 Loops/Cascade + A/T + Math Alg. 4 _ 1 to 5 Vdc
5 _ 4 to 20 mA
Transmitter Power 6 _ 10 to 50 mA
_ _ 0 None 23037
_ _ P 2 Inputs Maximum * Digital I/O provides 2 DI's + 4 Universal DI/DO's

2.3 Preliminary Installation Procedure
Introduction Before you install the controller, you must check your Input Range
selection (standard and optional).
Procedure Two power select jumpers are supplied with the controller are supplied
with the controller.
Refer to Figure 2-2 for jumper location and follow the procedure in Table
2-2 to install them.
Table 2-2 Preliminary Installation Procedure
Step Action
1 Loosen the front screw and pull the chassis out of the case.
2 Lay the chassis on a non-conductive surface.
3 Install the two power select jumpers, supplied with the kit, into the
correct position on the MCU/Input printed wiring board.
See Figure 2-2 for the correct position for the Voltage being used.
4 Replace the controller chassis into the case and tighten the screw.

2.3 Preliminary Installation Procedure, Continued
Power select jumper This controller requires a specific fuse and power jumper position if its
placement model number is DC630X-U-XXX-XX-X-XX.
Figure 2-2 shows you the locations of the Power Select Jumper. It also
shows you where to place the jumper for your particular Voltage being
used.
• 115 Vac 315 mA Fuse The controller is shipped with this
fuse installed and the Power Select
jumper set in the 115 Vac position.
• 230 Vac 200 mA Fuse Fuse included in separate bag.
• 24 Vac/dc 800 mA Fuse Fuse included in separate bag.
CAUTION Applying the wrong power to the controller will severely

damage the controller and is a fire and smoke hazard. Make sure the
jumpers are set correctly.
Figure 2-2 Power Select Jumper Placement
POWER SELECT JUMPER PLACEMENT
24Vac/dc 115 Vac 230 Vac

230Vac 230Vac 230Vac 230Vac 230Vac 230Vac
24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V
PWR SEL PWR SEL PWR SEL
MCU/Input Board
230Vac 230Vac
115Vac 115Vac
24V 24V
Power
Select
PWR SEL
Jumpers
Front Screw
23038

2.3 Preliminary Installation Procedure, Continued
Standard inputs range The controller will be shipped set up for a range of 1 to 5 Volts.
selection If a 4 to 20 or 10 to 50 mA was specified (ordered), a kit of 5 resistors for
(Inputs 1 through 4)
the appropriate range will be included in the shipping box. These must be
attached to the proper terminals as shown in Figure 2-6. The kit numbers
are:
4 to 20 mA Kit # 30755498-001 (250 Ohm Resistor)
10 to 50 mA Kit # 30755498-002 (100 Ohm Resistor)
Optional input 5 range If an Input 5 - Low Level is ordered, kits will be supplied containing:
selection
(Low Level Input) •A Cold Junction Resistor for Thermocouple ranges Kit # 30757088-501
•A Voltage Divider Assembly for 0 to 10 Volt ranges Kit # 30754465-001
•A 250 ohm Precision Resistor for 4 to 20 mA ranges Kit # 30755498-001
•A 100 ohm Precision Resistor for 10 to 50 mA ranges Kit # 30755498-
002
Attach the resistor for your specific range to the Input 5 terminals as
shown in Figure 2-7.
Electrical The controller is considered “rack and panel mounted equipment” per
considerations EN 61010-1, Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General
Requirements. Conformity with 72/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive
requires the user to provide adequate protection against a shock hazard.
The user shall install this controller in an enclosure that limits
OPERATOR access to the rear terminals.
Controller grounding PROTECTIVE BONDING (grounding) of this controller and the

enclosure in which it is installed shall be in accordance with National and
local electrical codes. To minimize electrical noise and transients that may
adversely affect the system, supplementary bonding of the controller
enclosure to a local ground, using a No. 12 (4 mm2) copper conductor, is
recommended.

2.4 Mounting
Physical The controller can be mounted on either a vertical or tilted panel using the
considerations mounting kit supplied. Adequate access space must be available at the
back of the panel for installation and servicing activities.
The overall dimensions and panel cutout requirements for mounting the
controller are shown in Figure 2-3.
Overall dimensions Figure 2-3 shows the overall dimensions for mounting the controller.
Figure 2-3 Dimensions
Dimensions:
millimeters +1.0
inches 138 –0
+0.039
Panel cutout 5.43 –0
144 (DIN
5.67 standard)
72 68 +0.7
–0
2.83 2.68 +0.027
–0
33
1.31
max 233
max
9.19
25
Max. panel thickness
1.00 Rear terminal cover
NOTES:
1. Drawing is not to scale
2. No minimum horizontal spacing is defined.
3. Controller may be mounted at any angle or tilt. 23039

2.4 Mounting, Continued
Note Model Number Before mounting the controller, refer to the nameplate on the inside of the
case and make a note of the model number. It will help later when
selecting the proper wiring configuration.
Mounting procedure Follow the procedure In Table 2-3 below to mount the controller.
Table 2-3 Mounting Procedure
Step Action
1 Mark and cut out the controller hole in the panel according to the
dimension information in Figure 2-3.
There is no minimum horizontal spacing defined.
Vertical spacing must be provided for access to the mounting kit
brackets.
2 Remove the screw cover and loosen the screw on the front of the
controller. Pull the chassis out of the case.
3 Orient the case properly and slide it through the panel hole from the
front.
4 Remove the mounting kit (#30755050-001) from the shipping
container, and install the kit as follows:
• Install the screws into the threaded holes of the clips.
• Insert the prongs of the clips into the two holes in the top and
bottom of the case.
• Tighten both screws to secure the case against the panel.
• Carefully slide the chassis assembly into the case, press to close
and tighten the screw. Replace the screw cover.
5 In addition to the mounting kit, a Rear Terminal Cover Kit
(#30755496-001) is also provided.

2.5 Wiring
Taking electrical Electrical noise is composed of unabated electrical signals which produce
noise precautions undesirable effects in measurements and control circuits.
Digital equipment is especially sensitive to the effects of electrical noise.
Your controller has built-in circuits to reduce the effect of electrical noise
from various sources. If there is a need to further reduce these effects:
• Separate External Wiring - separate connecting wires into bundles (see
Table 2-4) and route the individual bundles through separate conduits or
metal trays.
• Use Suppression Devices - for additional noise protection, you may want
to add suppression devices at the external source. Appropriate suppression
devices are commercially available.
NOTE For additional noise information, refer to Appendix B.
Permissible wire Table 2-4 shows which wire functions should be bundled together.
bundling
Table 2-4 Permissible Wiring Bundling
Bundle No. Wire Functions
1 • Line power wiring
• Earth ground wiring
• Control relay output wiring
• Line voltage alarm wiring
2 Analog signal wire, such as:
• Input signal wire (thermocouple, 4 to 20 mA, etc.)
• 4-20mA output signal wiring
• Slidewire feedback circuit wiring
• Digital input signals
• Communications
3 • Low voltage alarm relay output wiring
• Low voltage wiring to solid state type control circuits

2.5 Wiring, Continued
Identify your wiring To determine the appropriate diagrams for wiring your controller, refer to
requirements the model number interpretation in this section. The model number of the
controller contains selection codes that identify the Input/Output type,
Standard Input Range, Optional 5th Input type, Software Options, and
Optional selections. The model number of the controller can be found on
the outside of the case and/or chassis.
Wiring the controller Using the information contained in the model number, select the
appropriate wiring diagrams from the figures listed below and wire the
controller accordingly.
Wiring Requirements Figure

Composite Wiring Diagram 2-4
AC Line Power 2-5
High Level Inputs - Inputs #1, #2, #3, #4 2-6
Optional Input 5 - Low Level Inputs 2-7
Optional Input 5 - Pulse Inputs 2-8
Current Output 2-9
Second Current Output 2-10
Digital Inputs 2-11
Digital Outputs 2-12
Communications Option 2-13

2.6 Wiring Diagrams
Composite wiring Figure 2-4 is a composite wiring diagram of the UDC6300 controller. It
diagram identifies the terminal designations and their functions. Refer to the
individual diagrams listed to wire the controller according to your
requirements.
Figure 2-4 Composite Wiring Diagram
Digital Output
Customer Power Supply
Terminals
Optional Input 5 See Figure 2-12 High Level Inputs
Low Level Input Terminals
Terminals See Figure 2-6
See Figure 2-7 1 14 14 + Input 1
Pulse Input
Terminals 2 15 15 + Input 2
See Figure 2-8 16 – Signal Common
3 16
2nd Current Output 4 17 17 + Input 3
Terminals
See Figure 2-10 5 18 18 + Input 4
6 19 19 Internal Transmitter Power
7 20 Current Output
Digital Inputs 1 & 2 Terminals
Terminals 8 21 See Figure 2-9
See Figure 2-11
9 22 Communications Option
Terminals
10 23 See Figure 2-13
Digital Inputs
and Outputs 11
Terminals Line Voltage
See Figures 12 L1 Terminals
2-11 & 2-12 See Figure 2-5
13 L2/N
21749

2.6 Wiring Diagrams, Continued
Line voltage wiring This equipment is suitable for connection to 24Vac/dc or 115/230 Vac,
50/60 Hz, power supply mains. When connected to 115/230 Vac, 50/60
Hz, power supply mains, it is the user’s responsibility to provide a switch
and slow-blow (North America), quick-acting, high breaking capacity,
Type F, (Europe) 1/2 A, 250 V fuse(s) or circuit-breaker as part of the
installation. The switch or circuit-breaker shall be located in close
proximity to the controller, within easy reach of the OPERATOR. The
switch or circuit-breaker shall be marked as the disconnecting device for
the controller.
CAUTION Applying the wrong power to the controller will severely
damage the controller and is a fire and smoke hazard.
Figure 2-5 shows the wiring connections for line voltage.
Figure 2-5 Line Voltage Wiring
1 14
2 15
3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11 3
12 L1 + HOT
DC Line Voltage
13 – NEUTRAL or
L2/N "A"
AC Line Voltage
4 1
23040
2
1 The Process controller and the enclosure in which it is mounted shall be grounded in
accordance with National and Local electrical codes. Provide a switch and a slow-blow
(North American), quick-acting, high breaking capacity, type F, (Europe) 2A fuse(s) for
24V (ac or dc) operation, and a 1/2 A, 250V fuse(s), or circuit breaker for 120/240 Vac
operation, as part of this installation.
2 If power service has grounded neutral, connect lead "A" to neutral and
omit the fuse in the neutral lead.
3 PROTECTIVE BONDING (grounding) of this controller and the enclosure in which it is

installed shall be in accordance with National and local electrical codes. To minimize
electrical noise and transients that may adversely affect the system, supplementary
bonding of the controller enclosure to a local ground, using a No. 12 (4 mm2) copper
conductor, is recommended.
4 Before applying power to the controller, set the power select jumpers on the MCU/Input
PWB for the correct operating voltage.

High level input Figure 2-6 shows the wiring connections for Input #1, #2, #3, and #4,
connections also Internal Transmitter Power.
Figure 2-6 High Level Input Connections
High Level Input Connections

Inputs #1, #2, #3, #4
1 14 14 + Input 1
2 15 15 + Input 2
3 16 16 – Signal Common
4 17 17 + Input 3
5 18 18 + Input 4
6 19 19 Internal Transmitter Power
7 20
8 21 + + 1 to 5 Volt
1 to 5 Volts source
9 22 16 –
10 23
11 +
10 to 50 mA + 10 to
50mA
12 100 Ω source
L1 16 –
13 L2/N 1
–
4 to 20 mA + 250 Ω 2 Wire
With Internal 16 1
4 to 20mA
Transmitter
Transmitter
Power 19 +
–
4 to 20 mA 1 Xmitter
External + 250 Ω +
Transmitter 16
Power Power
– +
Supply
1 The 250Ω load resistor for the 4-20mA range or the 100Ω load resistor for the 10-50mA range is supplied with
the controller when the input is specified.
21751
ATTENTION These items must be installed when you wire the controller before startup.

Optional Input 5 Figure 2-7 shows the wiring connections for Optional Input 5, Low Level
(Low Level Inputs) Input.
Figure 2-7 Optional Input 5, Low level Input Connections
R
Optional Input 5 1 14
Low Level Input + 2 15
Connections – 3 16
4 17
5 18
Use Thermocouple
extension wire only 2 6 19
Thermocouple 1 R I 20
N
2 +
P
1
3 – U
T
1R 10-50
5
10 to 50 + 2+ Milliamps
100Ω
mA
1 R Source – 3–
RTD 2 +
3 – 1R MV or Volts
+ except 0 –10
MV or 2+
Volt Volts
Source – 3–
1R
+ 100K 1
3
0 –10 0–10 –
Volt
Volts Source 2 1R 4–20
1 2+ 4 to 20 mA 1
Source
250Ω 2+ Milliamps
– 100K 3
3 – + 3 –
1 The 250Ω load resistor for 4-20mA range, the 100Ω load resistor for the 10-50 mA range, the Voltage divider for
0–10 Volts, or the 500 ohm C/J compensation resistor are supplied with the controller when the input is specified.
These items must be installed when you wire the controller before startup.
2 When installing the cold junction for a T/C input, remove the screw from terminal 1 and install the threaded
end of the assembly into its place.
3 Transmitter Power is not available with this option. 21752

Optional Input 5 Figure 2-8 shows the wiring connections for Optional Input 5-Pulse
(Pulse Inputs) Inputs.
Figure 2-8 Optional Input 5-Pulse Input Connections
R
Optional Input 5 1 14
Pulse Input + 2 15
Connections
– 3 16
17
Two Wire Pulse Device

Pulse Device UDC6300
R nominal =700 Ohms 2
1 1
+
R 0–20 mA
2 +24Vdc
510 Ohms
3
Three Wire Pulse Device

Pulse Device UDC6300
R nominal =1200 Ohms 2
0–20 mA 1 1
R 0–14 mA
+
2 +24Vdc
510 Ohms
3
Externally Powered Pulse Device

Pulse Device Customer UDC6300
Power
R nominal =700 Ohms 2 +5Vdc to 24Vdc
1 1
– + +
R 2 +24Vdc
0–20 mA 510 Ohms

3
23041
1 Dedicated Transmitter Power supply for Pulse Input Devices only.
2 Resistor is supplied by user if required

Current Output Figure 2-9 shows the wiring connections for Current Output.
Figure 2-9 Current Output Connections
1 14
2 15
3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19
+
7 20 Controller Load
Current Output 4–20mA
8 21 – 0 to 1000 Ohms
9 22
10 23 Connect shield to ground at one end only
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
21754

Second Current Figure 2-10 shows the wiring connections for a Second Current Output.
Output
Figure 2-10 Second Current Output Connections
1 14
2 15
3 16
Load
+
4 17
2nd Current Output 4–20mA
0 to 1000 Ohms – 5 18
6 19
7 20
Connect shield to ground at one end only 8 21
9 22
10 23
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
21755

Digital Inputs Figure 2-11 shows the wiring connections for all six Digital Inputs.
Figure 2-11 Digital Input Connections
Digital Input (DI) Switches
DI Switch #6
DI Switch #5
DI Switch #4
DI Switch #3 1 14
DI Switch #2 2 15
3 16
DI Switch #1
4 17
5 18
6 19
Switch
Common 7 20
Connect shield to
ground at one end only 8 21
9 22
1
10 23
2
11
3
12 L1
4
13 L2/N
23042
1 Digital Input #3 shares rear terminals with Digital Output #1 - Alarm #1.
Any use of this output will trigger this digital Input.
2 Digital Input #4 shares rear terminals with Digital Output #2 - Alarm #2.
Any use of this output will trigger this digital Input.
3 Digital Input #5 shares rear terminals with Digital Output #3 - Alarm #3 or

Control Output #1. Any use of this output will trigger this digital Input.
4 Digital Input #6 shares rear terminals with Digital Output #4 - Alarm #4 or

Control Output #2. Any use of this output will trigger this digital Input.

Digital Outputs Figure 2-12 shows the wiring connections for Digital Outputs.
Figure 2-12 Digital Output Connections
1
+
Digital Output 6
Customer Power Supply –
5 to 30 Vdc 7 20
8 21
OUTPUT SOURCE
9 22
DIGITAL OUTPUT #1 Alarm 1 5
To Mechanical 10 23
DIGITAL OUTPUT #2 Alarm 2 5
or 11
Solid State Relay 5
DIGITAL OUTPUT #3 Alarm 3 or Control Out 1
12 L1
5
DIGITAL OUTPUT #4 Alarm 4 or Control Out 2 13 L2/N
External Mechanical Relays External Solid State Relays

Terminal 6 Terminal 6
+
+DIG I/O POWER +DIG I/O POWER
Terminal 10 11 12 or 13 Terminal 10 11 12 or 13
DIGITAL OUTPUTS 2 – DIGITAL OUTPUTS
1 Please note that both the negative and positive

terminals must be connected. Internal Schematic for Digital Outputs
Terminal 6
2 Minimum Coil Resistance is 80 Ohms for 3
+24Vdc Power Supply. VCC + DIG POWER
+5Vdc
3 Each Digital Output can sink a maximum of 0.3 Amps
(minimum load = 80 Ohms for + 24Vdc Power Supply). DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Also, each output is short circuit protected. Terminal 10 11 12 or 13
4 Digital Inputs and Outputs are electrically isolated from all

other inputs and outputs to withstand a HIPOT potential of From
500 Vac for 1 minute or 600 Vac for 1 second. CPU Terminal 7
5 Digital Outputs share rear terminals with Digital Inputs 3, 4 – DIG POWER
4, 5, and 6. Any use of these outputs will also trigger the
Digital Input. (See Figure 2-11)
23043

Communications There are several types of Communications option available:

option connections • RS422ASCII - also refer to Document # 51-51-25-35
• DMCS - also refer to Document # 82-50-10-26
• RS485RTU - also refer to Document # 51-52-25-53
• RS485TDC - also refer to Document # PM12-520
Figure 2-13 Communications Option Connections
1 14
2 15
3 16 MODBUS 485RTU
4 17 RS422/485 COMMUNICATION MASTER

DMCS (A) (RTN) (B)
5 18
6 19
D+ SHLD D–
7 20
2
8 21
D+
9 22
10 23
3
11 D–
12 L1
13 L2/N
120 OHMS
TO OTHER
COMMUNICATION
CONTROLLERS
D– D+
120 OHMS ON LAST LEG

1 Connect shield wires together with the supplied crimp part number 30755381-001
2 Do not run these lines in the same conduit as AC power.
3 Use shielded twisted pair cables (Belden 9271 twinax or equivalent) 21758

Section 3 – Configuration
3.1 Overview
Introduction Configuration is a dedicated operation where you use straightforward

keystroke sequences to select and establish (configure) pertinent control
data best suited for your application.
What’s in this The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section.
section?
Topic Page
3.1 Overview 27
3.2 Configuration Prompts 28
3.3 How to Get Started 30
3.4 Configuration Tips 31
3.5 Configuration Procedure 32
3.6 Tuning Parameters Setup Group 34
3.7 Tuning L2 Parameters Setup Group 37
3.8 Setpoint Ramp/Program Setup Group 39
3.9 Accutune Setup Group 40
3.10 Algorithm Data Setup Group 42
3.11 Advanced Math Setup Group 48
3.12 Output Algorithm Setup Group 51
3.13 Input 1 through 4 Parameters Setup Group 52
3.14 Input 5 Parameters Setup Group 53
3.15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Setup Group 54
3.16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Setup Group 56
3.17 Options Parameters Setup Group 58
3.18 Communications Parameters Setup Group 60
3.19 Alarms Parameters Setup Group 62
3.20 Display Parameters Setup Group 65
3.21 Calib Group 66
3.22 Status Group 66
3.23 Configuration Record Sheet 67
Prompts To assist you in the configuration process, there are prompts that appear in
the upper and lower displays. These prompts let you know what group of
configuration data (Set Up prompts) you are working with and also, the
specific parameters (Function prompts) associated with each group.
Figure 3-1 shows you an overview of the prompt hierarchy.
As you will see, the configuration data is divided into 18 main Set Up
groups plus prompts for calibration and prompts that show the status of
the continuous background tests that are being performed.

3.2 Configuration Prompts
Diagram: prompt Figure 3-1 shows an overview of the UDC 6300 Set Up prompts and their
hierarchy associated Function prompts. (Read from left to right.)
Figure 3-1 Overview of UDC6300 Prompt Hierarchy
Set Up • Press [SET UP] key to access the Set Up prompts
Function• Press [FUNCTION] key to access Function prompts within each Set Up group. • • •
TUNING PROP BD GAIN VALn RATE MIN RSET MIN MAN RSET PROP BD2 RATE2MIN RSET2MIN CYCLE SEC
or GAIN RSET RPM or GAIN2 RSET2RPM
TUNING L2
PROP BD3 GAIN VALn RATE3MIN RSET3MIN MAN3RSET PROP BD4 RATE4MIN RSET4MIN CYC3SEC
or GAIN RSET3RPM or GAIN4 RSET4RPM
SP RAMP SP RAMP TIME MIN FINAL SP SP RATE RATE UP RATE DWN RATEUP2 RATEDWN2
ACCUTUNE FUZZY ACCUTUNE ACCUTUNE2 SP CHANGE PROC GAIN CRITERIA PROCGAIN2 SP CHANG2 CRITERIA2
ALGORTHM LOOP RATE CONTR ALG PID LOOPS CONT2ALG OUT OVRD IN ALG 1 CONSTNT K CALC HIGH CALC LOW
Continued from ALG2 IN A ALG2 IN B ALG2 IN C 8SG CHAR1 XnVALUE Yn VALUE 8SG CHAR2 XnVALUE2
previous line
ADV MATH LOG GATES GATEnTYPE GATEn INA GATEn K GATEn INB GATEn OUTRepeated for 5 (n) Gates
OUT ALG OUT ALG 4–20 RNG OUT2 ALG DO STATE
INPUT 1 XMITTER 1 IN1 HIGH IN1 LOW RATIO 1 BIAS IN1 FILTER 1
INPUT 3 XMITTER 3 IN3 HIGH IN3 LOW RATIO 3 BIAS IN3 FILTER 3 DEADTIME3
INPUT 5 IN5 TYPE IN5 PULSE XMITTER5 IN5 HIGH IN5 LOW RATIO IN5 BIAS IN5 FILTERIN5 BURNOUT5
CONTROL PV SOURCE PID SETS SW VALUE LSP's RSP SRC AUTO BIAS SP TRACK PWR MODE SP HI LIM
Continued fromI HILIM I LOW LIM DROPOFF DEADBAND OUT HYST FAILMODE FAILSAFE PBorGAIN
previous line
CONTROL2 PV2 SRC PID SETS SW VALUE LSP's RSP SOURC AUTO BIAS SP TRACK SP HILIM SP LOLIM
Continued fromI LOLIM DROPOFF DEADBAND FAILMODE FAILSAFE

previous line
OPTIONS CUR OUT 2 4mA VAL 20mA VAL DIG IN 1 DIG1 COMB DIG IN 2 DIG2 COMB DIG IN 3 DIG IN 4
COM COMSTATE ADDRESS ADDRESS2 PV1 ADDR OP1 ADDR PV2 ADDR OP2 ADDR PARITY BAUD
Continued from
previous line RCASOPT1 SHED2MODE SHED2SP CSP2RATIO CSP2BIAS RCASOPT2 LOOPBACK
ALARM A1S1 VALU A1S2 VALU A2S1 VALU A2S2 VALU A3S1 VALU A3S2 VALU A4S1 VALU A4S2 VALU A1S1 TYPE
Continued from A1S1 HorL A1S2 HorL A2S1 HorL A2S2 HorL A3S1 HorL A3S2 HorL A4S1 HorL A4S2 HorL
previous line
DISPLAY DECIMAL DECIMAL2 TEMPUNIT PWR FREQ SP GRAPH 2LOOP DIS ID TAG PV TAG PV TAG 2
CALIB USED FOR FIELD CALIBRATION
STATUS VERSION FAILSAFE FAILSF 2 RAM TEST CONFTEST NV TEST CALTEST FACT CRC

3.2 Configuration Prompts, Continued
...Press or to change the value or selection of the Function prompt.
CYC2 SEC SECURITY LOCKOUT PVEU VALx GAIN VALx
CYC4SEC PVEU VALx GAIN VALx
AT ERROR AT ERROR2
Continued on
ALG1 IN A ALG1 IN B ALG1 IN C IN ALG 2 CONST K2 CALC HIGH CALC LOW
next line
Yn VALUE2 POLY NOM TOTALIZER TOT SCALE TOT SECUR Ε RESET TOT RATE
EMISSIV5
SP LO LIM ACTION OUT RATE PCT/MIN UP PCT/MIN DN OUTHILIM OUTLOLIM

Continued on
next line
MINorRPM
ACTION OUT RATE PCT/MIN UP PVT/MIN DN OUTHILIM OUTLOLIM

Continued on
I HILIM
next line
DIG IN 5 DIG IN 6 DI ON LP1 LATCHING

Continued on
UNITS BOXMODE SHED TIME SHED1MODE SHED1SP CSP1RATIO CSP1BIAS
next line
A3S2 TYPE A4S1 TYPE A4S2 TYPE

Continued on
A1S2 TYPE A2S1 TYPE A2S2 TYPE A3S1 TYPE
next line
AL HYST ALM ACTN ALM OUT 1 ALM OUT 2 ALM OUT 3 ALM OUT 4
RATIO4SET LANGUAGE 22672A

3.3 How To Get Started
Read the Read “Configuration Tips” shown on the next page. These tips will help
configuration tips you to easily and quickly accomplish the tasks at which you will be
working when you configure your controller.
Read configuration Read “Configuration Procedure”. This procedure tells you how to access
procedure the Set Up groups, and the Function parameters within each of these
groups that are shown in the Prompt Hierarchy in Figure 3-1.
Set Up groups The Set Up groups and Function parameters are listed in the order of their
appearance. The list includes the name of the prompt, the range of setting
or selections available, and the factory setting.
Parameter This section is for those who only need a reference to a particular Set up
explanations or group or function prompt selection.
definitions
If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt listed, refer to
Section 4 – Configuration Parameter Definitions.
This section lists the Set Up and Function prompts, the selections or range
of settings that you can make for each, plus a detailed explanation or
definition of each parameter and their dependencies and limitations.
Configuration record Located on the last page of this section is a “Configuration Record Sheet”.
sheet When you make your configuration selections, record them on this sheet.
Then you will have a record of how the controller was configured.

3.4 Configuration Tips
Introduction Listed below in Table 3-1 are a few tips that will help you enter the
configuration data more quickly.
ATTENTION If you are replacing a UDC6000 or an existing UDC6300
you can keep the old configuration data by removing the EEPROM from
the old unit and placing it in the new unit. Refer to Subsection 8.8 for
location of the EEPROM and instructions.
Table 3-1 Configuration Tips
Function Tip
Displaying Groups Use the SET UP key to display the Set Up groups.
The group titles are listed in this section in the order that
they appear in the controller.
Displaying Use the FUNC key to display the individual
Functions
parameters under each group. The prompts are listed in
the order of their appearance in each group.
Scrolling When in the Set Up mode, use the or key to scan
the Set Up groups in both directions. Groups scroll at a
rate of 3 per second.
Changing values When changing the value of a parameter, you can use a
quickly single or key. Hold the key in to increase the rate
of change. Stop pressing the key for 1/2 second , then
press again to restart at a slow rate.
You can also adjust a more significant digit in the upper
display by holding in one key or and pressing the
other or at the same time.
The adjustment will move one digit to the left.
Press the key again and you will move one more digit to
the left.
Restoring to the When you change the value or selection of a parameter
original value while in Set Up mode and decide not to enter it,
press FUNC and simultaneously, the original value
or selection will be recalled.
Exiting SET UP To exit Set Up mode, press the LOWR DISP key.
mode
This returns the display to the same state it was in
immediately preceding entry into the Set Up mode.
Timing out from If you are in Set Up mode and do not press any keys for
Set Up mode one minute, the controller will time out and revert to the
mode and display that was being used prior to entry into
Set Up mode and stores any changes you have made.
Key Error When a key is pressed and the prompt “KEY ERROR”
appears in the lower display, it will be for one of the
following reasons:
• parameter not available
• not in Set Up mode, press SET UP key first
• key malfunction, do keyboard test (operation)
• Individual key locked out

3.5 Configuration Procedure
Introduction Each of the Set Up groups and their functions are pre-configured at the
factory.
The factory settings are shown in the Set Up group tables that follow this
procedure.
If you want to change any of these selections or values, follow the
procedure in Table 3-2. This procedure tells you the keys to press to get to
any Set Up group and any associated Function parameter prompt.
If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt, refer to Section 4 –
Configuration Parameter Definitions.
Procedure Follow the procedure listed in Table 3-2 to access the Set Up groups and
Function prompts.
Table 3-2 Configuration Procedure

Step Operation Press Result
1 Select Set Up mode Upper Display
SET SET UP
UP Lets you know you are in the
configuration mode and a Set Up
group title is being displayed in the
lower display.
Lower Display
TUNING
This is the first Set Up group title.
2 Select any Set Up group Successive presses of the SET UP key will
SET
UP sequentially display the other Set Up group titles
shown in the prompt hierarchy in figure 3-1.
You can also use the or keys to scan the

Set Up groups in both directions.
Stop at the Set Up group title which describes the
group of parameters you want to configure. Then
proceed to the next step.
3 Select a Function Upper Display
Parameter FUNC 1.0
L1/L2 Shows you the current value or
selection for the first function prompt
of the particular Set Up group that
you have selected.
Lower Display
GAIN Shows the first Function prompt
within that Set Up group.
Example displays show Set Up group “Tuning”,
Function prompt “Gain” and the value selected.
Table 3-2 continued on next page

3.5 Configuration Procedure, Continued
Procedure
(continued)
Table 3-2 Configuration Procedure, continued

Step Operation Press Result
4 Select other Function Successive presses of the FUNC Key will
Parameters FUNC
L1/L2 sequentially display the other function prompts of
the Set Up group you have selected.
Stop at the function prompt that you want to
change, then proceed to the next step.
5 Change the value or These keys will increment or decrement the value
selection or selection that appears for the function prompt
you have selected.
or See “Configuration Tips” for instructions to
increase or decrease value quickly.
Change the value or selection to meet your needs.
If the display flashes, you are trying to make an
unacceptable entry.
ATTENTION When you change the value or

selection of a parameter while in Set Up mode and
decide not to enter it, press FUNC and
simultaneously, the original value or selection will
be recalled.
6 Enter the value or This key selects another function prompt.
selection FUNC
L1/L2
or
This key selects another Set Up group.
SET The value or selection you have made will be
UP entered into memory after another key is pressed.
7 Exit Configuration This exits configuration mode and returns the

LOWR controller to the same state it was in immediately
DISP preceding entry into the Set Up mode. It stores any
changes you have made.

3.6 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction The Tuning Set Up group contains the Function parameters that will allow
your controller to respond correctly to changes in process variable or
setpoint.
You can start with predetermined values but you will have to watch your
process to determine how to modify them.
If you have the Adaptive Tune option, this will automatically select Gain,
Rate, and Reset values.
Set this group last Because this group contains functions that have to do with Security and
Lockout, it is best to configure this group last, after all the other
configuration data has been loaded.
Duplex Heat Cool See Table 4-2 in Section 4 - Prompt Definitions for Duplex Heat/Cool
designations.

3.6 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Function prompts Table 3-3 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning Set Up group. How
the “Algorithm” and “Control” Set Up groups are configured determines
which prompts will appear.
Table 3-3 Tuning Group Function Prompts
Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory
Lower Display
Name Range of Setting Setting
Upper Display
PROP BAND Proportional Band, or 0.1 to 9999 (PB) --

or Gain
GAIN 0.001 to 1000 (Gain) 1.0
GAIN VALn Gain Value being used by Read Only --

Gain Scheduling when
enabled
RATE MIN Rate in Minutes 0.00 to 10.00 minutes (0.00=Off) 0.00
RESET MIN Reset in minutes/repeat 0.02 to 50.00 1.0
RESET RPM Reset in repeats/minute 0.02 to 50.00 1.0
MAN RESET Manual Reset –100 to 100% Output 0.0

PROPBAND2 Proportional 0.1 to 9999 (PB) --
or Band 2, or
GAIN 2 Gain 2 0.001 to 1000 (Gain) 1.0
RATE2MIN Rate 2 in Minutes 0.00 to 10.00 minutes (0.00=Off) 0.00

RESET2MIN Reset 2 in minutes/repeat 0.02 to 50.00 1.0
RESET2RPM Reset 2 in repeats/minute 0.02 to 50.00 --
CYCLE SEC Cycle Time (Heat) 1 to 120 seconds 4

CYC2 SEC Cycle Time 2 (Cool) 1 to 120 seconds 4
SECURITY Security Code 0 to 4095 0
LOCKOUT Configuration Lockout NONE CALIB
CALIBRATE
+CONF
+VIEWING
MAXIMUM
PVEU VAL1 PV1 Value for Gain PV value within the PV limits. 0
Scheduling In Engineering units

Function prompts
(continued)
Table 3-3 Tuning Group Function Prompts, continued
Lower Display
Upper Display
GAIN VAL1 * Gain 1 Value for Gain 0.001 to 1000 1.0
Scheduling Gain or PB
* ATTENTION
If units of percent proportional band (PB) are selected under Set Up prompt "CONTROL", function
prompt "PB or GAIN, these values displayed are in %PB, but the lower display will still show Gain.

3.7 Tuning L2 Parameters Set Up Group (Cascade or 2
Loop)
Function prompts Table 3-4 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning L2 Set Up group.
This group is only displayed if the controller is configured for "Cascade"
or
"2 Loop" control at prompt "PV2SCR"
Table 3-4 Tuning L2 Group Function Prompts
Lower Display
Upper Display
PROPBAND3 Proportional Band 3, or 0.1 to 9999 (PB) --

or Gain 3
GAIN3 0.001 to 1000 (Gain) 1.0
GAIN VALn Gain Value being used by Read Only --

Gain Scheduling when
enabled
RATE 3 MIN Rate 3 in Minutes 0.00 to 10.00 minutes (0.00=Off) 0.00
MAN RESET3 Manual Reset 3 –100 to 100% Output 0.0

PROPBAND4 Proportional 0.1 to 9999 (PB) --
or Band 4, or
GAIN 4 Gain 4 0.001 to 1000 (Gain) 1.0
RATE4MIN Rate 4 in Minutes 0.00 to 10.00 minutes (0.00=Off) 0.00

CYC 3SEC Cycle Time 3 (Heat) 1 to 120 seconds 4

CYC4 SEC Cycle Time 4 (Cool) 1 to 120 seconds 4

3.7 Tuning L2 Parameters Set Up Group (Cascade or 2
Loop), Continued
Function prompts
(continued)
Table 3-4 Tuning Group Function Prompts, continued
Lower Display
Upper Display
Scheduling

Scheduling
Scheduling
Scheduling
Scheduling
Scheduling
Scheduling
Scheduling
* ATTENTION
If units of percent proportional band (PB) are selected under Set Up prompt "CONTROL", function
prompt "PB or GAIN, these values displayed are in %PB, but the lower display will still show Gain.

3.8 SP Ramp/Program Set Up Group
Single Setpoint Ramp The Setpoint Ramp Set Up group contains the Function parameters that let
you configure a single set point ramp to occur between the current local
setpoint and a final setpoint over a time interval (SP RAMP).
Setpoint rate The Setpoint Ramp Set Up group also contains the function parameters
that let you configure a specific rate of change for any Local Setpoint
change (SP RATE). It includes selections for Rate Up and Rate Down.
Function prompts Table 3-5 lists all the function prompts in the SP RAMP Set Up group.
Table 3-5 SP Ramp Group Function Prompts

Lower Display
Upper Display
SP RAMP Single Setpoint Ramp DISABLE DISABLE

Selection ENABLE
ENABLE 2
ENABLE 12
TIME MIN Single Setpoint Ramp 0 to 255 minutes 3
Time
FINAL SP Single Setpoint Final Enter a value within the setpoint 1000
Setpoint limits
SP RATE Setpoint Rate DISABLE DISABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE 2
ENABLE 12
EU/HR UP Rate Up Value for 0 to 9999 0
Loop 1 (SP Rate Enabled) in Units per Hour
EU/HR DN Rate Down Value for 0 to 9999 0
EU/HR UP2 Rate Up Value for 0 to 9999 0
EU/HR DN2 Rate Down Value for 0 to 9999 0

3.9 Accutune Set Up Group
Introduction The Accutune Set Up group offers these selections:
• (FUZZY) Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression - uses fuzzy logic to suppress
or eliminate any overshoot that may occur when the PV approaches
setpoint.
• (TUNE) Demand Tuning - The tuning process is initiated through the
operator interface keys or via a digital input (if configured). The algorithm
then calculates new tuning parameters and enters them in the tuning
group.
• (SP Only) SP Tuning -SP Tune continuously adjusts the PID
parameters in response to setpoint changes. You can select tuning on
minimum setpoint changes of 5% up to 15% span. Perform SP tuning after
you have configured the controller.
SP Tuning does not work with 3 Position Step Control algorithm.
• (TUNE + PV) or (SP + PV) PV Tuning - The (TUNE) Demand Tuning
or the (SP Only) Setpoint Tuning portions of these selections work as
stated above. PV Adapt will occur during Process Variable (PV)
disturbances (0.3% span or larger) which result from non-linearities,
process dynamics, load changes, or other operating conditions. When this
condition exists, the controller monitors the process response for 1 and 1/2
process cycles around the setpoint to determine whether there has been a
true process change or a momentary upset.

3.9 Accutune Set Up Group, Continued
Function prompts Table 3-6 lists the function prompts in the “ACCUTUNE” Set Up group.
Table 3-6 Accutune Group Function Prompts
Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting
Upper Display
FUZZY Fuzzy Overshoot DISABLE Disabl
Suppression ENABLE
ACCUTUNE Accutune DISABLE Disabl
TUNE (Demand Tuning)
SP ONLY (SP Tuning)
TUNE + PV
SP ONLY+ PV
ACCUTUNE2 Accutune2 DISABLE Disabl
TUNE (Demand Tuning)
SP ONLY (SP Tuning)
TUNE + PV
SP ONLY + PV
SP CHANG* Setpoint Change Value 5 to 15% Input Span 10
PROC GAIN* Process Gain 0.10 to 10.00 1.0
SP CHANG2* Setpoint Change Value 5 to 15% Input Span 10
PROCGAIN2* Process Gain 0.10 to 10.00 1.0
CRITERIA* Tuning Criteria - Loop 1 NORMAL FAST
FAST
CRITERIA2* Tuning Criteria - Loop 2 NORMAL FAST
FAST
AT ERROR AccutuneError codes Read Only --
or NONE
AT ERROR 2 OUT LIMIT
(depending on Loop) ID FAIL
ABORT
LOW PV
RUNNING
* APPLIES TO “SP ONLY” AND “SP + PV) ONLY

3.10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with various algorithms residing in the controller: Control
Algorithms, Input Math algorithms, Selecting the Number of PID Loops,
and Output Override.
Function prompts Table 3-7 lists all the function prompts in the “ALGORITHM” Set Up group.
Table 3-7 Algorithm Group Function Prompts
Lower Display
Upper Display
LOOP RATE Loop Sampling Rate LOOP 1 LOOP 2 1 3X 2 3X

(conversions per second) 1 12X
for loop 1 and loop 2. 1 9X 2 0X
1 6X 2 3X
1 3X 2 3X
•Input 5 cannot be used for this
selection.
CONT ALG Control Algorithm ON-OFF PID A
PID A
PID B
PD+MR
3POS STEP
M/A STN
MTR TIME Three position Step Motor
Time (appears only if
3POS STEP is selected at
prompt “CONT ALG”.)
PID LOOPS PID Loop Selection 1 LOOP 1 or 2
2 LOOPS
CASCADE
CONT2 ALG Control 2 Algorithm PID A PID A
PID B
PD+MR
M/A STN
OUT OVRD Output Override Select DISABLE DISABLE
HI SELECT
LO SELECT
IN ALG1 Input 1 Algorithm NONE NONE
(formulas are located in WTD AVG
Section 4) FFWD SUM
SUMMER
HI SELECT
LO SELECT
√ MUL DIV
√ MULTIPLY
MULT DIV
MULTIPLY
FFWD MUL
CONST K Weighted Average Ratio 0.001 to 1000 --
or K Constant for Math
Selections

3.10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group, Continued
Function prompts
(continued)
Table 3-7 Algorithm Group Function Prompts, continued
Lower Display
Upper Display
CALC HIGH Calculated Variable High –999.0 to 9999 in Engineering --

Scaling Factor for Input Units
Algorithm 1
CALC LOW Calculated Variable Low –999.0 to 9999 in Engineering --
Algorithm 1
ALG1 IN A Input Algorithm 1 INPUT 1 --
Input A Selection INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OTHER ALG
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
ALG1 IN B Input Algorithm 1 INPUT 1 --
Input B Selection INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OTHER ALG
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
ALG1 IN C Input Algorithm 1 NONE --
Input C Selection INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OTHER ALG
IN ALG2 Input 2 Algorithm NONE NONE
(formulas are located in WTD AVG
Section 4) FFWD SUM 2
A–B DIV C
HI SELECT
LO SELECT
√ MUL DIV
√ MULTIPLY
MULT DIV
MULTIPLY
FFWD MUL 2
CONST K2 Weighted Average Ratio 0.001 to 1000 --
or K Constant for Math
Selections

Function prompts
(continued)
Lower Display
Upper Display
CALC HIGH Calculated Variable High –999.0 to 9999 in Engineering --

Algorithm 2
CALC LOW Calculated Variable Low –999.0 to 9999 in Engineering --
Algorithm 2
ALG2 IN A Input Algorithm 2 INPUT 1 --
Input A Selection INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OTHER ALG
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
ALG2 IN B Input Algorithm 2 INPUT 1 --
Input B Selection INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OTHER ALG
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
ALG2 IN C Input Algorithm 2 NONE --
Input C Selection INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OTHER ALG

Function prompts
(continued)
Lower Display
Upper Display
8SG CHAR1 Eight Segment DISABLE DISABLE

Characterizer INPUT 2
LOOP 1 OUT
LOOP 2 OUT
INPUT 4
X0 VALUE X0 Input Value (X Axis) 0 to 99.99 % 0
Y0 VALUE Y0 Output Value (Y Axis) 0 to 99.99 % 0

Function prompts
(continued)
Lower Display
Upper Display
8SG CHAr2 Eight Segment DISABLE DISABLE

Characterizer 2 INPUT 2
LOOP 1 OUT
LOOP 2 OUT
INPUT 4
X0 VALUE2 X0 Input Value (X Axis) 0 to 99.99 % 0
Y0 VALUE2 Y0 Output Value (Y Axis) 0 to 99.99 % 0

Function prompts
(continued)
Lower Display
Upper Display
POLYNOM Polynomial Equation DISABLE DISABLE

INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
C0 VALUE Polynomial Coefficient C0 –99.99 to 99.99 0
C1 VALUE Polynomial Coefficient C1 –9.999 to 9.999 0
C2 X 10-1 Polynomial Coefficient C2 –9.999 to 9.999 0
TOTALIZER Totalization Function DISABLE DISABLE
INPUT 1
L1 IN ALG
L2 IN ALG
ΣXXXXXXXX Current Scale Factor Σ * En --

(upper display)
Actual Current Totalized Where:
Value (lower display) n=Integer Scale Factor Value
TOT SCALE Totalizer Scale Factor *E0 E0

*E1
*E2
*E3
*E4
*E5
*E6
TOT SECUR Totalizer Reset Lock UNLOCK UNLOCK
LOCK
Σ RESET ? Totalizer Reset NO NO

YES
TOT RATE Totalizer Rate of SECOND SECOND
Integration MINUTE
HOUR
DAY
MIL/DAY

3.11 Advanced Math Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with various Logic Gates that are available for use in the
controller. It also lists what each of the two inputs and the output can
represent. Up to 5 different gates can be configured.
Function prompts Table 3-8 lists all the function prompts in the “ADVANCED MATH” Set
Up group.
Table 3-8 Advanced Math Group Function Prompts

Lower Display
Upper Display
LOG GATES Logic Gate Function ENABLE DISABLE

(for each gate, make DISABLE
selection for:
Gate Type
Input A Source
Input B Source
Output Use)
GATEnTYPE Gate n Type NOT USED NOT USED
OR
(n =1,2,3,4,or 5) (n =1,2,3,4,or 5) NOR
AND
NAND
X OR
X NOR
B LT A
B GT A

3.11 Advanced Math Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Function prompts
(continued)
Table 3-8 Advanced Math Group Function Prompts, continued

Lower Display
Upper Display
GATE n INA Gate n Input A Digital Selections(OR thru CONST K

XNOR):
(n =1,2,3,4,or 5) (n =1,2,3,4,or 5) DIG IN 1
DIG IN 2
DIG OUT 1
DIG OUT 2
DIG OUT 3
DIG OUT 4
GATE1OUT
GATE2OUT
GATE3OUT
GATE4OUT
GATE5OUT
FIXED ON
FIXED OFF
M/A MODE
L/R SP 1
DIS/EN AT
M/A MODE 2*
L/R SP 2*
DIS/ENAT2*
Analog Selections(GT or LT):
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
LOOP 1 PV
LOOP 1 SP
CONSTANT K
LOOP 2 PV*
LOOP 2 SP*
* appears only when 2Loops are configured.
GATE n K K Constant for –999.0 to +9999 0
"GATE n INA" prompt
(n =1,2,3,4,or 5) selection "CONST K".

Function prompts
(continued)
Table 3-8 Advanced Math Group Function Prompts, continued

Lower Display
Upper Display
GATE n INB Gate n Input B Digital Selections(OR thru FIXED OFF

XNOR):
(n =1,2,3,4,or 5) (n =1,2,3,4,or 5) DIG IN 1
DIG IN 2
DIG OUT 1
DIG OUT 2
DIG OUT 3
DIG OUT 4
GATE1OUT
GATE2OUT
GATE3OUT
GATE4OUT
GATE5OUT
FIXED ON
FIXED OFF
M/A MODE
L/R SP 1
DIS/EN AT
M/A MODE 2*
L/R SP 2**
DIS/ENAT2
Analog Selections(GT or LT):
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
LOOP 1 PV
LOOP 1 SP
TOTALIZER
LOOP 2 PV*
LOOP 2 SP*
* appears only when 2Loops are configured.
GATE n OUT GATE n Output Selection DIG OUT 1 ANY GATE
DIG OUT 2
(n =1,2,3,4,or 5) (n =1,2,3,4,or 5) DIG OUT 3
DIG OUT 4
ANY GATE
M/A MODE
L/R SP L1
DIS/EN AT
RESET TOT
M/A MODE 2
L/R SP L2
DIS/ENAT 2

3.12 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with various Output types that are available for use in the
controller. It also lists the Digital Output Status, and the Current Duplex
functionality.
Function prompts Table 3-9 lists all the function prompts in the “OUT ALG” Set Up group.
Table 3-9 Output Algorithm Group Function Prompts

Lower Display
Upper Display
OUT ALG Loop 1 Output Algorithm TIME CURRENT

CURRENT
TIME DPLX
CUR DPLX
CUR TIME
TIME CUR
4–20 RNG Current Duplex Range 100PCT 100PCT
50PCT
OUT2 ALG Loop 2 Output Algorithm NONE CURRENT
TIME
CURRENT
CUR DPLX
CUR TIME
TIME CUR
DO STATE Digital Output State at 0% 3OFF 4OFF 3OFF 4ON
Output 3ON 4ON
3OFF 4ON
3ON 4OFF

3.13 Input 1 Through 4 Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 1
through 4. The number of the Input group you are working with will
appear in each prompt.
Function prompts Table 3-10 lists all the function prompts in the “INPUT 1 through 4” Set
Up groups.
Table 3-10 Input 1 through 4 Set Up Groups Function Prompts

Lower Display
Upper Display
XMITTERn Transmitter DISABLE LINEAR

Characterization B TC T TC
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4 E TC W TC
ATTENTION Change J TC 100 PT
K TC 100 PT LO
of input characterization NNM TC 200 PT
selection results in loss of NIC TC 500 PT
any field calibration and R TC LINEAR
restores factory calibration S TC SQROOT
of linear range 1 to 5 IN2 No R/B(Xmitter 4
Volts. only)
INn HIGH Input n High Range Value –999 to 9999 1000
(Adjustable for Linear or in engineering units
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4 Square Root
characterization only)
INn LOW Input n Low Range Value –999 to 9999 0
(Adjustable for Linear or in engineering units
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4 Square Root
characterization only)
RATIO n Input n Ratio Value –20.00 to 20.00 1.0
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4
BIAS IN n Input n Bias Value –999 to 9999. 0
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4
FILTER n Input n Filter 0 to 120 seconds 0
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4
DEADTIME3 Deadtime for Input 3 only 0.0 to 60.0 Minutes 0

3.14 Input 5 Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 5.
Function prompts Table 3-11 lists all the function prompts in the INPUT 5 Set Up group.
Table 3-11 Input 5 Group Function Prompts

Lower Display
Upper Display
IN 5 TYPE Input 5 Type DISABLE DISABLE

B TC 100 PT
ATTENTION Change E TC 100 PT LO
of input type selection J TC 200 PT
results in loss of any field K TC 500 PT
calibration and restores NNM TC RH RADIAM
factory calibration. NIC TC MILLIAMPS
R TC 0–10MV
S TC 10–50MV
T TC 1–5V
W TC 0–10V
PULSE
IN5 PULSE Input 5 Actuation when a DISABLE DISABLE
Pulse Input Board is used FREQ INP
PULSE
XMITTER5 Transmitter DISABLE LINEAR
Characterization B TC T TC
E TC W TC
J TC 100 PT
K TC 100 PT LO
NNM TC 200 PT
NIC TC 500 PT
R TC LINEAR
S TC SQROOT
IN5 HIGH Input 5 High Range Value –999 to 9999 1000

in engineering units
(Adjustable for linear inputs only)
IN5 LOW Input 5 Low Range Value –999 to 9999 0
(Adjustable for linear inputs only)
RATIO 5 Input 5 Ratio Value –20.00 to 20.00 1.0
BIAS IN5 Input 5 Bias Value –999 to 9999 0
FILTER 5 Input 5 Filter 0 to 120 seconds 0
0 = No Filter
BURNOUT5 Sensor Break Protection NONE NONE
UP
DOWN
EMISSIV 5 Emissivity for RH Radiam 0.01 to 1.00 1.0

3.15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction The functions listed in this group define how the Single Loop process
controller or Loop 1 of a Two Loop process controller will control the
process.
Function prompts Table 3-12 lists all the function prompts in the “CONTROL” Set Up
group.
Table 3-12 Control Group Function Prompts

Lower Display
Upper Display
PV SOURCE Process Variable Source INPUT 1 INPUT 1

INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
IN ALG 1
IN ALG 2
PID SETS Tuning Parameter Sets 1 ONLY 1 ONLY
2KEYBD
2PV SW
2SP SW
GAIN SCDL
SW VALUE Automatic Switchover Value in Engineering Units within 0.00
Value Input Range
LSP'S Local Setpoint Source 1 ONLY 1 ONLY
TWO
THREE
RSP SOURC Remote Setpoint Source NONE NONE
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
IN ALG 1
IN ALG 2
AUTO BIAS Automatic Bias ENABLE DISABLE
DISABLE
SP TRACK Local Setpoint Tracking NONE NONE
PV
RSP
PWR MODE Power Up Mode Recall MANUAL A or M SP
A or M SP
A or M LSP
SP HILIM Setpoint High Limit 0 to 100% of span input in 1000
engineering units
SP LOLIM Setpoint Low Limit 0 to 100% of span input in 0
engineering units

3.15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Function prompts, Table 3-12 lists all the function prompts in the “CONTROL” Set Up
continued group.
Table 3-12 Control Group Function Prompts, continued

Lower Display
Upper Display
ACTION Control Output Direction DIRECT REVERSE

REVERSE
OUT RATE Output Change Rate ENABLE DISABL
DISABLE
PCT/MIN UP Output Rate Up Value 0 to 9999% / minute 0
PCT/MIN DN Output Rate Down Value 0 to 9999% / minute 0
OUTHILIM High Output Limit –5.0 to 105.0% of output 100.0
OUTLOLIM Low Output Limit –5.0 to 105.0% of output 0.0
I HI LIM High Reset Limit Within the range of the output 100.0
limits
I LO LIM Low Reset Limit Within the range of the output 0.0
limits
DROPOFF Controller Dropoff Value –5.0 to 105.0% of output 0.0
DEADBAND Output Relay Deadband Duplex: only 1.0
–5.0 to 25.0%
All others
0.0 to 25.0%
OUT HYST Output Relay Hysteresis 0.0 to 5.0% of PV Span for On/Off 0.5
control
FAILMODE Failsafe Mode NON LATCH NON LATCH
LATCHING
FAILSAFE Failsafe Output Value Set within the range of the output 0.0
limits. 0 to 100%
PBorGAIN Proportional Band or PB PCT GAIN
Gain Units GAIN
MINorRPM Reset Units RPM MIN
MIN

3.16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction The functions listed in this group define how Loop 2 of a Two Loop
process controller will control the process..
Function prompts Table 3-13 lists all the function prompts in the “CONTROL2” Set Up
group.
Table 3-13 Control2 Group Function Prompts

Lower Display
Upper Display
PV 2 SRC Process Variable Source INPUT 1 INPUT 2

INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
IN ALG 1
IN ALG 2
PID SETS Tuning Parameter Sets 1 ONLY 1 ONLY
2KEYBD
2PV SW
2SP SW
GAIN SCDL
SW VALUE Automatic Switchover Value in Engineering Units within 0.00
Value Input Range
LSP'S Local Setpoint Source 1 ONLY 1 ONLY
TWO
THREE
RSP SOURC Remote Setpoint Source NONE NONE
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
IN ALG 1
IN ALG 2
AUTO BIAS Automatic Bias ENABLE DISABLE
DISABLE
SP TRACK Local Setpoint Tracking NONE NONE
PV
RSP
SP HILIM Setpoint High Limit 0 to 100% of PV span input in 1000
engineering units
SP LOLIM Setpoint Low Limit 0 to 100% of PV span input in 0
engineering units

3.16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Function prompts, Table 3-13 lists all the function prompts in the “CONTROL2” Set Up
continued group.
Table 3-13 Control2 Group Function Prompts, continued

Lower Display
Upper Display
ACTION Control Output Direction DIRECT REVERSE

REVERSE
OUT RATE Output Change Rate ENABLE DISABL
DISABLE
PCT/MIN UP Output Rate Up Value 0 to 9999% / minute 0
PCT/MIN DN Output Rate Down Value 0 to 9999% / minute 0
OUTHILIM High Output Limit –5.0 to 105.0% of output 100.0
OUTLOLIM Low Output Limit –5.0 to 105.0% of output 0
I HI LIM High Reset Limit Within the range of the output 100.0
limits
I LO LIM Low Reset Limit Within the range of the output 0.0
limits
DROPOFF Controller Dropoff Value –5.0 to 105.0% of output 0.0
DEADBAND Output Relay Deadband Duplex: only 1.0
–5.0 to 25.0%
All others
0.0 to 25.0%
FAILMODE Failsafe Mode NON LATCH NON LATCH
LATCHING
FAILSAFE Failsafe Output Value Set within the range of the output 0.0
limits. 0 to 100%

3.17 Options Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with data that covers the 2nd Current Output and the Two
Digital Inputs. If your controller does not have any of these options, the
prompts will not appear.
Function prompts Table 3-14 lists all the function prompts in the “Options” Set Up group.
Table 3-14 Options Group Function Prompts
Lower Display
Upper Display
CUR OUT 2 2nd Current Output Option DISABL DISABLE

INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
PV
DEVIATION
OUTPUT
SP
LSP1
IN ALG 1
IN ALG 2
PV LOOP2
DEV LOOP2
OUTPUT 2
SP LOOP 2
LSP1 LP 2
4mA VALUE Low Scaling Factor Low scale value to represent 4 mA. 0.0
20mA VALU High Scaling Factor High scale value to represent 20 mA. 100.0
DIG IN 1 Digital Input 1 selections NONE NONE

TO MANUAL
TO SP 1
TO SP 2
TO SP 3
TO DIRECT
TO HOLD
TO PID 2
PV IS IN2
PV IS IN3
PV IS IN4
PV IS IN5
TO RUN
MAN FSAFE
TRACK 1
TRACK 2
TO OUT 2
PULSEDOWN
OUT 3 ON
OUT 4 ON
INHIBIT 1
TO RSP
DSP L1/L2
RESET FB
TOA/M STA
To PURGE
LOW FIRE
ToTUNE

3.17 Options Set Up Group, Continued
Function prompts, Table 3-14 lists all the function prompts in the “Options” Set Up group.
continued
Table 3-14 Options Group Function Prompts, continued
Lower Display
Upper Display
DIG1 COMB Digital Input 1 DISABLE DISABLE

Combinations +TO PID2
+TO DIR
+TO SP2
+DIS ADT1
+TO SP1
+TO RUN
DIG IN 2 Digital Input 2 selections Same as DIG IN 1 NONE
DIG 2 COMB Digital Input 2 DISABLE DISABLE

Combinations +TO PID2
+TO DIR
+TO SP2
+DIS ADT2
+TO SP1
+TO RUN
DIG IN 3 Digital Input 3 selections NONE NONE
TO MANUAL
TO SP1
TO SP2
TO SP3
TO RUN
TO HOLD
TO PID2
PV IS IN1
PV IS IN2
PV IS IN3
PV IS IN4
PV IS IN5
RSP - IN1*
RSP - IN2
RSP - IN3
RSP - IN4
RSP - IN5
TO DIRECT
MAN FSAFE
ToA/M STA
TO PURGE
LOW FIRE
* Digital Input Only
DI ON LP1 Assigned to Loop 1 DI3,4,5,6 DI3,4,5,6

DI3,4,5
DI3,4
DI3
LATCHING Purge/Low Fire action NONE, PURGE, LOW FIRE, NONE
BOTH

3.18 Communications Group
Introduction This option allows the controller to be connected to a host computer by
way of various communications options.
The controller looks for messages from the computer at regular intervals.
If these messages are not received within the configured shed time, the
controller will SHED from the communications link and return to stand
alone operation.
The device address, parity, baud rate, Computer Setpoint, Units, Ratio,
and Bias are configurable depending on the protocol you are using.
You can also set the SHED output mode and setpoint recall, and
communication units.
Up to 99 addresses can be configured over this link.
485TDC option
Up to four RS485 link addresses are allowed when the communication
option is selected as 485TDCSDI. One PV Point and one OP point are
required to be configured per loop when the UDC6300 TDC integration
schematics are to be used for Operator Interface from the TDC Universal
Station. Remote Cascade Option and overall mode of Operation can also
be configured.
Function prompts Table 3-15 lists all the function prompts in the “Commun” Set Up group.
Table 3-15 Commun Group Function Prompts
Lower Display
Upper Display
COM STATE Communications Selection DISABL 485MODRTU DISABL

485DMCS 485TDCSDI
422ASCII 485BSAP
ADDRESS Loop 1 Communications 1 to 99 0
485DMCS, 422ASCII, Station Address
485MODRTU, 485BSAP
ADDRESS2 Loop 2 Communications 1 to 99 0
485ASCII only Station Address
PV1 SLOT Loop 1 Process Variable 0 to 16 0
485TDCSDI only (PV) Point Address
OP1 SLOT Loop 1 Output (OP) Point 0 to 16
485TDCSDI only Address
PV2 SLOT Loop 2 Process Variable 0 to 16
485TDCSDI only (PV) Point Address
OP2 SLOT Loop 2 Output (OP) Point 0 to 16
485TDCSDI only Address
PARITY Parity ODD ODD
485ASCII only EVEN
BAUD RATE Baud Rate 300 1200 4800 19200 300
485 ASCII only NOTE: If you make a change in 600 2400 9600 38400
Baud Rate, cycle the power supply
after you make the change.
FRAMING Framing DEFAULT 50MSEC 10MSEC

422ASCII, 485MODRTU 100MSEC 25MSEC
only
XMT DELAY Transmission Delay NONE 20MSEC 40MSEC
10MSEC 30MSEC 50MSEC

3.18 Communications Group, Continued
Function prompts,
continued
Table 3-15 Commun Group Function Prompts, continued

Lower Display
Upper Display
DUPLEX Transmission Response HALF FULL

Does not apply to FULL
485TDCSDI
DATA FORM Transmission Data Format INTEGER INTEGER
485MODRTU only FLOAT POINT
UNITS Communication Units PERCENT PERCENT
ENG
BOX MODE Overall Mode of UDC6300 BASIC MODE FULL
Operation FULL MODE
SHEDTIME Shed Time 1 to 255 sample periods 0
0 = No Shed
SHEDMODE Shed Controller Mode and LAST LAST
Output Level for Loop 1 TO MAN
FSAFE
ToAUTO
SHED SP Shed Setpoint Recall for TO LSP TO LSP
Loop 1 TO CSP
CSP RATIO Loop 1 Computer Setpoint –20.00 to 20.00 1.00
Ratio
CSP BIAS Loop 1 Computer Setpoint –999.0 to 9999 0.0
Bias
RCASMODE Remote Cascade Option for SPC SPC
485TDCSDI only Loop 1 DDC
M/A STN
SHED2MODE Shed Controller Mode and LAST LAST
Output Level for Loop 2 TO MAN
FSAFE
ToAUTO
SHED2 SP Shed Setpoint Recall for TO LSP TO LSP
Loop 2 TO CSP
CSP2 RATIO Loop 2 or Cascade Computer –20.00 to 20.00 1.00
Setpoint Ratio
CSP2 BIAS Loop 2 or Cascade Computer –999.0 to 9999 0.0
Setpoint Bias
RCAS2MOD Remote Cascade Option for SPC SPC
485TDCSDI only Loop 2 DDC
M/A STN
TEST COM Test Communications DISABL DISABL
(replaces LOOPBACK) ENABLE

3.19 Alarms Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with the Alarms function that is available with your
controller.
There are up to four alarms available. Each alarm has two setpoints.
You can configure each of these two setpoints to alarm on one of several
events, and you can configure each setpoint to alarm High or Low.
ATTENTION
Alarm 1 = Digital Output 1
Function prompts Table 3-16 lists all the function prompts in the “Alarms” Set Up group.
Table 3-16 Alarms Group Function Prompts

Lower Display
Upper Display
A1S1 VALU Alarm 1, Setpoint 1 Within the range of selected 90

Value parameter or PV Span for
Deviation Alarm
Deviation Alarm
Deviation Alarm
Deviation Alarm
Deviation Alarm
Deviation Alarm
A4S1 VALU Alarm 4, Setpoint Within the range of selected 95
Deviation Alarm
Deviation Alarm

3.19 Alarms Set Up Group, Continued
Function prompts, Table 3-16 lists all the function prompts in the “Alarms” Set Up group.
continued
Table 3-16 Alarms Group Function Prompts, continued
Lower Display
Upper Display
A1S1 TYPE Alarm 1, Setpoint 1 Type NONE OUTPUT

INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
PV (Process Variable)
DEVIATION
OUTPUT
SHED (Communications)
REM SP
REM SP2
PV 2
DEV 2
OUTPUT 2
MANUAL
MANUAL2
FAILSAFE
FAILSAFE2
A1S2 TYPE Alarm 1, Setpoint 2 Type Same as A1S1TYPE OUTPUT
A1S1 H L Alarm 1, Setpoint 1 State LOW HI

HIGH
A1S2 H L Alarm 1, Setpoint 2 State LOW LO
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH

Function prompts, Table 3-16 lists all the function prompts in the “Alarms” Set Up group.
continued
Table 3-16 Alarms Group Function Prompts, continued

Lower Display
Upper Display

HIGH
HIGH
AL HYST Alarm Hysteresis 0.0 to 5.0 % of Output or Span as 0.1
appropriate
ALM ACTN Alarm Relay Coil Action ENERGIZE ENERGIZE
DE ENERGIZ
ALM OUT 1 Latching Alarm for NON LATCH NON LATCH
Output 1* LATCHING
Output 2* LATCHING
Output 3* LATCHING
Output 4* LATCHING
* For CE conformity, Performance Criterion A, select ‘NON-

LATCHING”

3.20 Display Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with the Decimal Place, Units of Temperature, Power
Frequency, and Process ID Tag.
Function prompts Table 3-17 lists all the function prompts in the “Display” Set Up group.
Table 3-17 Display Group Function Prompts
Lower Display
Upper Display
DECIMAL Control Loop 1 Decimal XXXX XXXX

Place XXX.X
XX.XX
X.XXX
ATTENTION Auto-ranging will

occur to whichever decimal place
has been selected.
DECIMAL2 Control Loop 2 Decimal XXXX XXXX
Place XXX.X
XX.XX
X.XXX
TEMP UNIT Control Loop 1 DEG F NONE
Temperature Units DEG C
NONE
PWR FREQ Power Frequency 60 Hertz 60HZ
50 Hertz
2 LOOP DIS Bargraph Display SPnPVnOn SPnPVnON
L1 L2 On
L1 –– On
–– L2 On
SP GRAPH Setpoint Indication FULL FULL
ONE BAR
ID TAG Identification Tag DISABLE ENABLE
ENABLE
PV TAG Process Variable Tag DISABLE DISABLE
ENABLE
PV TAG2 Process Variable Tag DISABLE DISABLE
ENABLE
TAG ID or PV tag Letters: A to Z --
ConfigurationTag Numbers: 0 to 9
Others: >, <, #, /, \, . ,
(blank), –, ., °, =, ?,_,
^, V, +, *
RATIO4SET Ratio for Input 4 - Set from DISABLE DISABLE
the front of the controller LOWR DISP
LANGUAGE Display Language ENGLISH ENGLISH
FRENCH
GERMAN

3.21 Calib Group
Calibration data The prompts used here are for field calibration purposes.
Refer to Section 6– Input Calibration in this manual for complete
information and instructions.
3.22 Status Group
Status Test Data The prompts used here are read only.
They are used to determine the reason for a controller failure.
Refer to Section 8– Troubleshooting in this manual for complete
information.

3.23 Configuration Record Sheet
Keep a record Enter the value or selection for each prompt on this sheet so you will have
a record of how your controller was configured.
Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory
Prompt Prompt Selection Setting Prompt Prompt Selection Setting
TUNING PROP BD __________ -- TUNINGL2 PVEU VAL3 __________ 0
or (Continued) PVEU VAL4 __________ 0
GAIN __________ 1.0 PVEU VAL5 __________ 0
GAIN VALn Read Only PVEU VAL6 __________ 0
RATE MIN __________ 0 PVEU VAL7 __________ 0
RSET MIN __________ 1.00 PVEU VAL8 __________ 0
or GAIN VAL1 __________ 1.0
RSET RPM __________ -- GAIN VAL2 __________ 1.0
or GAIN VAL3 __________ 1.0
MAN RSET __________ 0 GAIN VAL4 __________ 1.0
PROP BD2 __________ -- GAIN VAL5 __________ 1.0
or GAIN VAL6 __________ 1.0
GAIN 2 __________ 1.0 GAIN VAL7 __________ 1.0
RATE2MIN __________ 0 GAIN VAL8 __________ 1.0
RSET2MIN __________ 1.00
or SP RAMP SP RAMP __________ DISABLE
RSET2RPM __________ -- TIME MIN __________ 3
CYCSEC __________ 4 FINAL SP __________ 1000
CYC2SEC __________ 4 SP RATE __________ 0
SECURITY __________ 0 EU/HR UP __________ 0
LOCKOUT __________ CALIB EU/HR DN __________ 0
PVEU VAL1 __________ 0 EU/HR UP2 __________ 0
PVEU VAL2 __________ 0 EU/HR DN2 __________ 0
PVEU VAL3 __________ 0
PVEU VAL4 __________ 0 ACCUTUNE FUZZY __________ DISABLE
PVEU VAL5 __________ 0 ACCUTUNE __________ DISABLE
PVEU VAL6 __________ 0 ACCUTUNE2 __________ DISABLE
PVEU VAL7 __________ 0 SP CHANG __________ 10
PVEU VAL8 __________ 0 PROC GAIN __________ 1.0
GAIN VAL1 __________ 1.0 CRITERIA __________ FAST
GAIN VAL2 __________ 1.0 SPCHANG2 __________ 10
GAIN VAL3 __________ 1.0 PROCGAN2 __________ 1.0
GAIN VAL4 __________ 1.0 CRITERIA2 __________ FAST
GAIN VAL5 __________ 1.0
GAIN VAL6 __________ 1.0 ALGORITHM LOOP RATE __________ 1.3X 2.3X
GAIN VAL7 __________ 1.0 CONTR ALG __________ PID A
GAIN VAL8 __________ 1.0 MTR TIME __________ 0
PID LOOPS __________ 1 or 2
TUNINGL2 PROP BD3 __________ -- CONT2ALG __________ PID A
or OUT OVRD __________ DISABLE
GAIN3 __________ 1.0 IN ALG 1 __________ NONE
GAIN VALn Read Only CONSTNT K __________ --
RATE3MIN __________ 0 CALC HIGH __________ --
RSET3MIN __________ 1.0 CALC LOW __________ --
or ALG1 INA __________ --
RSET3RPM __________ -- ALG1 INB __________ --
or ALG1 INC __________ --
MAN3RSET __________ 0 IN ALG 2 __________ NONE
PROP BD4 __________ -- CONST K2 __________ --
or CALC HIGH __________ --
GAIN 4 __________ 1.0 CALC LOW __________ --
RATE4MIN __________ 0 ALG2 INA __________ --
RSET4MIN __________ 1.0 ALG2 INB __________ --
or ALG2 INC __________ --
RSET4RPM __________ -- 8SEG CHAR __________ DISABLE
CYC3SEC __________ 4 X0 VALUE __________ 0
CYC4SEC __________ 4 X1 VALUE __________ 0
PVEU VAL1 __________ 0 X2 VALUE __________ 0
PVEU VAL2 __________ 0 X3 VALUE __________ 0
X4 VALUE __________ 0
Continued X5 VALUE __________ 0
next page X6 VALUE __________ 0

3.23 Configuration Record Sheet, Continued

ALGORITHM X7 VALUE __________ 0 ADV MATH GATE4TYP __________ NOT USED
(continued) X8 VALUE __________ 0 (continued) GATE4INA __________ CONST K
Y0 VALUE __________ 0 GATE4 K __________ 0
Y1 VALUE __________ 0 GATE4 INB __________ FIXED OFF
Y2 VALUE __________ 0 GATE4 OUT __________ ANY GATE
Y3 VALUE __________ 0 GATE5TYP __________ NOT USED
Y4 VALUE __________ 0 GATE5 INA __________ CONST K
Y5 VALUE __________ 0 GATE5 K __________ 0
Y6 VALUE __________ 0 GATE5 INB __________ FIXED OFF
Y7 VALUE __________ 0 GATE5 OUT __________ ANY GATE
Y8 VALUE __________ 0
8SEG CHA2 __________ DISABLE OUT ALG OUT ALG __________ CURRENT
X0 VALUE2 __________ 0 4–20 RNG __________ 100 PCT
X1 VALUE2 __________ 0 OUT2 ALG __________ CURRENT
X2 VALUE2 __________ 0 DO STATE __________ 3OFF 4ON
X3 VALUE2 __________ 0
X4 VALUE2 __________ 0 INPUT 1 XMITTER1 __________ LINEAR
X5 VALUE2 __________ 0 IN1 HIGH __________ 1000
X6 VALUE2 __________ 0 IN1 LOW __________ 0
X7 VALUE2 __________ 0 RATIO 1 __________ 1.00
X8 VALUE2 __________ 0 BIAS IN1 __________ 0
Y0 VALUE2 __________ 0 FILTER 1 __________ 0
Y1 VALUE2 __________ 0
Y2 VALUE2 __________ 0 INPUT 2 XMITTER2 __________ DISABLE
Y3 VALUE2 __________ 0 IN2 HIGH __________ 1000
Y4 VALUE2 __________ 0 IN2 LOW __________ 0
Y5 VALUE2 __________ 0 RATIO 2 __________ 1.00
Y6 VALUE2 __________ 0 BIAS IN2 __________ 0
Y7 VALUE2 __________ 0 FILTER 2 __________ 0
Y8 VALUE2 __________ 0
POLY NOM __________ DISABLE INPUT 3 XMITTER3 __________ DISABLE
C0 VALUE __________ 0 IN3 HIGH __________ 1000
C1 VALUE __________ 0 IN3 LOW __________ 0
C2 X 10-1 __________ 0 RATIO 3 __________ 1.00
C3 X 10-3 __________ 0 BIAS IN3 __________ 0
C4 X 10-5 __________ 0 FILTER 3 __________ 0
C5 X 10-7 __________ 0 DEADTIME3 __________ 0
TOTALIZER __________ DISABLE
E XXXXXXX __________ -- INPUT 4 XMITTER4 __________ DISABLE
TOT SCALE __________ E0 IN4 HIGH __________ 1000
TOT SECUR __________ UNLOCK IN4 LOW __________ 0
E RESET ? __________ NO RATIO 4 __________ 1.00
TOT RATE __________ SECOND BIAS IN4 __________ 0
FILTER 4 __________ 0
ADV MATH LOGGATES __________ DISABLE
GATE1TYP __________ NOT USED INPUT 5 IN5 TYPE __________ DISABLE
GATE1INA __________ CONST K IN5 PULSE __________ DISABLE
GATE1 K __________ 0 XMITTER 5 __________ LINEAR
GATE1 INB __________ FIXED OFF IN5 HIGH __________ 1000
GATE1 OUT __________ ANY GATE IN5 LOW __________ 0
GATE2TYP __________ NOT USED RATIO IN5 __________ 1.00
GATE2INA __________ CONST K BIAS IN5 __________ 0
GATE2 K __________ 0 FILTER 5 __________ 0
GATE2 INB __________ FIXED OFF BURNOUT5 __________ NONE
GATE2 OUT __________ ANY GATE Continued EMISSIV5 __________ 1.0
GATE3TYP __________ NOT USED next page
GATE3INA __________ CONST K
GATE3 K __________ 0
GATE3 INB __________ FIXED OFF
GATE3 OUT __________ ANY GATE


CONTROL PVSOURCE __________ IN 1 COMMUN COMSTATE __________ DISABLE
PID SETS __________ 1 ONLY ADDRESS __________ 0
SW VALUE __________ 0 ADDRESS2 __________ 0
LSP's __________ 1 ONLY SHED TIME __________ LAST
RSPSRC __________ NONE PARITY __________ ODD
AUTO BIAS __________ DISABLE BAUD __________ 19200
SP TRACK __________ NONE SHEDMODE __________ LAST
PWR MODE __________ A or M SP SHED SP __________ TO LSP
SP HI LIM __________ 1000 UNITS __________ PERCENT
SP LO LIM __________ 0 CSP RATIO __________ 1.00
ACTION __________ REVERSE CSP BIAS __________ 0.0
OUT RATE __________ DISABLE CSP2RATIO __________ 1.00
PCT/MIN UP __________ 0 CSP2BIAS __________ 0.0
PCT/MIN DN __________ 0 LOOPBACK __________ DISABLE
OUTHILIM __________ 100.0
OUTLOLIM __________ 0.0 ALARMS A1S1 VALU __________ 90
I HILIM __________ 100.0 A1S2 VALU __________ 10
I LOLIM __________ 0.0 A2S1 VALU __________ 95
DROPOFF __________ 0.0 A2S2 VALU __________ 5
DEADBAND __________ 1.0 A3S1 VALU __________ 90
OUT HYST __________ 0.5 A3S2 VALU __________ 10
FAILMODE __________ NON LATCH A4S1 VALU __________ 95
FAILSAFE __________ 0.0 A4S2 VALU __________ 5
PBorGAIN __________ GAIN A1S1TYPE __________ OUTPUT
MINorRPM __________ MIN A1S2TYPE __________ OUTPUT
A2S1TYPE __________ OUTPUT
CONTROL2 PV2 SRC __________ IN 2 A2S2TYPE __________ OUTPUT
PID SETS __________ 1 ONLY A3S1TYPE __________ OUTPUT
SW VALUE __________ 0 A3S2TYPE __________ OUTPUT
LSP's __________ 1 ONLY A4S1TYPE __________ OUTPUT
RSPSOURC __________ NONE A4S2TYPE __________ OUTPUT
AUTO BIAS __________ DISABLE A1S1 H L __________ HI
SP TRACK __________ NONE A1S2 H L __________ LO
SP LOLIM __________ 0.0 A2S1 H L __________ HI
SP HILIM __________ 100.0 A2S2 H L __________ LO
ACTION __________ REVERSE A3S1 H L __________ HI
OUT RATE __________ DISABLE A3S2 H L __________ LO
PCT/MIN UP __________ 0 A4S1 H L __________ HI
PCT/MIN DN __________ 0 A4S2 H L __________ LO
OUTHILIM __________ 100.0 AL HYST __________ 0.1
OUTLOLIM __________ 0.0 ALM ACT __________ ENERGIZE
I HILIM __________ 100.0 ALM OUT1 __________ NON LATCH
I LOLIM __________ 0.0 ALM OUT2 __________ NON LATCH
DROPOFF __________ 0.0 ALM OUT3 __________ NON LATCH
DEADBAND __________ 1.0 ALM OUT4 __________ NON LATCH
FAILMODE __________ NON LATCH
FAILSAFE __________ 0.0
CUR OUT 2 __________ OUTPUT 2

OPTIONS 4mA VAL __________ 0.0
20mA VAL __________ 100.0
DIG IN1 __________ NONE
DIG1 COMB __________ DISABLE
DIG IN2 __________ NONE
DIG2 COMB __________ DISABLE
DIG IN3 __________ DISABLE
DI ON LP1 __________ DI3,4,5,6
LATCHING __________ NONE


DISPLAY DECIMAL __________ XXXX
DECIMAL2 __________ XXXX
TEMPUNIT __________ NONE
PWR FREQ __________ 60HZ
SP GRAPH __________ DISABLE
2LOOP DIS __________ FULL
ID TAG __________ ENABLE
PV TAG __________ DISABLE
PV TAG 2 __________ DISABLE
TAG __________ ---
RATIO4SE __________ DISABLE
T __________ ENGLISH
LANGUAGE

Section 4 – Configuration Prompt Definitions
4.1 Overview
Introduction This section provides information for all the user configurable parameters
listed in the Section 3 - Configuration. If you aren't familiar with these
parameters, this section gives you the parameter prompt, the selection or
range of setting that you can make, and a definition of how each
parameter setting affects controller performance. It will also refer you to
any other prompts that might be affected by your selection.
What’s in this The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section. They are
section? listed in the order of their appearance in the controller.
Topic See Page
4.1 Overview 71
4.2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 72
4.3 Tuning L2 Parameters Set Up Group 76
4.4 Setpoint Ramp/Rate Set Up Group 77
4.5 Accutune Set Up Group 79
4.6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group 82
4.7 Advanced Math Set Up Group 98
4.8 Output Algorithm Set Up Group 104
4.9 Input 1, 2, 3, or 4 Set Up Group 106
4.10 Input 5 Set Up Group 108
4.11 Control Set Up Group 111
4.12 Control 2 Set Up Group 116
4.13 Options Set Up Group 120
4.14 Communications Set Up Group 128
4.15 Alarms Set Up Group 133
4.16 Display Set Up Group 138
4.17 Calibration Data 141
4.18 Status Test Data 141
ATTENTION If you are replacing a UDC6000 or an existing UDC6300

the old unit and placing it in the new unit. Refer to Subsection 8.8 for
location of the EEPROM and instructions.

4.2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction Tuning consists of establishing the appropriate values for the tuning
constants for a single loop controller. These parameters are also for Loop
1 of a 2 Loop or Cascade control configuration.
Adaptive Tune feature automatically selects Gain, Rate, and Reset.
This section also contains Keyboard Lockout/Security selections.
Set this group last Because this group contains functions that have to do with security and
lockout, we recommend that you configure this group last, after all the
other configuration data has been loaded.
Tuning group Table 4-1 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning setup group and
prompts their definitions.
Table 4-1 Tuning Group Prompt Definitions

Lower Display Upper Display Parameter
Prompt Range of Setting Definition
or Selection
PROP BD 0.1 to 9999% PROPORTIONAL BAND (simplex) is the percent of
or or the range of the measured variable for which a
GAIN 0.001 to 1000 proportional controller will produce a 100% change
in its output.
GAIN is the ratio of output change (%) over the
measured variable change (%) that caused it.
100%
G = PB%
where PB is the proportional band (in %)

If the PB is 20%, then the Gain is 5. And, at those
settings, a 3% change in the error signal (SP-PV) will
result in a 15% change in the controller's output due
to proportional action. If the Gain is 2, then the PB is
50%.
Also defined as "HEAT" Gain on Duplex models for
variations of Heat/Cool applications.
The selection of Prop. Band or Gain is made in the
"CONTROL" parameter group under prompt
"PBorGAIN."
GAIN VALn Read Only LOOP 1 GAIN - This is the value being provided by
Gain Scheduling when enabled.
RATE MIN 0.00 to 10.00 minutes RATE action, in minutes, affects the controller's
0.08 or less = OFF output whenever the deviation is changing; and
affects it more when the deviation is changing faster.
Also defined as "HEAT" Rate on Duplex models for

Table 4-1 Tuning Group Prompt Definitions, continued

or Selection
RSET MIN 0.02 to 50.00 RSET MIN = RESET IN MINUTES / REPEAT
or RSET RPM = RESET IN REPEATS PER MINUTE
RSET RPM RESET (Integral Time) adjusts the controller's output
in accordance with both the size of the deviation
(SP-PV) and the time it lasts. The amount of the
corrective action depends on the value of Gain. The
Reset adjustment is measured as how many times
proportional action is repeated/minute or how many
minutes before one repeat of the proportional action
occurs.
Used with control algorithm PID-A or PID-B.
Also defined as "HEAT" Reset on Duplex models for
The selection of minutes per repeat or repeats per
minute is made in the “CONTROL” parameters
group under prompt "MINorRPM."
MAN RSET –100 to +100 MANUAL RESET is only applicable if you use
(in % output) control algorithm PD WITH MANUAL RESET in the
“Algorithm” Set up group.. Because a proportional
controller will not necessarily line out at setpoint,
there will be a deviation (offset) from setpoint. This
eliminates the offset and lets the PV line out at
setpoint.
Bias appears on the lower display.
PROP BD2 0.1 to 999.9% PROPORTIONAL BAND 2 or GAIN 2, RATE 2, and
or or RESET 2 parameters are the same as previously
GAIN 2 0.001 to 999.9 described for “Heat” except that they refer to the
cool zone tuning constants on duplex models or the
second set of PID constants, whichever is pertinent.
RATE2MIN 0.00 to 10.00 minutes ATTENTION
0.08 or less = OFF
RSET2MIN 0.02 to 50.00 Set 2 Tuning Parameters are not available when
RSET2RPM Adaptive Tune selection for Loop 1 is “SP+PV”.
GAIN VALn Read Only LOOP 2 GAIN - This is the value being provided by
Gain Scheduling.
CYCLE SEC 1 to 120 seconds CYCLE TIME (HEAT) determines the length of one
time proportional output relay cycle. Defined as
"HEAT" cycle time for Heat/Cool applications.
CYC2 SEC 1 to 120 seconds CYCLE TIME 2 (COOL) is the same as above
except it applies to Duplex models as the cycle time
in the "COOL" zone of Heat/Cool applications or for
2nd set of PID constants.


or Selection
SECURITY 0000-4095 SECURITY CODE – The level of keyboard lockout
may be changed in the set up mode. Knowledge of a
security code may be required to change from one
level to another. Select this number here, copy it,
and keep it in a secure location.
Entering “0” disables the security code feature.
NOTE: The Security Code is for keyboard entry only
and is not available via communications.
Can only be changed if “LOCKOUT” selection is
“NONE”.
LOCKOUT LOCKOUT applies to one of the functional groups:
Configuration, Calibration, Tuning, Adaptive Tune.
DO NOT CONFIGURE UNTIL ALL
CONFIGURATION IS COMPLETE.
NONE No Lockout – all groups read/write.
CALIBRATE CALIB RATE– All are available for read/write except
for the Calibration.
+CONF +CONF – Tuning, SP Ramp, and Adaptive Tune
groups are read/write. All other groups are read only.
Calibration group is not available.
+VIEW +VIEW – Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are
read/write. No other parameters are viewable.
MAXIMUM MAX IMUM– Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters
are available for read only. No other parameters are
available.
PVEU VAL 1 PV1 Value for Gain Gain Scheduling allows you to schedule 8 user-
Scheduling defined Gain Values (GAIN VALn) applied over 8
user-defined PV Bands (PVEU VALn).
PVEU VAL 2 PV2 Value for Gain
Scheduling PVEU VAL 1 is the first PV value to be used in the
schedule. Enter a value, in engineering units, that is
PVEU VAL 3 PV3 Value for Gain within the PV limits.
Scheduling
To complete the PV selections for the segments,
PVEU VAL 4 PV4 Value for Gain enter a PV value for all the PVEU VAL prompts
Scheduling listed.
PVEU VAL 5 PV5 Value for Gain The table on the next page shows the relationship
Scheduling between the GAIN Values and the PVEU Values.
Scheduling

Scheduling

Scheduling


or Selection
GAIN VAL 1 Gain Value 1 for Gain GAIN VAL 1 is the first of 8 user-defined Gain
Scheduling values.
GAIN VAL 2 Gain Value 1 for Gain Enter a Gain Value you want to be used with "PVEU
Scheduling VAL n" previously entered.
GAIN VAL 3 Gain Value 1 for Gain To complete the Gain selections, enter a Gain value
Scheduling for all the GAIN VAL prompts listed.
GAIN VAL 4 Gain Value 1 for Gain The table below shows the relationship between the
Scheduling GAIN Values and the PVEU Values.
GAIN VAL 5 Gain Value 1 for Gain Gain PV Band over which each Gain
Scheduling Value X applies
1 Low range limit to PVEU VAL2
GAIN VAL 6 Gain Value 1 for Gain
Scheduling 2 PVUE VAL2 to PVEU VAL3
3 PVUE VAL3 to PVEU VAL4
GAIN VAL 7 Gain Value 1 for Gain 4 PVUE VAL4 to PVEU VAL5
Scheduling
5 PVUE VAL5 to PVEU VAL6
GAIN VAL 8 Gain Value 1 for Gain 6 PVUE VAL6 to PVEU VAL7
Scheduling 7 PVUE VAL7 to PVEU VAL8
8 PVUE VAL8 to High Range Limit
ATTENTION When PB is configured (instead of
Gain) in the "CONTROL" group prompt "PB or
GAIN", the displayed "GAIN VALn" is in units of
%PB.

4.3 Tuning Loop 2 Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction Tuning L2 (Loop 2) consists of establishing the appropriate values for the
tuning constants for Loop 2 on 2 Loops or Internal Cascade control.
Tuning group Table 4-2 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning L2 setup group and
Table 4-2 Tuning L2 (Loop 2) Group Prompt Definitions

or Selection
PROP BAND3 Same as "TUNING" The definitions listed for the parameters at the left
GAIN 3 are the same as those listed previously for the
RATE3MIN TUNING parameters Set Up Group except they are
RESET3MIN or for Loop 2.
RESET3RPM
MANRESET3 The table below shows you how to use them for
PROP BAND4 Duplex Heat/Cool applications.
GAIN 4 DUPLEX OUTPUT RANGES
RATE4MIN 0 TO 50%-TUNING SETS 2 AND 4:COOL
RESET4MIN or 50 TO 100%-TUNING SETS 1 AND 3: HEAT
RESET4RPM
Duplex Heat
CYC3SEC
Output or Loop 1 Loop 2
CYC4SEC Range Cool
PVEU VAL 1
0 to 50% Cool PID SET 2 PID SET 4
PVEU VAL 2
PVEU VAL 3 Gain 2 Gain 4
PVEU VAL 4 Rate 2 Rate 4
PVEU VAL 5 Reset 2 Reset 4
PVEU VAL 6 Cycle 2 Cycle 4
PVEU VAL 7 50 to 100% Heat PID SET 1 PID SET 3
PVEU VAL 8 Gain Gain 3
GAIN VAL 1
Rate Rate 3
GAIN VAL 2
GAIN VAL 3 Reset Reset 3
GAIN VAL 4 Cycle Cycle 3
GAIN VAL 5
GAIN VAL 6
GAIN VAL 7
GAIN VAL 8

4.4 Setpoint Ramp/Rate Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with enabling Single Setpoint Ramp function or Setpoint
Rate on one or both control loops. You can start or stop the ramp by
pressing the FUNC key and the key simultaneously.
A single setpoint ramp can be configured to occur between the current
local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to
255 minutes.
There is also a configurable rate of change for any local setpoint change.
ATTENTION SPRAMP and SRRATE will probably cause the SP
portion of Accutune to abort. PV Tune will function normally.
Setpoint Ramp/ Rate Table 4-3 lists all the function prompts in the Setpoint Ramp/Rate setup
group prompts group and their definitions.
Table 4-3 Setpoint Ramp/Rate Group Definitions
or Selection
SP RAMP SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP — make a selection to
enable or disable the setpoint ramp function. Make
sure you configure a ramp time and a final setpoint
value.
DISABL DISABLE SETPOINT RAMP — Disables the
setpoint ramp option
ENABLE ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP — Allows the single
setpoint ramp prompts for Loop 1 to be shown.
ENABLE 2 ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP — Allows the single
setpoint ramp to run in Loop 2.
ENABLE 12 ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP — Allows the single
setpoint ramp to be run on Loop 1 and Loop 2.
TIME MIN 0 to 255 minutes SETPOINT RAMP TIME — Enter the number of
minutes desired to reach the final setpoint.
A ramp time of “0” implies and immediate change of
setpoint.
FINAL SP Within SP limits SETPOINT RAMP FINAL SETPOINT — Enter the
value desired for the final setpoint. The controller will
operate at the setpoint set here when ramp is ended.
ATTENTION If the ramp is on "HOLD", the held

setpoint can be changed by the or keys.
However, the ramp time remaining and original ramp
rate is not changed. Therefore, when returning to
RUN mode, the setpoint will ramp at the same rate
as previous to the local setpoint change and will stop
if the final setpoint is reached before the time
expires. If the time expires before the final setpoint
is reached, it will jump to the final setpoint.
ATTENTION SP RAMP and SP RATE will cause

the SP portion of Accutune to abort. PV Tune will
continue to function normally.

4.4 Setpoint Ramp/Rate Set Up Group, Continued
Setpoint Ramp/ Rate

group prompts,
continued
Table 4-3 Setpoint Ramp/Rate Group Definitions, continued
or Selection
SP RATE SETPOINT RATE — Lets you configure a specific
rate of change for any local setpoint change. “SP
RAMP” must be disabled.
DISABL DISABLE SETPOINT RATE — disables the
setpoint rate option
ENABLE ENABLE SETPOINT RATE — allows the SP rate
feature for Loop 1
ENABLE 2 ENABLE SETPOINT RATE 2 — allows the SP rate
feature for Loop 2
ENABLE 12 ENABLE SETPOINT RATE 12 — allows the SP
rate feature for Loop 1 and Loop 2.
EU/HR UP 0 to 9999 in Engineering RATE UP — Rate up value for Loop 1. When
Units per hour making a setpoint change, this is the rate at which
the controller will change from the original setpoint
up to the new one. The ramping (current) setpoint
can be viewed as SPn in the lower display.
Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in
Setpoint (i.e. no rate applies).
EU/HR DN 0 to 9999 in Engineering RATE DOWN — Rate down value for Loop 1. When
down to the new one. The ramping (current) setpoint
EU/HR UP2 0 to 9999 in Engineering RATE UP — Rate up value for Loop 2. When
up to the new one. The ramping (current) setpoint
EU/HR DN 2 0 to 9999 in Engineering RATE DOWN — Rate down value for Loop 2. When
down to the new one. The ramping (current) setpoint

4.5 Accutune Set Up Group
Introduction Accutune offers the following selections:
• (FUZZY) Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression
• (TUNE)Demand Tuning, or
• (SP Only) Setpoint Tuning, or
• (TUNE+PV) Demand Tuning + PV Adaptive Tune
• (SP+PV) Setpoint Tuning + PV Adaptive Tune
Descriptions of their functions are listed with each selection in Table 4-4.
ATTENTION Selecting "Gain Scheduling" in the "CONTROL" or
"CONTROL 2" Set Up groups automatically disables Accutune for that
group.
Accutune group Table 4-4 lists all the function prompts in the Accutune setup group and
Table 4-4 Accutune Group Definitions
or Selection
FUZZY FUZZY OVERSHOOT SUPPRESSION - can be
enabled or disabled independently of whether
Demand tuning or SP tuning is enabled or disabled.
DISABL DISABLE- Disable Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression
ENABLE ENABLE - The UDC uses Fuzzy Logic to suppress
or minimize any overshoot that may occur when PV
approaches SP. It will not recalculate any new tuning
parameters.
ACCUTUNE ACCUTUNE
DISABL DISABLE – Disables the Accutune function.
TUNE TUNE - If “TUNE” is selected, and tuning is initiated
through the operator interface or digital input (if
configured), the algorithm calculates new tuning
parameters and enters them into the tuning group.
SP Only SETPOINT ONLY – This selection tunes on setpoint
changes only. It employs time domain analysis to
accelerate line out at any desired setpoint without
prior process knowledge.
TUNE+PV TUNE + PV - This selection provides “TUNE” On
Demand tuning Plus PV adaptive tuning whenever a
PV process disturbance of 0.3% span or greater
occurs. It will take 1 and 1/2 process cycles around
setpoint befor any process recognition and re-tuning
can occur due to PV disturbances.
SP Only + PV SP + PV - This selection tunes on setpoint changes
but also whenever a PV process disturbance of
(SP Only and SP+PV do 0.3% span or greater occurs. It will take 1 and 1/2
not operate with TPSC process cycles around setpoint befor any process
Algorithm) recognition and re-tuning can occur due to PV
disturbances.

Table 4-4 Accutune Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
ACCUTUNE 2 ACCUTUNE - Loop 2 Available only if configured
for 2Loop or Cascade.
DISABL DISABLE ACCUTUNE 2 – Disables the Accutune
function for Loop 2.
TUNE TUNE - same as ACCUTUNE
SPoNLY SETPOINT ONLY – Same as ACCUTUNE
TUNE + PV TUNE + PROCESS VARIABLE- Same as

ACCUTUNE
SP Only + PV SETPOINT ONLY PLUS PROCESS VARIABLE -

Same as ACCUTUNE
SP CHANG* 5 to 15% SETPOINT CHANGE - The minimum setpoint
change that will result in re-tuning must be
configured between 5% and 15%:( i.e. If the range is
0 to 2400 and 5% is configured, re-tuning will occur if
the setpoint change is 120 or larger.)
PROC GAIN* 0.10 to 10.00 PROCESS GAIN – This is the Gain of the process
being tuned on Loop 1. It is automatically calculated
during tuning process. This is normally a READ only
value. It should only need to be changed if the cont-
roller fails to identify the process. In this case, set the
value to the algebraic value of PV in percent, divided
by output in percent while in the manual mode.
SP CHANG2* 5 to 15% SETPOINT CHANGE LOOP 2- The minimum
setpoint change on Loop 2 that will result in re-tuning
must be configured between 5% and 15%:
PROC GAIN 2* 0.10 to 10.00 PROCESS GAIN LOOP 2 – This is the Gain of the
process being tuned on Loop 2. It is automatically
calculated during tuning process. This is normally a
READ only value. It should only need to be changed
if the controller fails to identify the process. In this
case, set the value to the algebraic value of PV in
percent, divided by output in percent while in the
manual mode.
ATTENTION Note you must disable Accutune to

change tuning constant values from the keyboard.
CRITERIA* TUNING CRITERIA (SETPOINT ADAPT) - Select a
criteria best suited for your process on loop 1.
NORMAL NORMAL - Original critical damping (no overshoot)
FAST FAST - a more aggressive tuning with a minimal
possible overshoot of less than 0.5%.
* Applies to “SP Only” and “SP+PV” tuning only


Table 4-4 Accutune Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
CRITERIA2* TUNING CRITERIA FOR LOOP 2 (SETPOINT
ADAPT) - Select a criteria best suited for your
process on Loop 2
NORMAL NORMAL - Original critical damping (no overshoot)
FAST FAST - a more aggressive tuning with a minimal
possible overshoot of less than 0.5%.
For Example: Slightly underdamped
AT ERROR See Section 5 - ADAPTIVE TUNE ERROR STATUS LOOP1–
Operation for a list of When an error is detected in the Accutune process,
error prompts. an error prompt will appear.
AT ERROR2 See Section 5 - ADAPTIVE TUNE ERROR STATUS LOOP 2 –

Operation for a list of When an error is detected in the Accutune process,
error prompts. an error prompt will appear.
* Applies to “SP Only” and “SP+PV” tuning only

4.6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with various algorithms in the controller:
• Control algorithm,
• Input Math algorithms,
• Selecting the Number of PID Loops, and
• Output Override.
Algorithm group Table 4-5 lists all the function prompts in the Algorithm setup group and
Table 4-5 Algorithm Group Definitions
or Selection
LOOP RATE Loop 1 Loop 2 The LOOP RATE is the Loop sampling rate per second
1 12X for inputs 1 through 4 and is selectable from 3 to 12
1 9X 2 3X conversions per second for each loop (1 or 2). A faster
1 6X 2 3X sampling rate reduces the number of inputs that can be
1 3X 2 3X used.
Input 5 cannot be used for Loop 1 selections faster than
3X, nor for either Loop when using the
1 9X 3X selection.
The table below shows the available selections.
Loop Maximum
Rate Loop 1 Loop 2 Number of
Selection High Level
Inputs
1 12X 12X N/A 1
1 9X 3X 9X 3X 2
1 6X 2 3X 6X 3X 3
1 3X 2 3X 3X 3X 4
CONT ALG The CONTROL ALGORITHM lets you select the type of
control that is best for your process.
ON-OFF ON/OFF is the simplest control type. The output can be
either ON (100%) or OFF (0%). The Process Variable
(PV) is compared with the setpoint (SP) to determine the
sign of the error (ERROR = PV-SP). The ON/OFF
algorithm operates on the sign of the error signal.
In Direct Acting Control, when the error signal is positive,
the output is 100%; and when the error signal is negative,
the output is 0%. If the control action is reverse, the
opposite is true. An adjustable overlap (Hysteresis Band)
is provided between the on and off states.
Other prompts affected: “OUT HYST”
Continued next page

Table 4-5 Algorithm Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
CONT ALG ON-OFF DUPLEX ON/OFF is an extension of this algorithm when
(continued) (continued) the output is configured for Duplex. It allows the
operation of a second ON/OFF output. There is a
deadband between the operating ranges of the two
inputs and an adjustable overlap (hysteresis) of the on
and off states of each output. Both Deadband and
Hysteresis are separately adjustable. With no relay
action the controller will read 50%.
Other prompts affected: “OUT HYST” and “DEADBAND”
PID A PID A is normally used for three-mode control. This
means that the output can be adjusted somewhere
NOTE: PID A should not between 100% and 0%. It applies all three control
be used for Proportional actions — Proportional (P), Integral (I), and Derivative
only action. i.e. no integral (D) — to the error signal.
(reset) action. Instead,
Proportional (Gain) — regulates the controller’s output in
use PD+MR with rate set
proportion to the error signal (the difference between
to 0.
Process Variable and Setpoint).
Integral (Reset) -- regulates the controller's output to the
size of the error and the time the error has existed. (The
amount of corrective action depends on the value of
proportional Gain.)
Derivative (Rate) -- regulates the controller's output in
proportion to the rate of change of the error. (The
proportional Gain.)
PID B PID B Unlike the PID-A equation, the controller gives
only an integral response to a setpoint change, with no
effect on the output due to the gain or rate action, and it
gives full response to PV changes. Otherwise controller
action is as described for the PID-A equation. See note
on PID-A.
PD+MR PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used whenever integral
action is not wanted for automatic control. The equation
is computed with no integral contribution. The MANUAL
RESET, which is operator adjustable, is then added to
the present output to form the controller output.
Switching between manual and automatic mode will be
bumpless.
If you select PD with Manual Reset you can also
configure the following variations
• PD (Two Mode) control,
• P (Single Mode) control.
Set Rate (D) to 0.
Other prompts affected: "MAN RSET" in the “Tuning” Set
up group.


or Selection
CONT ALG 3 POS STEP THREE POSITION STEP - The Three Position Step
continued Control algorithm allows the control of a valve (or other
actuator) with an electric motor. Digital Outputs 3 and
4 generate control signals that drive external relays;
one to move the motor upscale, the other to move it
downscale, without a feedback slidewire linked to the
motor shaft.
3PSTEP is an extension of the On-Off Duplex Control
and includes internal feedback of the state of the
Digital Outputs.
In this algorithm, the error signal is compared with a
feedback signal and the result determines the state of
the Digital Outputs as follows:
Positive Error > Feedback Digital Output 3 On
Negative Error < Feedback Digital Output 4 On
Otherwise, the outputs are both off.
The 3PSTEP control algorithm provides an output
display (“OUT”) which is an estimated motor position
since the motor is not using any slidewire feedback.
Select a Motor Travel Time at prompt “MTR TIME”.
M/A STN MANUAL/AUTO STATION—Provides an operator display for
the TDC PID loop PV, SP, OP and MODE. The UDC loop
has only Manual control at the UDC6300. Auto mode for the
loop is maintained in the TDC.
If you select Auto mode at the UDC, the MAN indicator will
blink, indicating AUTO is not available.
When the TDC provides an output override value, MAN
indicator will turn OFF.
AUTO indicator is never displayed. Output override does not
necessarily mean that the loop is in AUTO.
Other configuration settings required:
Setup CONTROL prompt PV SOURCE = NONE.
Setup CONTROL prompts SPHILIM, SPLOLIM = PV and SP
range (for bargraph).
Refer to Manual/Auto Station Addendum 51-52-99-08 for

implementation details.
MTR TIME 5 to 255 in seconds THREE POSITION STEP MOTOR TRAVEL TIME -
(appears only if 3POS this is the time it takes the motor to travel from 0% to
STEP is selected 100%
above)
Refer to Subsection 5.21 - Three Position Step Control
for complete configuration and operating instructions.


or Selection
PID LOOPS PID LOOPS - This is the PID loop selection.
1 LOOP 1 LOOP - select to use one loop of control.
2LOOPS 2LOOPS - Select to use two PID loops of control, each
with two sets of tuning parameters and a set of control
parameters.
CASCADE - Select for Cascade Control. Cascade
CASCADE
control is a control system where the output of one PID
loop is used to adjust the setpoint of the second
control loop and the second loop’s output actually
adjusts the final control element.
ATTENTION To enable a cascade loop, press the

RSP/CAS key. The CAS annunciator will light to
indicate cascade mode. Press again to disable .
CONT2 ALG The CONTROL 2 ALGORITHM lets you select the
type of control for Loop 2 that is best for your process.
Only available if the controller is configured for
Cascade or 2Loop.
3PStep and On/Off not available for the second control
loop.
PID A PID A is normally used for three-mode control. This
means that the output can be adjusted somewhere
NOTE: PID A should not between 100% and 0%. It applies all three control
be used for actions — Proportional (P), Integral (I), and Derivative
Proportional only action. (D) — to the error signal.
i.e. no integral (reset)
action. Instead, use Proportional (Gain) — regulates the controller’s output
PD+MR with rate set to in proportion to the error signal (the difference between
0. Process Variable and Setpoint).
Integral (Reset) -- regulates the controller's output to
the size of the error and the time the error has existed.
(The amount of corrective action depends on the value
of proportional Gain.)
Derivative (Rate) -- regulates the controller's output in
proportion to the rate of change of the error. (The
proportional Gain.)
PID B PID B Unlike the PID-A equation, the controller gives
only an integral response to a setpoint change, with no
effect on the output due to the gain or rate action, and
it gives full response to PV changes. Otherwise
controller action is as described for the PID-A
equation. See note on PID-A.


or Selection
CONT2 ALG PD+MR PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used whenever
continued integral action is not wanted for automatic control.
The equation is computed with no integral
contribution. The MANUAL RESET, which is
operator adjustable, is then added to the present
output to form the controller output.
Switching between manual and automatic mode will
be bumpless.
If you select PD with Manual Reset you can also
configure the following variations
• PD (Two Mode) control,
• P (Single Mode) control.
Set Rate (D) to 0.
Other prompts affected: "MANRESET3"
M/A STN MANUAL/AUTO STATION—Provides an operator display
for the TDC PID loop PV, SP, OP and MODE. The UDC
loop has only Manual control at the UDC6300. Auto mode
for the loop is maintained in the TDC.
If you select Auto mode at the UDC, the MAN indicator will
blink, indicating AUTO is not available.
When the TDC provides an output override value, MAN
indicator will turn OFF.
AUTO indicator is never displayed. Output override does
not necessarily mean that the loop is in AUTO.
Other configuration settings required:
Setup CONTROL2 prompt PV2 SRC = NONE.
Setup CONTROL2 prompts SPHILIM, SPLOLIM = PV and
SP range (for bargraph).
Refer to Manual/Auto Station Addendum 51-52-99-08 for

implementation details.
OUTOVRD OUTPUT OVERRIDE SELECT - This selection lets

you select high or low output override.
Only available if the controller is configured for
Cascade or 2Loop.
ATTENTION Loop 1 must be in Automatic for
this to work.
DISABL DISABLEs Output Override
HI SELECT HIGH SELECT - The controller will select the higher
of output 1 or output 2 and direct it to output 1 rear
terminals.


or Selection
OUTOVRD LO SELECT LOW SELECT - The controller will select the lower
continued of output 1 or output 2 and direct it to output 1 rear
terminals.
ATTENTION The unselected output will track the

selected output within 5% to eliminate windup in the
unselected direction.
INPUT MATH ALGORITHMS - The controller is provided with two input algorithms. Each algorithm can
be configured to provide a derived (calculated) PV or a derived Remote setpoint. Up to three inputs may
be applied to the calculation. In addition, the 2 algorithms may be "linked" to combine two calculations by
configuring one algorithm to be an input to the other algorithm. See Input A, B, and C for definitions per
equation. All algorithms operate in Engineering Units except Feedforward which operates in percent of
range units. The Pulse input is calculated in percent of full scale.
IN ALG 1 INPUT ALGORITHM 1 has the following selections
from which to choose:
NONE NONE - No algorithm configured
WTD AVG WEIGHTED AVERAGE - When you configure for
Weighted Average, the controller will compute a PV
or SP for the control algorithm from the following
equation:
(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) + K(Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)
PV or SP =
(1 + K)
Both Inputs must have the same range in

engineering units.
FFWD SUM FEEDFORWARD SUMMER - Feedforward uses
Input A, following a Ratio and Bias calculation as a
value summed directly with the PID computed output
value and sent, as an output value, to the final
control element. Applies to Loop 1 only.
This algorithm will only function in automatic mode.
The following formula applies:
Controller Output = PID Output + (Input A x Ratio A + BiasA )


or Selection
IN ALG 1 INPUT ALGORITHM 1 (continued)
continued
SUMMER SUMMER WITH RATIO AND BIAS - The following
formula applies:
PV (or SP) = (Input A x RatioA + Bias A) + (Input B x RatioB + BiasB)+ (Input C x RatioC + BiasC)
HI SELECT INPUT HIGH SELECT WITH RATIO AND BIAS -

This selection specifies the PV or SP as the higher
of Input 1 or Input 2. The following formula applies:
PV (or SP) = higher of (Input A x RatioA + BiasA) or (Input B x RatioB + BiasB)
LO SELECT INPUT LOW SELECT WITH RATIO AND BIAS -

This selection specifies the PV or SP as the lower of
Input 1 or Input 2. The following formula applies:
PV (or SP) =lower of (Input A x RatioA + BiasA) or (Input B x RatioB + BiasB)
√ MUL DIV (note 1) MULTIPLIER DIVIDER WITH SQUARE ROOT -

(Input A x RatioA + BiasA) x (Input C x RatioC + BiasC)

PV (or RSP) = K x X (Calc HI – Calc LO )
(Input B x RatioB + BiasB)
See Figure 4-1 at the end of this section for an example of Mass Flow
Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm
√ MULTIPLY (note 1) MULTIPLIER WITH SQUARE ROOT -
PV (or RSP) = K x (Input A x RatioA + BiasA) x (Input C x Ratio C + BiasC)(Input

x B x RatioB + BiasB ) X (Calc HI – CalcLO )
MULT DIV MULTIPLIER DIVIDER - The following formula

applies:
(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A ) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C )
PV (or RSP) = K x X (Calc HI – Calc LO )
(Input B x Ratio B + Bias B )
MULTIPLY MULTIPLIER - The following formula applies:

PV (or RSP) = K x (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A ) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C ) x (Input B x RatioB + BiasB ) X (Calc HI – Calc LO )
Where: K = 0.001 to 1000 (configurable)

Calc Hi and Calc Lo are configurable over a range of –999 to 9999
Note 1. If the calculated value of the quantity under the square root sign decreases to a value less
than 0.010, the calculation will become linear as the calculated value decreases below 0.010.


or Selection
IN ALG 1 INPUT ALGORITHM 1 (continued)
(continued)
FFWD MULT FEEDFORWARD MULTIPLIER - applies to Loop 1
only and uses Input A, following a Ratio and Bias
calculation as a value multiplied by the PID
computed output value and sent, as an output value,
to the final control element. This algorithm will only
function in automatic mode.
Controller Output = PID Output x (Input A x Ratio A+ BiasA)
CONSTNT K 0.001 to 1000 WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATIO OR K CONSTANT

FOR MATH SELECTIONS - Only applicable for
algorithms "WTD AVG" or Math selections
"√ MUL DIV ", √ MULTIPLY ", "MULT DIV", or
"MULTIPLY"
CALC HIGH –999 to 9999 CALCULATED VARIABLE HIGH SCALING
FACTOR FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 1 - Does not
apply to Feedforward Algorithms.
CALC LOW –999 to 9999 CALCULATED VARIABLE LOW SCALING
FACTOR FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 1 - Does not
apply to Feedforward Algorithms.
ALG 1 IN A INPUT 1 ALGORITHM 1, INPUT A SELECTION - will
INPUT 2 represent one of the available selections
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5 OTHER ALG - Algorithm 1 is performed before
OTHER ALG Algorithm 2. If ALG2 is used in ALG1, there is a
OUTPUT 1 one cycle delay
OUTPUT 2
ALG 1 IN B INPUT 1 ALGORITHM 1, INPUT B SELECTION - will
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5 OTHER ALG - Algorithm 1 is performed before
OTHER ALG Algorithm 2. If ALG2 is used in ALG1, there is a
OUTPUT 1 one cycle delay
OUTPUT 2
ALG 1 IN C NONE ALGORITHM 1, INPUT C SELECTION - will
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OTHER ALG


or Selection
IN ALG 2 INPUT ALGORITHM 2 - the selections from which to
NONE choose are listed to the left.
WTD AVG
FFWD SUM2(applies only
to Loop 2) The formulas are the same as shown for "IN ALG 1".
A–B DIV C *
HI SELECT
LO SELECT * ATTENTION Selection "A–B DIV C" algorithm
√ MUL DIV subtracts Input B with Ratio/Bias from Input A with
Ratio/Bias and divides the result by Input C with
√ MULTIPLY
Ratio/Bias using Engineering units.
MUL DIV
Example
MULTIPLY
(A - B) (Calc Hi - Calc Lo))
FFWD MUL2(applies only PV or SP = K
C
to Loop 2)
CONST K2 0.001 to 1000 WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATIO OR K CONSTANT
FOR MATH SELECTIONS - Only applicable for
algorithms "WTD AVG" or Math selections
"√ MUL DIV ", "√ MULTIPLY ", "MULT DIV", or
"MULTIPLY"
CALC HIGH –999 to 9999 CALCULATED VARIABLE HIGH SCALING FACTOR
FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 2- Does not apply to
Feedforward Algorithms.
CALC LOw –999 to 9999 CALCULATED VARIABLE LOW SCALING FACTOR
FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 2 - Does not apply to
Feedforward Algorithms.
ALG 2 IN A INPUT 1 ALGORITHM 2, INPUT A SELECTION - will represent
INPUT 2 one of the available selections.
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OTHER ALG
ALG 2 IN B INPUT 1 ALGORITHM 2, INPUT B SELECTION - will represent
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OTHER ALG
ALG 2 IN C NONE ALGORITHM 2, INPUT C SELECTION - will represent
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OTHER ALG


or Selection
8 SG CHAR1 8 SEGMENT CHARACTERIZER #1- An eight
segment characterizer can be applied to either
Input 2, Output 1, Output 2, or Input 4.
DISABLE DISABLE - disables characterizer
INPUT 2 INPUT 2 - characterizer applied to Input 2
LOOP 1 OUT LOOP 1 OUT - characterizer applied to Loop 1
Output
Output
INPUT4 INPUT 4 - characterizer applied to Input 4.
There are 8 (Xn) Input values and 8 (Yn) Output
values to be selected. The following rules apply:
• When Input 2 is used, Input 2 Ratio and Bias are
applied to the Xn Values.
Note: The X values below
should be entered as • When one of the Loop outputs are selected, the Xn
increasing values Input values are the Output from the control
(from 0% to 100%) algorithm, and the Yn Output is the final control
from N=0 to 8 element action. This application is useful for non-
linear control elements or Process Variable.
A simple example is shown in Figure 4-2.
X0 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99% X0 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)
Y0 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99% Y0 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)


or Selection
8 SG CHAR2 8 SEGMENT CHARACTERIZER #2 - A second
eight segment characterizer can be applied to either
Input 2, Output 1, Output 2, or Input 4.
DISABLE DISABLE - disables characterizer
INPUT 2 INPUT 2 - characterizer applied to Input 2
Output
Output
INPUT4 INPUT 4 - characterizer applied to Input 4.
There are 8 (Xn) Input values and 8 (Yn) Output
values to be selected. The following rules apply:
• When Input 2 is used, Input 2 Ratio and Bias are
applied to the Xn Values.
Note: The X values below
should be entered as • When one of the Loop outputs are selected, the Xn
increasing values Input values are the Output from the control
(from 0% to 100%) algorithm, and the Yn Output is the final control
from N=0 to 8 element action. This application is useful for non-
linear control elements or Process Variable.
A simple example is shown in Figure 4-2.
X0 VALUE2 0.00 to 99.99% X0 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)
Y0 VALUE2 0.00 to 99.99% Y0 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)


or Selection
POLY NOM DISABLE POLYNOMIAL EQUATION - A fifth order Polynomial
INPUT 1 Equation can be used on any one of the five Analog
INPUT 2 Inputs.
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5 The equation is in the form:
Y = C5 * 10-7 X5 + C4 * 10-5 X4 + C3 * 10-3 X3 + C2 * 10-1 X2 + C1 X +C0

Where:
X is the analog input selected in % of span
X% = X EU 100
Span EU
C0 is a value between –99.99 to +99.99
C1 - C5 are values between –9.999 to +9.999
Ratio and Bias can be applied on the "Y" output term

as follows:
Calculated "Y" Value =Y * Input x Ratio + InputX
Bias
Where:
"X" refers to the analog input (in % of span)being used
and the range assigned to the "X" input chosen
applies to the "Y" calculated value.
After the Polynomial is enabled, refer to the prompts

listed below and enter the coefficients.
C0 VALUE –99.99 to 99.99 POLYNOMIAL COEFFICIENT C0
C1 VALUE –9.999 to 9.999 POLYNOMIAL COEFFICIENT C1
C2 X 10 -1 –9.999 to 9.999 POLYNOMIAL COEFFICIENT C2


or Selection
TOTALIZER TOTALIZER FUNCTION- calculates and displays the
total flow volume as measured by Input 1 or applied to
either Input Algorithm 1 or Algorithm 2 to totalize the
compensated flow rate being calculated by the
algorithm. Displayed value is eight digits with a
configurable scale factor.
DISABLE DISABLE - disables the totalizer function
INPUT 1 INPUT 1 - totalizer applied to Input 1
IN ALG 1 IN ALG 1 - totalizer applied to Input Algorithm 1
IN ALG 2 IN ALG 2 - totalizer applied to Input Algorithm 2
ATTENTION The totalizer should always be reset

to initialize the counters whenever it is enabled.
Otherwise, the “Σ (sigma) display will blink.
Σ XXXXXXXX Σ * En READ ONLY

Current Scale Factor ( Upper Display)
Actual Current Totalized Value (Lower Display)
TOT SCALE * E0=1 X 100 = 1 TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR - selects the desired
Scale Factor (i.e. Multiplier)
* E1=1 X 101 = 10
* E2=1 X 102 = 100 The desired factor is applied to the calculated value to
* E3=1 X 103 = 1,000 extend the maximum flow range that can be displayed.
* E4=1 X 104 = 10,000
* E5=1 X 105 = 100,000
* E6=1 X 106 = 1,000,000
TOT SECUR TOTALIZER RESET LOCK - allows the totalizer to be
reset.
UNLOC UNLOC - allows the totalizer value to be reset.

LOCK LOCK - prevents the totalizer value from being reset.
Σ RESET TOTALIZER RESET - appears only if the totalizer is

unlocked
NO NO - No Reset
YES YES - Resets on next FUNC key press and displays
the reset value.
TOT RATE TOTALIZER RATE OF INTEGRATION - five
integration rates are available to match the totalizer
rate to the rate of flow being totalized.
SECOND SECOND - EU (Engineering Units) per second

MINUTE MINUTE - EU per minute
HOUR HOUR - EU per hour
DAY DAY - EU per day
MIL/DAY MIL/DAY - millions of units per day

Figure 4-1 Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm

Example - Mass Flow Compensation
A gas flow rate of 650 SCFM develops a differential pressure of 90" H 2O across an orifice plate
at reference conditions of 30 psig and 140 F. Compensate this gas flow for temperature and
pressure variations.
Where:
Flow = K DPf x P f Tref
x f = flowing conditions
Tf Pref ref = reference conditions (in absolute units)
Apply Multiplier/Divider Algorithm:
PV = K (Input A x Ratio A+ Bias A ) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C )

X (Calc HI – Calc LO )
(Input B x Ratio B + Bias B )
Assign inputs using Engineering units:

Let:
Input A = DP f = IN1 (in H 2O)
Input B = Tf = IN2 + Bias2 = IN2 F + 460 ( R)
Input C = Pf = IN3 + Bias3 = IN3psig + 14.7(psia)
Tref = 140 F + 460 = 600 R
Pref = 30 psig + 14.7 = 44.7 psia
Calc Hi = 650.0
Flow in SFCM at Reference Conditions
Calc Lo = 0.0
K = to be determined next
Note: If temperature and pressure signals are already ranged in absolute units,
no Bias is required for inputs B and C.
PV = Q SCFM = DPf x (IN3 + 14.7)

x K2 x (650.0 - 0.0)
(IN2 + 460)
Note: When IN2 and IN3 are at the reference conditions of 600 R (140 F) and 44.7psia (30
psig) respectively and DPf = 90" H 2 O, the equation must calculate 650 SCFM. To accomplish
this, divide the DP value by "90" to normalize the equation.
Q SCFM = DP f (IN3 + 14.7) Tref

x x x 650
90 (IN2 + 460) Pref
Rearranging terms:
Q SCFM = (IN3 + 14.7) 1 Tref

DPf x x x x 650
(IN2 + 460) 90 Pref
Variable Constant = K 2 22049
Example continued on next page

Figure 4-1 Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm,

continued
Example - Mass Flow Compensation
Determined value of K:
1 Tref 600
K2 = x = = 0.14914
90 Pref (90) (44.7)
Therefore K = 0.386
Q SCFM = (0.386) (650) DPf (in H 2O) (IN3 + 14.7)

(IN2 + 460)
K (Calc HI - Calc LO )
Summary of Flow Values At Values Conditions

Flow (SFCM)
Temp (Tf ) Pressure (Tf )
( R) (psia) DPf = 45" H 2O (50%) DPf = 90" H2 O (100%)
Reference
Conditions 140 F + 460 30 psi + 14.7 459 650
170 F + 460 50 psi + 14.7 539 763
170 F + 460 20 psi + 14.7 395 559
110 F + 460 50 psi + 14.7 567 802
110 F + 460 20 psi + 14.7 415 587

22050

Figure 4-2 Example of Eight Segment Characterizer
100% Y AXIS
N Xn Yn
Y4
0 0.00 0.00
1 5.00 25.00
2 10.00 37.00
Output 3 20.00 55.00
from
4 31.00 70.00
Characterizer
Characterizer 5 45.00 81.00
Disabled
6 60.00 87.00
7 80.00 94.50
8 99.99 99.99
0% X AXIS
0%
X4 100%
Input to Characterizer
22673

4.7 Advanced Math Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with various Logic Gates that are available for use in the
controller. It also lists what each of the two inputs and the output can
represent. Up to five different gates can be configured.
Algorithm group Table 4-6 lists all the function prompts in the "Advanced Math" setup
prompts group and their definitions.
Table 4-6 Advanced Math Group Definitions
or Selection
LOG GATES LOGIC GATE FUNCTION -
DISABLE DISABLE - disable the logic gate function.
ENABLE ENABLE - allows the Logic Gate function and the
prompts for this option to be shown.
For each gate used, make a selection for:
Gate Type GATEnTYPE
Input A Source GATEn INA
Input B Source GATEn INB
Output Use GATEn OUT
(n) = 1,2,3,4,or 5
GATE(n) TYPE GATE TYPE - In digital logic, there are only two
states that can be present:
(n = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) "0" - OFF, or "1" - ON
Listed are definitions of the gates available and their
truth table which indicate what happens to the
Output with regard to the state of the Inputs.
NOT USED NOT USED - No Selection
OR OR - With this gate, if Input A OR Input B are ON,
then the Output will be ON. Also, if both Inputs are
ON, the Output will also be ON because it takes any
one Input being ON to make the Output
A B Y
INPUT A 0 0 0
OUTPUT (Y)
OR 0 1 1
INPUT B
1 0 1
1 1 1
NOR NOR - The NOR gate is similar to the OR gate,

except that the Output is inverted. It is exactly
opposite of the OR gate and is referred to as NOT
OR or NOR.
If Input A or Input B are ON, the Output is OFF.
A B Y
INPUT A
0 0 1
OUTPUT (Y)
NOR 0 1 0
INPUT B 1 0 0
1 1 0

4.7 Advanced Math Parameters Set Up Group,Continued
Table 4-6 Advanced Math Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
GATEnTYPE AND AND - With this gate, if Input A AND Input B are
(continued) ON, then the Output will be ON; so that any single
Input change will not cause the Output to change
unless the other Input is already ON.
INPUT A A B Y
0 0 0
OUTPUT (Y)
AND 0 1 0
INPUT B
1 0 0
1 1 1
NAND NAND - NOT AND is the best way to describe the

NAND gate. It is an inverted AND gate. When Input
A and Input B are ON, the Output is OFF.
INPUT A A B Y
OUTPUT (Y) 0 0 1
NAND 0 1 1
INPUT B
1 0 1
1 1 0
X OR X OR (EXCLUSIVE OR) - The operation of this gate

is as its name applies. Exclusively "OR". If Input A
OR Input B are ON, the Output will be ON. If Input A
and Input B are ON or OFF, the Output will be OFF.
INPUT A A B Y
0 0 0
OUTPUT (Y)
X OR 0 1 1
INPUT B
1 0 1
1 1 0
XNOR X NOR EXCLUSIVE NOR) - The EXCLUSIVE

NOR is an inverted EXCLUSIVE OR. If Input A and
Input B are ON or OFF, the Output will be ON.
A B Y
INPUT A
OUTPUT (Y) 0 0 1
XNOR 0 1 0
INPUT B 1 0 0
1 1 1


or Selection
GATEnTYPE B LT A (B<A) B LT A (B<A) - B less than A is an Analog
(continued) Comparator with two Analog Inputs and one Digital
(On/Off) Output. A fixed Hysteresis Band of 0.1% of
Input B span is applied to these comparators.
INPUT A
OUTPUT (Y)
B<A
INPUT B
Y = 1 if B<A
Y = 0 if (B + .001 * Span of B) >A
Example: (B<A)
B= 900 (Range 0 – 1000)
900 – (1000 * .001) = 899
If A >900, then Output is ON(1)
If A <899, then Output is OFF (0)
B GT A (B>A) B GT A (B>A) - B greater than A is an Analog

Comparator with two Analog Inputs and one Digital
(On/Off) Output. A fixed Hysteresis Band of 0.1% of
Input B span is applied to these comparators.
INPUT A
OUTPUT (Y)
B>A
INPUT B
Y = 1 if B>A
Y = 0 if (B + .001 * Span of B) <A
Example: (B>A)
B= 900 (Range 0 – 1000)
900 +(1000 * .001) = 901
If A <900, then Output is ON(1)
If A >901, then Output is OFF (0)


or Selection
GATE(n) IN A GATE (n) INPUT A - The selection here will indicate
(n = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) what Input A will be for any of the 5 Gates you want
to configure.
The following selections apply if the Gate Type is
OR, NOR, AND, NAND, X OR, or X NOR.
DIG IN 1 Digital Input 1
DIG OUT 1 Digital Output 1
GATE 1 OUT Output from Gate 1
FIXED ON Always a "1"
FIXED OFF Always a "0"
M/A MODE Manual or Auto mode - Loop 1
0 = Manual 1 = Automatic
L/R SP L1 Local or Remote Setpoint - Loop 1
0 = Local 1 = Remote
DIS / EN AT Disable or Enable Adaptive Tune - Loop 1
0 = Disable 1 = Enable
M/A MODE 2* Manual or Auto Mode - Loop 2
L/R SP L2* Local or Remote Setpoint - Loop 2
DIS / EN AT2* Disable or Enable Adaptive Tune - Loop 2

B LT A or B GT A
INPUT 1
Analog Input 1
INPUT 2
Analog Input 2
INPUT 3
Analog Input 3
INPUT 4
Analog Input 4
INPUT 5
LOOP 1 PV Analog Input 5
LOOP 1 SP Loop 1 Process Variable
CONST K Loop 1 Setpoint
LOOP 2 PV* K Constant
LOOP 2 SP* Loop 2 Process Variable
* These prompts appear only Loop 2 Setpoint
when 2 Loops are
configured.
GATE (N) K –999.0 to +9999 GATE (N) K CONSTANT - This selection only
(n) = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 appears if "CONST K" is selected a Input A
for Gate n.

Table 4-6 Advance Math Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
GATE(n) IN B GATE (n) INPUT B- The selection here will indicate
(n = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) what Input B will be for any of the 5 Gates you want
to configure.
OR, NOR, AND, NAND, X OR, or X NOR.
FIXED ON Always a "1"
FIXED OFF Always a "0"

B LT A or B GT A
INPUT 1
Analog Input 1
INPUT 2
Analog Input 2
INPUT 3
Analog Input 3
INPUT 4
Analog Input 4
INPUT 5
LOOP 1 PV Analog Input 5
LOOP 1 SP Loop 1 Process Variable
TOTALIZER Loop 1 Setpoint
LOOP 2 PV* Totalizer Value (see Note 1)
LOOP 2 SP* Loop 2 Process Variable
* These prompts appear only Loop 2 Setpoint
when 2 Loops are Note 1: The Input B Totalizer Value will be the
configured. displayed value, not the actual totalizer value.


or Selection
GATE(n) OUT GATE (n) OUTPUT- The selection here indicates
(n = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) what the output will be for any of the 5 gates that you
configure.
ANY GATE Output to any Gate
RESET TOT Disable or Enable Totalizer Reset
* These prompts appear only 0 = Disable 1 = Enable
when 2 Loops are
configured.

4.8 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction This data deals with various output types in the controller, the Digital
Output Status, and the Current Duplex functionality.
Algorithm group Table 4-7 lists all the function prompts in the "Output Algorithm" setup
Table 4-7 Output Algorithm Group Definitions
or Selection
OUT ALG The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select the type
of output you want. Selections are model dependent.
For example, current output models cannot be
configured for Time Proportioning Simplex Output.
TIME TIME SIMPLEX — This Output algorithm uses
Digital Output 3 for Time Proportional Control. The
output is updated per the Loop sampling rate
selection. Time Proportional Output has a resolution
of 4.44 msec. Cycle Time is adjustable from 1 to
120 seconds.
CURRENT CURRENT SIMPLEX — Type of output using one
4 to 20 mA signal that can be fed into a positive or
negative grounded load of 0 to 1000 ohms. The
signal can be re-calibrated for any desired range
from 4 to 20 mA for 0 to 100% output.
TIME DPLX TIME DUPLEX — This Output algorithm uses Digital
Outputs 3 and 4 for Duplex Time Proportional
Control. The outputs are updated per the Loop
sampling rate selection. Time Proportional Output
has a resolution of 4.44 msec. Cycle Time is
adjustable from 1 to 120 seconds.
CUR DPLX CURRENT DUPLEX is similar to current simplex but
uses a second current output. The second output is
usually scaled so that zero and span correspond
with 0% and 50% output (cool zone). When the
output is 0 to 50%, the controller uses tuning
parameter set #2, when the output is 50 to 100% it
uses set #1.
Other prompts affected: "4-20 RNG”
CUR TIME CURRENT/TIME DUPLEX (Digital Output 3 =
HEAT) is a variation of duplex with current active for
0 to 50% output (tuning set 2) and Time is active 50
to 100% output (tuning set 1).
Other prompts affected: "4-20 RNG”
TIME CUR TIME CURRENT DUPLEX (Digital Output 3 =
COOL) is similar to "CUR-TIME" except that current
is active for 50 to 100% and Time is active for 0 to
50%.
Other prompts affected: "4-20 RNG”.

4.8 Output Algorithm Data Set Up Group, Continued
Table 4-7 Output Algorithm Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
4-20 RNG CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE ALGORITHM — Used
with Output Algorithm selections "CUR-DPLX,"
"CUR-TIME", or "TIME-CUR."
50 PCT CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE (SPLIT) For "CUR
DPLX" this enables the normal control current output
to provide iheat control and the 2nd current output to
provide cool control. To enable this, "CUR OUT 2"
in the “Options” Set up group must be:
•Selected for OUTPUT
• 2ND current output is scaled as desired for
0-50% controller output (4mA set to 50;
20mA set to 0)
• Deadband for this configuration only applies to
the Current output The second current output
must have the Deadband scaled in.
For example:
If a 2% Deadband is desired, then enter a “2.0” for the
“Deadband” selection in the Control group. This will apply
Deadband to the Current Output. In the “Opyions” group,
set the 2nd Current Output “4mA VAL” selection to “49.0”
and the “20mA” selection to “0”.
100PCT CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE (FULL) enables the
normal control current output to provide duplex
control over 0 - 100% of the controller output by
providing cool control over 4–12 mA and Heat
control over 12–20 mA. The second current output is
not required for this type of duplex operation.
OUTALG 2 The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select the type
of output you want for the second control loop
See "OUTALG" for definitions.
NONE NONE - No selection
TIME TIME - Uses Digital Output 4
CURRENT CURRENT - Uses second current output
CUR DPLX CUR DPLX- Uses second current output
CUR TIME CUR TIME - Digital Output 4 = Heat, Second
Current Output = Cool
TIME CUR TIME CUR - Digital Output 4 = Cool, Second
Current Output = Heat
DO STATE DIGITAL OUTPUT STATUS AT 0% OUTPUT -
allows the following selections:
3OFF 4OFF 3OFF 4OFF Output 3 de-energized
Output 4 de-energized
3ON 4ON 3ON 4ON Output 3 energized
Output 4 energized
3OFF 4ON 3OFF 4ON Output 3 de-energized
Output 4 energized
3ON 4 OFF 3ON 4 OFF Output 3 energized
Output 4 de-energized
ATTENTION For units not configured for Time
Duplex, Output 4 is always de-energized.

4.9 Input 1 Through 4 Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction These are the parameters required for Inputs 1 through 4; transmitter
characterization, high and low range values in engineering units, Ratio,
Bias, and Filter. Also, Deadtime (Input 3 only) and Xmitter 4 (Input 4
only).
Input 1 through 4 Table 4-8 lists all the function prompts in the Input 1 through 4 setup
group prompts group and their definitions.
Table 4-8 Input 1 through 4 Group Definitions
or Selection
XMITTERn TRANSMITTER CHARACTERIZATION — This
(n = 1, 2, 3, or 4) selection lets you instruct the controller to
characterize a linear input to represent a non-linear
ATTENTION one.
Change of input
DISABLE DISABLE - Disable Input
characterization
B TC B TC - B Thermocouple
selection results in
E TC E TC- E Thermocouple
loss of any field
J TC J TC- J Thermocouple
calibration and
K TC K TC- K Thermocouple
restores factory
NNM NNM- NiNiMo Thermocouple
calibration of linear
NIC TC NIC TC- Nicrosil Nisil Thermocouple
range 1 to 5 Volts.
R TC R TC- R Thermocouple
S TC S TC- S Thermocouple
T TC T TC- T Thermocouple
W TC W TC- W Thermocouple
100 PT 100 PT - 100 Ohm RTD High
100 PT LO 100 LOW - 100 Ohm RTD Low
200PT 200PT- 200 Ohm RTD
LINEAR LINEAR - Linear*
SQ ROOT SQ ROOT - Square Root*
IN2 NO R/B (Xmitter 4 IN2 NO R/B - allows analog input 2 signal (without
only) Input 2 Ratio or Bias) to be configured with Input 4
Ratio and Bias without need to use a physical analog
input for input 4.
* No Characterization
INn HI –999 to 9999 INPUT n HIGH RANGE VALUE in engineering units.
(n = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in Engineering units Available only if Linear or Square Root transmitter
characterization is selected.
Scale the #1 input signal to the display value you
want for 100%.
EXAMPLE:
Actuation (Input) = 4 to 20 mA
Process Variable = Flow
Range of Flow = 0 to 250 Gal/Min
High Range display value = 250
Low Range display value = 0
Then 20 mA = 250 Gal/Min
The control setpoint will be limited by the range of
units selected here.

4.9 Input 1 Through 4 Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Table 4-8 Input 1 through 4 Group definitions, continued

or Selection
INn LO –999 to 9999 INPUT n LOW RANGE VALUE in engineering units.
(n = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in Engineering units Available only if Linear or Square Root transmitter
characterization is selected. Scale the #1 input
signal to the display value you want for 0%. See
example on previous page. The control setpoint for
Input 1 will be limited by the range of units selected
here.
RATIO n –20.00 to 20.00 RATIO ON INPUT n - select the Ratio value you
(n = 1, 2, 3, or 4) want on the input designated
BIAS INn –999 to 9999 BIAS ON INPUT n - Bias is used to compensate the
(n = 1, 2, 3, or 4) input for drift of an input value due to deterioration of
a sensor, or some other cause.
Select the bias value you want on the input
designated.
FILTER n 0 to 120 seconds FILTER FOR INPUT n - A software digital filter is
(n = 1, 2, 3, or 4) No filter = 0 provided for the Input designated to smooth the input
signal. You can configure the first order lag time
constant from 1 to 120 seconds. If you do not want
filtering, enter 0.
DEADTIME3 0.0 TO 60.0 Minutes DEADTIME FOR INPUT 3 - The third input can be
(INPUT 3 ONLY) configured to introduce a selectable Deadtime into
the control algorithm.
Deadtime is the delay in response to any change to
Analog Input 3. Specifically, Deadtime is the interval
of time between the initiation of a change to Analog
Input 3 and the start of the resulting response and
displayed value of Input 3.
Loops using this feature should always use a loop
sample rate of 3X per second.
The controller calculates a ramp between sample
points and uses that ramp to calculate the input for
intermediate points between samples.
The controller will save a total of 540 sample points
for the Deadtime calculations.
For example:
Assume a Deadtime of 34.0 minutes. This has a
sample rate of 4.000 seconds. Now, assume that
sample #1 was 50.0, and sample #2, four seconds
after sample #1, was 74.0. The controller
calculates a ramp of +24.0 over 4.000 seconds.
This means that the controller will perform as if the
input changes at
+24.0
4.000 x 3
or +2.000 per 0.333 seconds.
Deadtime can be configured to any value between
0.0 and 60.00 minutes.

4.10 Input 5 Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction These are the parameters required for optional input 5 which can be a
Direct Thermocouple, RTD, or Pulse Input; Type, Input 5 Pulse,
Transmitter Characterization, High and Low range values in engineering
units, Ratio, Bias, Filter, Burnout, and Emissivity.
Input 5 group prompts Table 4-9 lists all the function prompts in the Optional Input 5 setup group
and their definitions.
Table 4-9 Input 5 Group Definitions

or Selection
IN 5 TYPE INPUT 5 ACTUATION TYPE - This selection
determines what actuation you are going to use for
ATTENTION Input 5.
Change of input type
selection results in DISABLE DISABLE - Disable Input 5
loss of any field B TC B TC - B Thermocouple
calibration and E TC E TC- E Thermocouple
restores factory J TC J TC- J Thermocouple
calibration. K TC K TC- K Thermocouple
100 LO PT 100 LOW - 100 Ohm RTD Low
RH RADIAM RH RADIAM - Radiamatic ( type RH only)
MILLIAMPS 4 to 20 MILLIAMPS*
0–10 MV 0 TO 10 MILLIVOLTS*
10–50 MV 10 TO 50 MILLIVOLTS*
1–5V 1 TO 5 VOLTS*
0–10V
0 TO 10 VOLTS*
PULSE
PULSE - 0 to 25 Khz (automatically selected when a
pulse Input board is installed).Minimum Span 100Hz
* Linear Range
IN5 PULSE INPUT 5 PULSE ACTUATION - available only when
a Pulse Input board is installed.
DISABLE DISABLE - disables Input 5
FREQ INP FREQUENCY INPUT - for Flow Transmitters
PULSE PULSE - for Setpoint/Remote Setpoint adjustments.
Refer to "Operation" section for operational
overview.

4.10 Input 5 Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Table 4-9 Input 5 Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
XMITTER 5 TRANSMITTER CHARACTERIZATION - This
selection lets you instruct the controller to
characterize a linear input to represent a non-linear
one.
B TC B TC - B Thermocouple
E TC E TC- E Thermocouple
J TC J TC- J Thermocouple
K TC K TC- K Thermocouple
100 LO PT 100 LOW - 100 Ohm RTD Low
LINEAR LINEAR - Linear*
SQ ROOT SQ ROOT - Square Root*
*no characterization
IN5 HI –999 to 9999 INPUT 5 HIGH RANGE VALUE in engineering units
in Engineering units is displayed for Input 5 but can only be configured for
linear, square root, or pulse actuations only.
IN5 LO –999 to 9999 INPUT 5 LOW RANGE VALUE in engineering units
in Engineering units is displayed for Input 5 but can only be configured for
linear, square root, or pulse actuations only.
RATIO IN5 –20.00 to +20.00 INPUT 5 RATIO VALUE - Select the ratio value for
Input 5.
BIAS IN5 –999 to 9999 INPUT 5 BIAS VALUE - Select the bias value for
in Engineering units Input 5.
FILTER IN5 0 to 120 seconds FILTER FOR INPUT FIVE— A software digital filter
No filter = 0 is provided for input 5 to smooth the input signal.
You can configure the first order lag constant from 1
to 120 seconds. If you do not want filtering, enter 0.

4.10 Input 5 Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Table 4-9 Input 5 Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
BURNOUT5 BURNOUT PROTECTION (SENSOR BREAK) -
provides all input types with upscale or downscale
protection if the input fails.
NONE NO BURNOUT - Failsafe output applied for failed
input but not out-of-range.
UP UPSCALE BURNOUT - will make the indicated PV
signal increase when a sensor fails, and flash in the
upper display. Do not use for Linear Input.
DOWN DOWNSCALE BURNOUT - will make the indicated
PV signal decrease when a sensor fails, and flash
the upper display. Do not use for Linear Input.
EMISSIV 5 0.01 to 1.00 EMISSIVITY FOR (RH) RADIAMATIC INPUTS - A
radiamatic pyrometer converts radiant energy
emitted by a target into electrical energy. Emissivity
is a correction factor applied to the radiamatic input
signal that is the ratio of the actual energy emitted
from the target to the energy which would be emitted
if the target were a perfect radiator.
Only available on Input 5 "RH" Radiamatic.

4.11 Control Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with how the Single Loop Process
Controller or Loop 1 of a Two Loop Process controller will control the
process including: PV Source, Number of tuning parameter sets, Setpoint
source, Tracking, Power-up recall, Setpoint limits, Output direction, rate
and limits, Dropoff, Deadband and Hysteresis.
Control group Table 4-10 lists all the function prompts in the Control setup group and
Table 4-10 Control Group Definitions
or Selection
PV SOURCE PROCESS VARIABLE SOURCE - select the
source of the Process Variable.
INPUT 1 INPUT 1
INPUT 2 INPUT 2
INPUT 3 INPUT 3
INPUT 4 INPUT 4
INPUT 5 INPUT 5
IN ALG 1 INPUT ALGORITHM 1
PID SETS NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER SETS — This
selection lets you choose one or two sets of tuning
constants (gain, rate, and reset).
1 ONLY ONE SET ONLY — Only one set of tuning
parameters is available. Configure the values for:
Gain (proportional band),
Rate,
Reset Time, and
Cycle Time (if time proportional is used).
2KEYBD TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE — Two
sets of tuning parameters can be configured and can
be selected at the operator interface or by using the
Digital Inputs.
Press LOWR DISP key until you see "PID SET1"
or “PID SET2” to switch between sets. Configure the
values for:
Gain, Rate , Reset, Cycle Time
Gain #2, Rate #2, Reset#2, Cycle#2 Time
See Subsection 5.10 for procedures.
2PV SW TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER —
When the process variable is GREATER than the
value set at prompt "SW VALUE" (Switchover
Value), the controller will use Gain, Rate, Reset, and
Cycle Time. The active PID SET can be read in the
lower display.
When the process variable is LESS than the value
set at prompt "SW VALUE," the controller will use
Gain #2, Rate #2, Reset #2, and Cycle #2 Time. The
active PID SET can be read in the lower display.
Other prompts affected: SW VALUE

4.11 Control Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Table 4-10 Control Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
PID SETS 2SP SW TWO SETS SP AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER —
(CONTINUED When the setpoint is GREATER than the value set at
prompt "SW VALUE" (Switchover Value), the
controller will use Gain, Rate, Reset, and Cycle.
When the setpoint is LESS than the value set at
prompt "SW VALUE," the controller will use Gain #2,
Rate #2, Reset #2, and Cycle #2.
GAIN SCDL GAIN SCHEDULING - allows you to schedule 8 user
defined Gain segments applied over a user defined
PV range. Enter Gain and PV values under Set Up
prompt "TUNING".
ATTENTION Gain scheduling automatically

disables Adaptive Tune for this loop.
PB or GAIN selections in this group also applies.
SW VALUE Value in engineering units AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE—This is the
value of Process Variable or Setpoint at which the
controller will switch from Tuning Constant Set #2 to
Set #1. Only appears when PID SETS selections
“2PV SW” or “2SP SW” are selected.
LSP's LOCAL SETPOINT SOURCE — This selection
determines what your local setpoint source will be;
One local or Two local. Toggled by the SP1/SP2
key.
1ONLY LOCAL SETPOINT — The setpoint entered from the
keyboard.
TWO TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS — This selection lets you
switch between two local setpoints using the
[SP1/SP2] key.
THREE THREE LOCAL SETPOINTS — Setpoint 3 toggled
by RSP/CAS key. LSP 3 is mutually exclusive
with RSP or Internal Cascade.
RSP SOURC REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE — This selection
determines what your remote setpoint source will be
when toggled by the RSP/CAS key or Digital
Input. Not available for Cascade PID Loop.
NONE
INPUT 2 NONE - No remote setpoint
INPUT 3 INPUT 2 - Remote Setpoint is Input 2
IN ALG 1 INPUT 5 - Remote Setpoint is Input 5
IN ALG 2 IN ALG 1 - Remote Setpoint using Input 1 algorithm
IN ALG 2 - Remote Setpoint using Input 2 algorithm


or Selection
AUTO BIAS AUTO BIAS — is used for bumpless transfer when
transferring from local setpoint to remote setpoint.
Auto Bias calculates and adds a bias to remote
setpoint input each time a transfer is made.
Only available for Input 2 thru 5 RSP Source only
and if no tracking is selected.
ENABLE ENABLE - enables auto bias.
DISABLE DISABLE - disables auto bias.
SP TRACK SETPOINT TRACKING — The local setpoint can be
configured to track either PV or RSP as listed below.
Not configurable when Auto Bias is set.
NONE NO TRACKING — If local setpoint tracking is not
configured, the LSP will not be altered when transfer
from RSP to LSP is made.
PV PV - Local setpoint track the PV when in manual.
RSP RSP - Local setpoint track remote setpoint. When
the controller transfers out of remote setpoint, the
last value of the remote setpoint (RSP) is inserted
into the local setpoint.
PWR MODE POWER UP CONTROLLER MODE RECALL —
This selection determines which mode and setpoint
the controller will use when the controller restarts
after a power loss. Select one from below:
MANUAL MANUAL, LSP — At power-up, the controller will
use manual mode with the local setpoint displayed.
A or M SP LAST MODE/LAST SETPOINT used before power
down.
A or M LSP LAST MODE/LAST LOCAL SETPOINT on power
down.
SP HILIM 0 to 100% of PV span in SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT* — This selection prevents
engineering units with the local and remote setpoints from going above the
decimal place value selected here. The setting must be equal or
less than the upper range of the inputs.
SP LOLIM 0 to 100% of PV span in SET POINT LOW LIMIT* — This selection prevents
engineering units with the local and remote setpoints from going below the
greater than the lower range of the inputs.
*The Local Setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range. For example, if SP
= 1500 and the SP HILIM is changed to 1200, the new Local Setpoint will be 1200.


or Selection
ACTION CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION — select Direct or
Reverse.
DIRECT DIRECT ACTING CONTROL — The controller's
output increases as the process variable increases.
REVERSE REVERSE ACTING CONTROL — The controller's
output decreases as the process variable increases.
OUT RATE OUTPUT CHANGE RATE - Enables or Disables
the Output Change Rate. The maximum rate is set at
Prompt “PCT/MIN UP” or “PCT/MIN DN” . Only
available for PID-A, PID-B, PD+MR control
DISABLE algorithms.
ENABLE ENABLE - allows output rate
DISABLE - disables output rate
PCT/MIN UP 0 to 9999%/minute OUTPUT RATE UP VALUE - This selection limits
the rate at which the output can change upward.
Enter a value in percent/minute. Appears only if
“OUT RATE” is enabled. “0” means no output rate
applied.
PCT/MIN DN 0 to 9999%/minute OUTPUT RATE DOWN VALUE - This selection
limits the rate at which the output can change
downward. Enter a value in percent/minute. Appears
only if “OUT RATE” is enabled. “0” means no output
rate.
OUT HI LIM –5.0 to 105.0% of output HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT — This is the highest value of
output beyond which you do not want the controller
automatic output to exceed.
Use 0 to 100% for digital output type.
Use 5 to 105% for current output
OUT LO LIM –5.0 to 105.0% of output LOW OUTPUT LIMIT — This is the lowest value of
output below which you do not want the controller
Use 5 to 105% for current output
I HI LIM Within the range of the HIGH RESET LIMIT - This is the highest value of
output limits output beyond which you want no reset to occur.
I LOLIM Within the range of the LOW RESET LIMIT - This is the lowest value of
DROPOFF –5 to 105.0% of output CONTROLLER DROPOFF VALUE — Output value
that below which the controller output will dropoff to
the low output limit value set in prompt "OUT
LOLIM."
DEADBAND DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between the
operating ranges of output 1 and output 2 in which
neither output operates (positive value) or both
outputs operate (negative value).
–5.0 to 25.0% Time Duplex
0 to 25.0% On-Off Duplex


or Selection
OUT HYST 0.0 to 5.0% of PV Span HYSTERESIS (OUTPUT RELAY) is an adjustable
overlap of the ON/OFF states of each control output.
This is the difference between the value of the
process variable at which the control outputs
energize and the value at which they de-energize.
Only applicable for ON/OFF control.
FAIL MODE FAILSAFE MODE
NON LATCH NON LATCH - when the controller has gone to
failsafe and the problem is corrected, the controller
will go to automatic mode on power up at the
setpoint that was being used.
LATCHING LATCHING - When the controller has gone to
will stay in manual mode.
FAILSAFE 0 to 100% FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE — The value used
here will also be the output level when you have
Communications SHED or when NO BURNOUT is
configured and Input 1 fails.
PBorGAIN* PROPORTIONAL BAND UNITS — Select one of
the following for the Proportional (P) term of the PID
algorithm:
PB PCT PROPORTIONAL BAND — Selects units of percent
proportional band for the P term of the PID
algorithm.
Where: PB% = 100%FS
GAIN
GAIN GAIN selects the unitless term of gain for the P term
of the PID algorithm.
Where: GAIN =100%FS
PB%
MINorRPM* RESET UNITS — Selects units of minutes or repeat
per minutes for the I term of the PID algorithm. 20
Repeats per Minute = 0.05 Minutes per Repeat.
RPM REPEATS PER MINUTE — The number of times
per minute that the proportional action is repeated by
reset.
MINUTES MINUTES PER REPEAT — The time between each
repeat of the proportional action by reset.
*Selection here is used for both Loop 1 and Loop 2 if available. Also applies to Gain Scheduling on Loops 1 and 2.

4.12 Control2 Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with how Loop 2 of a Two Loop
Process controller will control the process including: PV Source, Number
of tuning parameter sets, Setpoint source, Tracking, Power-up recall,
Setpoint limits, Output direction, rate and limits, Dropoff, Deadband and
Hysteresis.
Control2 group Table 4-11 lists all the function prompts in the Control2 setup group and
Table 4-11 Control2 Group Definitions
or Selection
PV2 SRC PROCESS VARIABLE 2 SOURCE - select the
source of the Process Variable for Loop 2.
INPUT 1 INPUT 1
INPUT 2 INPUT 2
INPUT 3 INPUT 3
INPUT 4 INPUT 4
INPUT 5 INPUT 5
PID SETS NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER SETS — This
selection lets you choose one or two sets of tuning
constants (gain, rate, and reset).
1 ONLY ONE SET ONLY — Only one set of tuning
parameters is available. Configure the values for:
Gain (proportional band)
Rate
Reset Time
Cycle Time (if time proportional is used)
2KEYBD TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE — Two
sets of tuning parameters can be configured and can
be selected at the operator interface or by using the
Digital Inputs.
Press LOWR DISP key until you see "PID SET3"
or “PID SET4” to switch between sets. Configure the
values for:
Gain#3, Rate#3 , Reset#3, Cycle3Time
Gain #4, Rate #4, Reset#4, Cycle#4 Time
See Subsection 5.10 for procedure.
2PV SW TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER —
When the process variable is GREATER than the
value set at prompt "SW VALUE" (Switchover
Value), the controller will use Gain3, Rate3, Reset3,
and Cycle 3Time. The active PID SET can be read in
the lower display.
When the process variable is LESS than the value
set at prompt "SW VALUE," the controller will use
Gain #4, Rate #4, Reset #4, and Cycle #4 Time. The
active PID SET can be read in the lower display.

4.12 Control2 Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Table 4-11 Control2 Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
PID SETS 2SP SW TWO SETS SP AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER —
(CONTINUED When the setpoint is GREATER than the value set at
prompt "SW VALUE" (Switchover Value), the
controller will use Gain3, Rate3, Reset3, and Cycle3.
When the setpoint is LESS than the value set at
prompt "SW VALUE," the controller will use Gain #4,
Rate #4, Reset #4, and Cycle #4.
GAIN SCDL GAIN SCHEDULING - allows you to schedule 8 user
defined Gain segments applied over a user defined
PV range. Enter Gain and PV values under Set Up
prompt "TUNING2".
ATTENTION Gain scheduling automatically
disables Adaptive Tune for this loop.
PB or GAIN selections in "CONTROL" group also
applies.
SW VALUE Value in engineering units AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE —This is the
value of Process Variable or Setpoint at which the
controller will switch from Tuning Constant Set #4 to
Set #3. Only appears when PID SETS selections
“2PV SW” or “2SP SW” are selected.
LSP's LOCAL SETPOINT SOURCE — This selection
determines what your local setpoint source will be;
One local or Two local. Toggled by the SP1/SP2
key.
1ONLY LOCAL SETPOINT — The setpoint entered from the
keyboard.
TWO TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS — This selection lets you
switch between two local setpoints using the
SP1/SP2 key.
THREE THREE LOCAL SETPOINTS — Setpoint 3 toggled

by RSP/CAS key. LSP 3 is mutually exclusive
with RSP or Internal Cascade.
RSP SOURC REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE — this selection
determines what your remote setpoint source will be
when toggled by the RSP/CAS key or Digital
Input.
NONE
INPUT 2 NONE - No remote setpoint
IN ALG 1 INPUT 5 - Remote Setpoint is Input 5
IN ALG 2 IN ALG 1 - Remote Setpoint using Input 1 algorithm
IN ALG 2 - Remote Setpoint using Input 2 algorithm

or Selection
AUTO BIAS AUTO BIAS — is used for bumpless transfer when
transferring from local setpoint to remote setpoint.
Auto Bias calculates and adds a bias to remote
setpoint input each time a transfer is made. Available
for any analog Input RSP Source and if no tracking
is selected.
ENABLE ENABLE - enables auto bias.
DISABLE DISABLE - disables auto bias.
SP TRACK SETPOINT TRACKING — The local setpoint can be
configured to track either PV or RSP as listed below:
Not configurable when Auto Bias is set.
NONE NO TRACKING — If local setpoint tracking is not
configured, the LSP will not be altered when transfer
from RSP to LSP is made.
PV PV - Local setpoint tracks the PV when in manual.
RSP RSP - Local setpoint tracks remote setpoint. When
the controller transfers out of remote setpoint, the
last value of the remote setpoint (RSP) is inserted
into the local setpoint.
SP HILIM 0 to 100% of span input in SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT* — This selection prevents
engineering units with the local and remote setpoints from going above the
less than the upper range of the inputs.
SP LOLIM 0 to 100% of span input in SETPOINT LOW LIMIT* — This selection prevents
engineering units with the local and remote setpoints from going below the
greater than the lower range of the inputs.
*The Local Setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range. For example, if SP
= 1500 and the SP HILIM is changed to 1200, the new Local Setpoint will be 1200.
ACTION CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION — select Direct
or Reverse.
DIRECT DIRECT ACTING CONTROL — The controller's
output increases as the process variable increases.
REVERSE REVERSE ACTING CONTROL — The controller's
output decreases as the process variable
increases.
OUT RATE OUTPUT CHANGE RATE - Enables or Disables
the Output Change Rate. The maximum rate is set
at prompt “PCT/MIN UP” or “PCT/MIN DN”.
DISABLE DISABLE - disables output rate
ENABLE ENABLE - allows output rate


or Selection
PCT/MIN UP 0 to 9999%/minute OUTPUT RATE UP VALUE - This selection limits
the rate at which the output can change upward.
Enter a value in percent/minute. Appears only if
“OUT RATE” is enabled. “0” means no output rate
applied.
PCT/MIN DN 0 to 9999%/minute OUTPUT RATE DOWN VALUE - This selection
limits the rate at which the output can change
downward. Enter a value in percent/minute. Appears
only if “OUT RATE” is enabled. “0” means no output
rate.
OUT HI LIM –5.0 to 105.0% of output HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT — This is the highest value of
output beyond which you do not want the controller
Use 5 to 105% for current output.
OUT LO LIM –5.0 to 105.0% of output LOW OUTPUT LIMIT — This is the lowest value of
output below which you do not want the controller
Use 5 to 105% for current output.
I HI LIM Within the range of the HIGH RESET LIMIT - this is the highest value of
I LOLIM Within the range of the LOW RESET LIMIT - this is the lowest value of
DROPOFF –5 to 105.0% of output CONTROLLER DROPOFF VALUE — Output value
that below which the controller output will dropoff to
the low output limit value set in prompt "OUT
LOLIM."
DEADBAND DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between the
operating ranges of output 1 and output 2 in which
neither output operates (positive value) or both
outputs operate (negative value).
–5.0 to 25.0% Time Duplex, Cur Duplex, Cur Time, Time Cur
0 to 25.0% On-Off Duplex
FAIL MODE FAILSAFE MODE
NON LATCH NON LATCH - When the controller has gone to
will go to automatic mode on power up at the
setpoint that was being used.
LATCHING LATCHING - When the controller has gone to
will stay in manual mode.
FAILSAFE 0 to 100% FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE — The value used
here will also be the output level when you have
Communications SHED or when NO BURNOUT is
configured and input 1 fails.

4.13 Options Set Up Group
Introduction Configure the Digital Inputs to a specific contact closure response, or
configure the 2nd Current Output to be a specific selection with desired
scaling.
Table 4-12 lists all the function prompts in the Option setup group and
their functions.
Table 4-12 Option Group Definitions
or Selection
CUR OUT 2 2ND CURRENT OUTPUT—primarily is used for
Loop 2 output but it also can represent one of
13 control parameters. The display for 2nd current
output viewing will be in engineering units for all but
output. Output will be in percent.
Other prompts affected by these selections: "4mA
VAL" and "20mA VAL."
DISABL NO 2nd CURRENT OUTPUT
INPUT 1 INPUT 1 represents the value of the configured
range of input 1.
range of input 2.
range of input 3.
range of input 4.
INPUT 5 INPUT 5 — This represents the configured range of
input 5. FOR EXAMPLE:
Type “J” Thermocouple (0 to 1600°F)
0°F display = 0% output
1600°F display = 100% output
PV PROCESS VARIABLE — Represents the value of
the Process Variable for Loop 1.
DEVIATION DEVIATION (PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS
SETPOINT) — Represents –100 to +100% of the
selected PV span in engineering units for Loop 1.
When Deviation is selected, only one operating
parameter will be entered. This value represents the
deviation level that will produce 20mA output. Zero
deviation will produce a center scale (12mA) output. A
negative deviation equal in magnitude to the 2nd current
output high value will produce a low end (4mA) output.
OUTPUT OUTPUT — Represents the displayed controller

output in percent (%) for Loop 1.
SP SETPOINT — Represents the value of the setpoint
in units of PV for Loop 1.

Table 4-12 Option Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
CUR OUT 2 LSP 1 SETPOINT 1— Represents the value of local
(continued) setpoint#1 in units of PV for Loop 1.
IN ALG 1 INPUT ALGORITHM 1 OUTPUT — Represent the
output from input algorithm 1.
IN ALG 2 INPUT ALGORITHM 2 OUTPUT — Represent the
output from input algorithm 2.
PV LOOP2 PROCESS VARIABLE — Represents the value of
the Process Variable for Loop 2.
DEV LOOP2 DEVIATION 2 (PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS
SETPOINT) — Represents –100 to +100% of the
selected PV span in engineering units for Loop 2.
When Deviation is selected, only one operating
deviation level that will produce 20mA output. Zero
deviation will produce a center scale (12mA) output. A
negative deviation equal in magnitude to the 2nd current
output high value will produce a low end (4mA) output.
OUTPUT2 OUTPUT 2 — Represents the displayed controller

output in percent (%) for Loop 2.
SP LOOP 2 SETPOINT 2— Represents the value of the setpoint
in units of PV for Loop 2.
LSP LOOP2 LOCAL SETPOINT 2— Represents the value of
Local Setpoint#1 in units of PV for Loop 2.
4mA VAL Low Scale Value 2ND CURRENT OUTPUT LOW SCALING
within the range of the FACTOR — Use a value in engineering units to
selected variable to represent all above except output.
represent 4 mA
Use value in percent (%) for Output. (Output can be
between –5 and +105%.)
20mA VAL* High Scale Value 2ND CURRENT OUTPUT HIGH SCALING
within the range of the FACTOR — Use a value in engineering units to
selected variable to represent all above except output.
represent 20 mA
Use a value in percent (%) for Output. (Output can
be between –5 and +105%.)
*When Deviation is selected, only one operating
deviation level that will produce 20 mA output. Zero
deviation will produce a center scale (12 mA) output. A
negative deviation equal in magnitude to the Auxiliary
Output High Value will produce a low end (4 mA) output.


or Selection
DIG IN 1 DIGITAL INPUT ONE SELECTIONS — Contact
closure enables one of the following (applies to Loop
1 on 2 Loop models).
The controller returns to its original state when
contact opens, except where noted.
If the selection for the Digital Inputs are in conflict
with each other, whichever switch is closed first will
take precedence. If multiple switches are closed
simultaneously, then the lowest numbered Digital
Input takes precedence.
Digital Inputs and Logic Gate outputs configured to
turn on a Digital Output have the same priority.
These operate as an OR function with one another.
The Digital Output will be active if either the Digital
Input or the Gate Output is in a TRUE condition.
If the controller is in Communications Slave mode on
either loop. then the switches are disabled.
NONE NO DIGITAL INPUT SELECTIONS
TO MAN TO MANUAL — Contact closure puts the controller
into manual mode.
TO SP1 TO LOCAL SETPOINT — Contact closure puts the
controller into local setpoint 1.
TO SP2 TO LOCAL SETPOINT TWO — Contact closure
puts the controller into local setpoint 2.
TO SP3 TO LOCAL SETPOINT THREE — Contact closure
TO DIRECT TO DIRECT ACTION — Contact closure selects
direct controller action.
TO HOLD TO HOLD — Contact closure suspends Setpoint
Ramp. Contact open runs ramp.
TO PID2 TO PID2 — Contact closure selects PID Set 2.
PV IS IN2 PV = INPUT 2-Contact Closure selects PV = Input 2.
TO RUN RUN — Contact closure starts a stopped SP RAMP.
TRACK 1 OUTPUT 1 TRACKS INPUT 4 — Contact closure
allows OUT 1 to track Input 4.


or Selection
DIG IN 1 TRACK 2 OUTPUT2 TRACKS INPUT 4 — Contact closure
continued allows OUT 2 to track Input 4.
TO OUT 2 OUT 2 OVERRIDES OUTPUT 1 — Allows OUT 2 to
override OUT 1.
MAN SAFE MANUAL FAILSAFE – Unit goes to Manual Mode,
output goes to the Failsafe value.
PULSE DOWN SETPOINT DOWN — Contact closure selects
downward direction of setpoint when Pulse Input is
used as a setpoint adjustment. Open Contact
selects Upward direction.
OUT 3 ON OUTPUT 3 ON — Contact closure energizes Output
3. This selection is overridden by Time
Proportioning Output selections and Alarm 3.
OUT 4 ON OUTPUT 4 ON — Contact closure energizes Output
4. This selection is overridden by Time
Proportioning Output selections and Alarm 4.
INHIBIT 1 INHIBITS INTEGRAL ACTION — Contact Closure
inhibits integral action on PID-A or PID-B algorithms.
TO RSP TO REMOTE SETPOINT — Contact closure selects
the Remote Setpoint.
DSP L1/L2 LOOP DISPLAY — Contact closure displays loop
not currently being displayed. Opening contact
returns to original loop display.
RESET FB INTEGRAL RESET OVERRIDE - Contact closure
allows Input 3 to override the Integral Reset
Calculation.
Note: Input 3 Ratio and Bias settings are ignored
and should be set to 1.00 and 0.00 to make the
value consistent with the front display readout. The
value used is in percent of the range.
ToA/M STA TO AUTO MANUAL STATION - When the switch is
closed, the loop performs as follows:
PV = In2
Action = Direct
Control Algorithm = PD+MR
PIDSET = 2
SP = LSP2
TO PURGE TO PURGE - When the switch is closed, the loop is
forced to Manual mode with the Output value set to
the High Output Limit. The configuration of the
Latching function determines whether the action is
momentary or latching.
LOW FIRE TO LOW FIRE - When the switch is closed, the loop
is forced to Manual mode with the Output value set
to the Low Output Limit. The configuration of the
ToTUNE ToTUNE - contact closure starts the tuning process.


or Selection
DIG 1 COMB DIGITAL INPUT 1 COMBINATIONS - These selec-
tions can be used with any selection from DIG IN1.
DISABLE DISABLE - Disables combination function.
+ To PID2 ANY DIGITAL INPUT SELECTION PLUS TO PID
SET TWO – Contact closure puts the controller into
PID SET 2.
+ To DIR ANY DIGITAL INPUT SELECTION PLUS TO
DIRECT CONTROL – Contact closure puts the
controller into DIRECT CONTROL.
+ToSP2 ANY DIGITAL INPUT SELECTION PLUS TO
LOCAL SETPOINT TWO — Contact closure puts
the controller into local setpoint 2.
ADT1 ANY DIGITAL INPUT SELECTION PLUS DISABLE
ADAPTIVE TUNE— Contact closure disables
Adaptive Tune on Loop 1.
+ToSP1 ANY DIGITAL INPUT SELECTION PLUS TO
LOCAL SETPOINT ONE — Contact closure puts
the controller into local setpoint 1.
To RUN ANY DIGITAL INPUT SELECTION PLUS RUN
SETPOINT RAMP — Contact closure switches to
RUN if Setpoint Ramp.
DIG IN 2 DIGITAL INPUT TWO SELECTIONS — Same
selections as DIG IN1. Digital Input 2 is reserved for
Loop 2 parameters when Two Loops or Internal
Cascade is configured.
DIG 2 COMB DIGITAL INPUT 2 COMBINATIONS - These
selections can be used with any selection from
DIG IN2.


or Selection
DIG IN 3 DIGITAL INPUT THREE SELECTIONS — Digital
Input 3 is internally connected (shares rear
terminals) with the Alarm1 and Digital Output 1.
The controller returns to its original state when
contact opens, except where noted.
If the selection for the Digital Inputs are in conflict
with each other, whichever switch is closed first will
take precedence. If multiple switches are closed
simultaneously, then the lowest numbered Digital
Input takes precedence.
Digital Inputs and Logic Gate outputs configured to
turn on a Digital Output have the same priority.
These operate as an OR function with one another.
The Digital Output will be active if either the Digital
Input or the Gate Output is in a TRUE condition.
If the controller is in Communications Slave mode on
either loop, then the switches are disabled.
Contact closure enables one of the following:
NONE NO DIGITAL INPUT SELECTIONS
TO MANUAL TO MANUAL — Contact closure puts the controller
into manual mode.
TO SP1 TO LOCAL SETPOINT — Contact closure puts the
controller into local setpoint 1.
TO SP2 TO LOCAL SETPOINT TWO — Contact closure
TO SP3 TO LOCAL SETPOINT THREE — Contact closure
TO RUN TO RUN— Contact closure starts a Setpoint ramp.
TO HOLD TO HOLD — Contact closure suspends Setpoint
Ramp. Contact open runs ramp.
TO PID2 TO PID2 — Contact closure selects PID Set 2.
RSP - IN1 REMOTE SETPOINT FROM INPUT 1— Contact
closure selects Input 1 as the Remote Setpoint.


or Selection
DIG IN 3 RSP - IN2 REMOTE SETPOINT FROM INPUT 2— Contact
continued closure selects Input 2 as the Remote Setpoint.
TO DIRECT TO DIRECT ACTION — Contact closure selects
direct controller action.
MAN SAFE MANUAL FAILSAFE – Unit goes to Manual Mode,
output goes to the Failsafe value.
ToA/M STA TO AUTO MANUAL STATION - When the switch is
closed, the loop performs as follows:
PV = In2
Action = Direct
PIDSET = 2
SP = LSP2
TO PURGE TO PURGE - When the switch is closed, the loop is
forced to Manual mode with the Output value set to
the High Output Limit. The configuration of the
LOW FIRE TO LOW FIRE - When the switch is closed, the loop
is forced to Manual mode with the Output value set
to the Low Output Limit. The configuration of the
DIG IN 4 DIGITAL INPUT FOUR SELECTIONS — Digital
Input 4 is internally connected (shares rear
terminals) with the Alarm 2 and Digital Output 2.
Same selections as DIG IN3.
DIG IN 5 DIGITAL INPUT FIVE SELECTIONS — Digital Input
5 is internally connected (shares rear terminals) with
Digital Output 3 which can be used by:
• Loop 1 Time Proportioning - Heat Output
• Alarm 3
• Logic Gates
Any use of these outputs will also trigger this Digital
Input.


or Selection
DIG IN 6 DIGITAL INPUT SIX SELECTIONS — Digital Input
6 is internally connected (shares rear terminals) with
Digital Output 4 which can be used by:
• Loop 1 Time Duplex - Cool Output
• Loop 2 Time Simplex Output
• Alarm 4
• Logic Gates
Input.
DI ON LP1 LOOP 1 ASSIGNMENT— When 2 Loops are
configured, Digital Inputs 3 to 6 are assigned to
Loop 1 according to your selection below.
Unassigned Digital Inputs are assigned to Loop 2 by
default.
DI3,4,5,6 Assign all Digital Inputs to Loop 1.
DI3,4,5 Assign Digital Inputs 3, 4, and 5 to Loop 1.
DI3,4 Assign Digital Inputs 3 and 4 to Loop 1.
DI3 Assign Digital Input 3 to Loop 1.
LATCHING
NONE NONE — The resulting action of the DI configured
as TO PURGE or LOW FIRE is momentary, that is,
the action is active only during the duration of the DI
being closed, which forces the loop to Manual mode
with the output being at either High or Low Output
Limit.
PURGE PURGE — The resulting action of the DI being
closed is that the loop is forced to Manual mode with
the output value set to the High Output Limit. The
loop is latched and can only be returned to
Automatic mode by pressing the MAN/AUTO key
on the front panel.
LOW FIRE
LOW FIRE — The resulting action of the DI being
closed is that the loop is forced to Manual mode with
the output value set to the Low Output Limit. The
loop is latched and can only be returned to
Automatic mode by pressing the MAN/AUTO key
on the front panel.
BOTH BOTH — The DI configured as either PURGE or

LOW FIRE will cause latching to work as described
under PURGE and LOW FIRE above.

4.14 Communications Set Up Group
Introduction This option allows the controller to be connected to a host computer by

way of various communications options.
The controller looks for messages from the computer at regular intervals.
If these messages are not received within the configured shed time, the
controller will SHED from the communications link and return to stand
alone operation.
The device address, parity, baud rate, Computer Setpoint, Units, Ratio,
and Bias are configurable depending on the protocol you are using.
You can also set the SHED output mode and setpoint recall, and
communication units.
Up to 99 addresses can be configured over this link.
485TDC option
Up to four RS485 link addresses are allowed when the communication
option is selected as 485TDCSDI. One PV Point and one OP point are
required to be configured per loop when the UDC6300 TDC integration
schematics are to be used for Operator Interface from the TDC Universal
Station. Remote Cascade Option and overall mode of Operation can also
be configured.
Communications group Table 4-13 lists all the function prompts in the Communications setup
Table 4-13 Communications Group Definitions

or Selection
COM STATE COMMUNICATIONS SELECTION
DISABL DISABL — Disables the communications option.

485DMCS DMCS — Enables DMCS communication.
422ASCII 422ASCII — Enables RS422/485 communication.
485MODRTU 485RTU — Enables Modbus 485RTU communication.
485TDCSDI 485TDC — Allows the UDC6300 to communicate with the
TDC3000.
485BSAP 485BSAP — Bristol Protocol
ADDRESS 1 to 99 COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS (LOOP 1) —

This is a number that is assigned to a controller that is to
485DMCS, 422ASCII, be used with the communications option. This number will
485MODRTU, 485BSAP be its address. Must be different addresses for 2 Loops on
only 485ASCII.
ADDRESS2 1 to 99 COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS (LOOP 2) —

This is a number that is assigned to a controller that is to
485ASCII only be used with the communications option. This number will
be its address. Must be different addresses for 2 Loops on
485ASCII.

4.14 Communications Set Up Group, Continued
Table 4-13 Communications Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
PV1 SLOT 0 to 16 LOOP 1 PROCESS VARIABLE (PV) POINT ADDRESS
485TDCSDI only 0=No Connection — Select the RS485 slot that corresponds to the TDC SDI
IOP point that will be used to access UDC Loop 1 Process
Variable (PV) data.
Recommended 485TDCSDI slots:
FTA1 = SDI/IOP POINT 1 TO 8
This will map the UDC 485 slots directly to the IOP point
numbers.
Do not mix higher slots (9 to 16) with lower slots (1 to 8) on
UDCs that will be connected to a single FTA.
OP1 SLOT 0 to 16 LOOP 1 OUTPUT (OP) POINT ADDRESS — Select the
485TDCSDI only 0=No Connection RS485 slot that corresponds to the TDC SDI IOP point that
will be used to access UDC Loop 1 Output (OP) data.
Recommended 485TDCSDI slots:
This will map the UDC 485 slots directly to the IOP point
numbers.
Do not mix higher slots (9 to 16) with lower slots (1 to 8) on
UDCs that will be connected to a single FTA.
PV2 SLOT 0 to16 LOOP 2 PROCESS VARIABLE (PV) POINT ADDRESS
485TDCSDI only 0=No Connection — Select the 485TDCSDI address that corresponds to the
TDC SDI IOP point that will be used to access UDC Loop
2 Process Variable (PV) data.
See “PV1 SLOT”.
OP2 SLOT 0 to 16 LOOP 1 OUTPUT (OP) POINT ADDRESS — Select the
485TDCSDI only 0=No Connection 485TDCSDI address that corresponds to the TDC SDI IOP
point that will be used to access UDC Loop 2 Output (OP)
data.
See “OP1 SLOT”.
PARITY PARITY pertains to the use of a self-checking code
485ASCII only employing binary digits in which the total number of ONE's
(or ZERO's) in each permissible code expression is either
ODD or EVEN.
ODD ODD PARITY
EVEN EVEN PARITY
BAUD RATE BAUD RATE is the transmission speed in bits per second.
Does not apply to 300 300 BAUD
485TDCSDI 600 600 BAUD
1200 1200 BAUD
2400 2400 BAUD
4800 4800 BAUD
9600 9600 BAUD
19200 19200 BAUD
38400 38400 BAUD
NOTE: If you make a change in Baud Rate, cycle the power
supply after you make the change.


or Selection
FRAMING FRAMING —Used with asynchronous block

communication including ASCII and Modbus RTU. This
422ASCII, 485MODRTU prompt allows selection of maximum allowable time
only between transmitted characters before the received
message is terminated. Typically, this parameter should be
set to DEFAULT, but additional adjustment may be
required when the Host (PC) communication driver has
gaps that exceed the normal allowable delay.
DEFAULT DEFAULT Modbus framing is based on the baud rate as
3-1/2 character times.
DEFAULT ASCII framing is infinite time delay between
characters. Messages are only terminated when a LF,CR
is received.
100MSEC 100MSEC—100 milliseconds
XMT DELAY TRANSMISSION DELAY—Provides a means for delaying

the response from the UDC after a valid message has
been received. It allows hot computers that operate in half
duplex to post a receive after the end of a transmission. It
is also used in cases where the two wire RS232/485
adapter requires a delay for shutting down its drivers after
transmission.
NONE NONE—No transmission delay
DUPLEX DUPLEX – Transmission Response
Does not apply to HALF HALF — Delayed Response

485TDCSDI FULL FULL — No Delayed Response
DATA FORM DATA FORM — Transmission Data Format
485MODRTU only INTEGER INTEGER — Process-related data in 16-bit Integer format

FLOAT PT FLOAT PT — Process-related data in IEEE Floating Point
format
UNITS COMMUNICATION UNITS — This selection determines

how the controller values are expressed during
communications.
PERCNT PERCENT OF SPAN
ENG ENGINEERING UNITS


or Selection
BOX MODE Overall Mode of UDC6300 BOX MODE — You can set the overall mode of operation
Operation which will determine the level of interaction allowed from
the TDC to the UDC6300.
BASIC BASIC MODE — Permits only monitor operation from the
TDC.
FULL FULL MODE — Permits control operations including mode
changes and Output and Setpoint overrides.
SHEDTIME 1 to 255 SHED TIME — The number that represents how many
sample periods there will be before the controller sheds
from communications. Each period equals 1/3 second or
0 = No shed.
SHEDMODE SHED CONTROLLER MODE AND OUTPUT LEVEL
FOR LOOP 1 — Determines the mode of local control you
want when the controller is shed from the communications
link.
LAST LAST — SAME MODE AS BEFORE SHED — The
controller will return to the same mode (manual or
automatic) that it was in before shed.
TO MAN TO MAN — TO MANUAL MODE BUMPLESS OUTPUT —
The controller will return to manual mode at the same
output level that it had before shed.
FSAFE FAILSAFE — TO MANUAL MODE, FAILSAFE OUTPUT
— The controller will return to manual mode at the output
value selected at “CONTROL” prompt “FAILSAFE”.
ToAUTO ToAUTO — To automatic mode.
SHED SP SHED SP FOR LOOP 1 — Shed setpoint recall.
TO LSP TO LSP — Controller will use last local SP used.
TO CSP TO CSP — Controller will use computer setpoint.
CSP RATIO –20.00 to 20.00 LOOP 1 COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO — Computer
Setpoint ratio for Loop 1.
CSP BIAS –999.0 to 9999 LOOP 1 COMPUTER SETPOINT BIAS — Computer
Setpoint Bias for Loop 1.
RCASMODE REMOTE CASCADE OPTION FOR LOOP 1 — Lets you
485TDCSDI only select a Remote Cascade control architecture.
SPC SPC (Supervisory Control) — The setpoint of the
secondary controller is controlled by a higher level
(Primary) controller.
DDC DDC (Direct Digital Control) — The Output of the
secondary controller is controlled by the Output of the
higher level (Primary) controller.
M/A STN MANUAL AUTO STATION—Allows the control loop to
behave as a Manual Auto Station whereby only manual
control is available at the UDC and Auto control is
performed in a computer or PLC.


Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Parameter
Range of Setting Definition
or Selection
SHED2MODE SHED CONTROLLER MODE AND OUTPUT LEVEL
FOR LOOP 2 — Determines the mode of local control you
want when the controller is shed from the communications
link.
LAST LAST — SAME MODE AS BEFORE SHED — The
controller will return to the same mode (manual or
automatic) that it was in before shed.
TO MAN TO MAN — TO MANUAL MODE BUMPLESS OUTPUT —
The controller will return to manual mode at the same
output level that it had before shed.
FSAFE FSAFE — TO MANUAL MODE, FAILSAFE OUTPUT —
The controller will return to manual mode at the output
value selected at “CONTROL” prompt “FAILSAFE”.
ToAUTO ToAUTO — To automatic mode.
SHED2SP SHED SP FOR LOOP 2 — Shed setpoint recall.
TO LSP TO LSP — Controller will use last local SP used.
TO CSP TO CSP — Controller will use computer setpoint.
CSP2 RATIO –20.00 to 20.00 LOOP 2 COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO — Computer
Setpoint Ratio for Loop 2.
CSP2 BIAS –999.0 to 9999 LOOP 2 COMPUTER SETPOINT BIAS — Computer
Setpoint Bias for Loop 2.
RCAS2MOD REMOTE CASCADE OPTION FOR LOOP 2 — Lets you
485TDCSDI only select a Remote Cascade control architecture.
SPC SPC (Supervisory Control) — The setpoint of the
secondary controller is controlled by a higher level
(Primary) controller.
DDC DDC (Direct Digital Control) — The Output of the
secondary controller is controlled by the Output of the
higher level (Primary) controller.
M/A STN MANUAL AUTO STATION—Allows the control loop to
behave as a Manual Auto Station whereby only manual
control is available at the UDC and Auto control is
performed in a computer or PLC.
TESTCOM ENABLE TEST COMMUNICATIONS—When enabled, causes the
(replaces LOOPBACK) DISABL UDC to transmit a protocol-oriented broadcast message. It
is useful for ensuring the device is connected properly and
that its Baud Rate, Parity, and communication type are
compatible with the host computer.
For Modbus, TDC, and DMCS, the message is:
<AA> 41 04 FF 55 AA <CRC>
where:
AA is an 8-bit address
<CRC> is a 16-bit cyclical redundancy check
For ASCII, the message is:
<AA>,0204,04,FF,55,AA,<CR><LF>
where:
AA is the device address
<CR>,<LF> are carriage return, line
feed end of string indication

4.15 Alarms Set Up Group
Introduction An alarm is an indication that an event that you have configured (for
example—Process Variable) has exceeded one or more alarm limits.
There are up to four alarms available. Each alarm has two setpoints. You
can configure each of these two setpoints to alarm on various controller
parameters.
There are two alarm output selections, High and Low. You can configure
each setpoint to alarm either High or Low.
Latching or Non-Latching alarms are available.
Alarm 3 = Digital Output 3 if not used for Control Output i.e Dedicated
Alarm 4 = Digital Output 4 if not used for Control Output i.e Dedicated
Alarms group Table 4-14 lists all the function prompts in the Alarms setup group and
Table 4-14 Alarms Group Definitions

or Selection
A1S1 VALU* Value in Engineering ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 VALUE — This is the value
Units at which you want the alarm type chosen in Prompt
"A1S1TYPE" to actuate. The value depends on what
the setpoint has been configured to represent.
"A1S2TYPE" to actuate.
The details are the same as “A1S1 VALU”.
• AxSxVALU is not available for AxSx TYPE: NONE, SHED, MANUAL, MANUAL2, REMSP, REMSP2, FAILSAFE,
FAILSAFE2.

Table 4-14 Alarms Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
"A3S1TYPE" to actuate. The value depends on what
the setpoint has been configured to represent.
A1S1TYPE ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 TYPE — Select what you
want Setpoint 1 of Alarm 1 to represent.
NONE NO ALARM
INPUT 1 INPUT 1
INPUT 2 INPUT 2
INPUT 3 INPUT 3
INPUT 4 INPUT 4
INPUT 5 INPUT 5
PV PROCESS VARIABLE
DEVIATION DEVIATION
OUTPUT OUTPUT
SHED SHED FROM COMMUNICATIONS
PV2 CONTROL LOOP 2 PV
DEV2 CONTROL LOOP 2 DEVIATION
OUTPUT2 CONTROL LOOP 2 OUTPUT
MANUAL ALARM ON LOOP 1 MANUAL
MANUAL2 ALARM ON LOOP 2 MANUAL
REM SP ALARM ON LOOP 1 REMOTE SETPOINT
REM SP2 ALARM ON LOOP 2 REMOTE SETPOINT
FAILSAFE ALARM ON LOOP 1 FAILSAFE
FAILSAFE2 ALARM ON LOOP 2 FAILSAFE
ATTENTION When the Alarm type is re-

configured, the value of the current alarm setpoint
does not automatically change to be consistent with
the range of the new alarm type until it is viewed on
the display.
• AxSxVALU is not available for AxSx TYPE: NONE, SHED, MANUAL, MANUAL2, REMSP, REMSP2, FAILSAFE,
FAILSAFE2.


or Selection
A1S2TYPE Same as A1S1 TYPE ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 TYPE — Select what you
want Setpoint 2 of Alarm 1 to represent. The
selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.
A4S2TYPE Same as A1S1 TYPE ALARM 4SETPOINT 2 TYPE — Select what you
A1S1 H L* ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 STATE — Select whether
you want the alarm type chosen in Prompt
"A1S1TYPE" to alarm HIGH or LOW.
HI HI ALARM
LO LO ALARM
HI HI ALARM
LO LO ALARM
HI HI ALARM
LO LO ALARM
A2S2 H L* ALARM 2 SET POINT 2 STATE — Select whether
HI HI ALARM
LO LO ALARM


or Selection
HI HI ALARM
LO LO ALARM
HI HI ALARM
LO LO ALARM
"A4S1TYPE" to alarm .
HI HI ALARM
LO LO ALARM
A4S2 H L* ALARM 4SET POINT 2 STATE — Select whether
HI HI ALARM
LO LO ALARM
AL HYST 0.0 to 5.0% of span or full ALARM HYSTERESIS — A single adjustable
output as appropriate hysteresis is provided on alarms such that when the
alarm is OFF it activates at exactly the alarm
setpoint; when the alarm is ON, it will not deactivate
until the variable is 0.0% to 5.0% away from the
alarm setpoint.
Configure the hysteresis of the alarms based on
INPUT signals as a % of input range span.
Configure the hysteresis of the alarm based on
OUTPUT signals as a % of the full scale output
range.
ALM ACTN ALARM RELAY COIL ACTION - The alarm action
is configurable for normally de-energized (Reverse)
operation.
ENERGIZE ENERGIZE - Digital Output energized on alarm.

DE ENERGZ DE ENERGZ - Digital Output de-energized on alarm.
• AxSxHL is not available for AxSx TYPE: NONE, SHED, MANUAL, MANUAL2, REMSP, REMSP2, FAILSAFE,
FAILSAFE2.


or Selection
ALM OUT 1 LATCHING ALARM FOR OUTPUT 1 - each alarm
output can be configured to be "Latching" or "Non-
latching".
NON LATCH
LATCHING Table 4-15 shows you the operation of the Digital
Outputs, Annunciators, and Bargraphs when you
select "Latching" or "Non-latching" alarms.
latching".
NON LATCH
LATCHING
latching".
NON LATCH
LATCHING
latching".
NON LATCH
LATCHING
Table 4-15 Latching and Non-latching Alarm Configuration

Alarm Alarm Alarm ACK Digital Outputs Annunciator Bargraphs
Configuratio Condition Key s
n ***
Pressed EN* DEN**
STILL NO ON OFF FLASHING FLASHING
EXISTS
Non YES ON OFF ON NORMAL
Latching ENDED NO OFF ON OFF NORMAL
YES OFF ON OFF NORMAL
STILL NO ON OFF FLASHING FLASHING
EXISTS
Latching**** YES ON OFF ON NORMAL
ENDED NO ON OFF FLASHING FLASHING
* "EN" is the "Digital Outputs Energized on Alarm" configuration

** "DEN" is the "Digital Outputs De-energized on Alarm" configuration
*** Only the Annunciator associated with the alarm will flash.
**** For CE conformity, Performance Criterion A, select “NON-LATCHING”.

4.16 Display Parameters Set Up Group
Introduction This group contains selections for Decimal Place, Units of Temperature,
Power Frequency, and Process I.D.
Alarms group Table 4-16 lists all the function prompts in the Display setup group and
Table 4-16 Display Group Definitions

or Selection
DECIMAL DECIMAL POINT LOCATION — This selection
determines where the decimal point appears in the
display.
XXXX XXXX - No Decimal Place
XXX.X XXX.X - One Place
XX.XX XX.XX - Two Places
X.XXX X.XXX - Three Places
ATTENTION Auto-ranging will occur to

whichever decimal place has been selected.
DECIMAL2 CONTROL LOOP 2 DECIMAL POINT LOCATION
— This selection determines where the decimal
point appears in the display for Loop 2.
XXXX XXXX - No Decimal Place
XXX.X XXX.X - One Place
XX.XX XX.XX - Two Places
X.XXX X.XXX - Three Places
TEMP UNIT TEMPERATURE UNITS - This selection will affect
the indication and operation. Applies to Loop 1.
DEG F DEG F - Degrees Fahrenheit
DEG C DEG C - Degrees Centigrade
NONE NONE - No display of units
PWR FREQ POWER FREQUENCY - Select whether your
controller is operating at 50 or 60 Hertz.
60HZ
50HZ
SPGRAPH SETPOINT BARGRAPH INDICATION - This
selection affects how the setpoint bargraph will
operate.
FULL Only available if 2LOOP DIS is configured for
ONE BAR SPnPVnON.
FULL - all bars light up to indicate setpoint value
ONE BAR - one bar lights at the setpoint value.

4.16 Display Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Table 4-16 Display Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
2 LOOP DIS BARGRAPH DISPLAY - What the bargraphs
represent depends on the selection you make at this
prompt.
SPnPVnOn SPnPVnOn -
Left bargraph Indicates setpoint of Loop
selected
Center bargraph Indicate PV of same Loop
Right bargraph Indicates Output of same
Loop
L1 L2 On L1 L2 On -
Left bargraph Indicates Loop 1 PV as a
column of bars -- SP is a
Blinking bar
Center bargraph Indicates Loop 2 PV as a
column of bars -- SP is a
Blinking bar
Right bargraph Indicates Output of Loop
selected as shown by L1 or
L2 digital display
L1 - - On L1 - - On
Left bargraph Same as above
Center bargraph Blank
Right bargraph Same as above (Out 1 or
Out 2)
- - L2 On - - L2 On
Left bargraph Blank
Center bargraph Indicates Loop 2 PV as a
column of Bars -- SP is a
single blinking Bar
Right bargraph Same as above (Out 1 or
Out 2)
ID TAG ENABLE PROCESS IDENTIFICATION TAG - A nine
DISABLE character alphanumeric tag. This tag can be
configured to display almost any message. It is
displayed in the lower digital display and accessed
by the
LOWR DISP key.
Entry selections listed in prompt “TAG”.
PVTAG ENABLE PROCESS VARIABLE TAG - A three character
DISABLE alphanumeric tag in the upper display. This tag can
be configured to display messages such as : GPH,
CFM, PSI, DEG, or others.
Entry selections listed in prompt "TAG".
PVTAG2 ENABLE PROCESS VARIABLE TAG 2 - A three character
DISABLE alphanumeric tag in the upper display if "2 LOOPS"
is selected at Algorithm prompt "PID LOOPS".
Entry selections listed in prompt "TAG".

4.16 Display Parameters Set Up Group, Continued
Table 4-16 Display Group Definitions, continued

or Selection
TAG Letters: A to Z TAG - Use the or key to select entries.
ID or PV tag Numbers: 0 to 9
ConfigurationTag Others: <, >, #, /, \, ,
(blank), –, ., °, =,
?, _, ^,V, +, *PV
RATIO 4SET INPUT 4 RATIO - this enables the Ratio for Input 4
to be set from the front panel.
DISABLE DISABLE - Disables Ratio 4 set.
LOWR DISP LOWR DISP - allows the Ratio for Input 4 to be set
using the Lower Display key on the front of the
operator interface.
Input 4 must be enabled for this to operate.
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE- this selection designates the prompt
language.
ENGLISH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN

4.17 Calibration Data
Introduction The prompts used here are for field calibration purposes. Refer to Section
6 – Input Calibration in this manual for complete information.
4.18 Status Test Data
Introduction The prompts used here are for determining the reason for a controller
failure. Refer to the Section 8 – Troubleshooting in this manual for
complete information.

Section 5 – Operation
5.1 Overview
Introduction This section gives you all the information necessary to monitor and
operate your controller. Review the Operator Interface shown in
subsection 5.4 “Monitoring” to make sure you are familiar with the
indicator definitions. The key functions are listed in Section 1 - Overview.
What’s in this This section contains the following topics:

section?
Topic See Page
5.1 Overview 143
5.2 How to Power Up the Controller 144
5.3 How to Enter a Security Code 146
5.4 Monitoring Your Controller 147
5.5 Start-Up Procedure 153
5.6 Operating Modes 154
5.7 Setpoints 158
5.8 Setpoint Ramp Rate 165
5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp 166
5.10 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants 169
5.11 2 Loops of Control Overview 172
5.12 Configure 2 loops of Control 177
5.13 Monitor 2 Loops of Control 180
5.14 Operate 2 Loops of Control 183
5.15 Input Math Algorithms 184
5.16 Logic Gate Operation 187
5.17 Digital Outputs/Alarms 189
5.18 Digital Input Option (Remote Switching) 192
5.19 Fuzzy overshoot Suppression 198
5.20 Accutune 199
5.21 Input 5 - Pulse Input 208
5.22 Three Position Step Control 210
5.23 Auto/Manual Station 212

5.2 How to Power Up The Controller
Apply power When power is applied, the controller will run three diagnostic tests. All
the displays will light and then the controller will go into automatic mode.
Diagnostic tests Table 5-1 lists the three diagnostic tests.
Table 5-1 Power Up Diagnostic Tests

Prompt on Lower Display Condition
RAM TEST Checks RAM memory
CONFTEST Checks the controller's software
configuration for inconsistencies.
CAL TEST Checks calibration of the controller's
configured analog inputs and outputs.
Test failures All the displays and indicators will light and then display "TEST DONE".
If all these tests pass, the controller will function in a normal manner
without any diagnostic messages.
If one or more of these tests fail while checking memory, the controller
will go to the Fail-safe Manual Mode, and “FAILSAFE” will flash in the
lower display.
Troubleshooting Refer to “STATUS TESTS” in Section 8- Troubleshooting to identify and

correct the problem.

5.2 How to Power Up The Controller, Continued
Check the displays Use the procedure in Table 5-2 to run the display and key test.
and keys
Table 5-2 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys
Press Result
The controller will run a display test. All the displays
SET will light for 8 seconds, then the displays will look like
UP this:
and hold in, Upper Display
then KEYS
Lower Display
FUNC
L1/L2 TRY ALL
at the same time

You will have 60 seconds to test the keys.
Press each key to see When the key is pressed, the lower display will
if it works indicate the name of the key pressed.
Key Pressed Lower Display
FUNC - L1/L2 FUNCTION
LOWR DISP LOWR_DISP
MAN/AUTO AUTO_MAN
SET UP _SETUP
INCREMENT
DECREMENT
ALM ACK ALARM_ACK
RSP/CAS RSP_CASC
SP1/SP2 SP1_SP2
+ INCR_DECR
FUNC+SETUP FUNC SU
FUNC + FUNC_INCR
If no key is pressed for 20 seconds, the test will time out and the
controller will go into control mode.
If any test fails, go to “Controller Failure Symptoms” in Section 8 -

Troubleshooting.
Key error When a key is pressed and the prompt “KEY ERROR” appears in the
lower display, it will be for one of the following reasons:
• parameter not available,
• not in Set Up mode, press SET UP key first,
• Key malfunction, do keyboard test.

5.3 Enter a Security Code
Introduction The LOCKOUT feature in the UDC6300 is used to inhibit changes (via
keyboard) of certain functions or parameters by unauthorized personnel.
There are different levels of LOCKOUT depending on the level of
security required. These levels are:
NONE
CALIBRATE
+CONF
+VIEWING
MAXIMUM
See Section 4 - Configuration Definitions for details.
Security code The level of keyboard lockout may be changed in the Set Up mode.
numbers However, knowledge of a security code number (1 to 4095) may be
required to change from one level of lockout to another.
When a controller leaves the factory, it has a security code of 0 which
permits changing from one lockout level to another without entering any
other code number.
Procedure If you require the use of a security code, select a number from 0001 to
4095 and enter it when the lockout level is configured as “NONE”.
Thereafter, that selected number must be used to change the lockout level
from something other than “NONE”.
CAUTION Write the number on the Configuration Record Sheet in the

configuration section so you will have a permanent record.
Use the procedure in Table 5-3 to enter a security code.

Table 5-3 Procedure for Entering a Security Code
Step Press Action
1 Until you see
SET Upper Display
UP SET UP
Lower Display
TUNING
2 Until you see

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 0
Lower Display
SECURITY
3 to enter a four digit number in the upper display

or (0 to 4095)
This will be your security code.

5.4 Monitoring Your Controller
Operator Interface The indicators and displays on the Operator Interface let you see what is
happening to your process and how the controller is responding.
Figure 5-1 is a view of the Operator interface. A description of the

displays and indicators is included.
Figure 5-1 Operator Interface
6300
Lower display – nine characters
Upper display – nine characters
• Normal Operation: displays the PV • Normal Operation: displays
operating parameters and values
process variable (4 digits)
SP 6300
• Configuration Mode: displays or I.D. tag
parameter value or selection • Configuration Mode: displays
function groups and parameters
100
°F °C Annunciators – illuminate as
Three bargraphs,
each appropriate
containing 81 discrete bars plus 80 L12
two arrows, are used to display: °F°C = Temperature units bein
CAS displayed
60 L12 = Loop display indication
Setpoint SP23
CAS = Cascade mode
RSP SP23 = Indicates local setpoint
40 being used
Process variable CSP RSP = Remote setpoint being
used
Output 20 MAN CSP = Computer setpoint
AUTO MAN = Manual control mode
AUTO= Automatic control mod
Bargraphs and alarm 0 1234 1234 = Indicates digital output
annunciators flash on alarm SP PV O alarm conditions
condition until acknowledged
FUNC LOWR MAN RSP SP1

L1/L2 DISP AUTO CAS SP2
SET ALM
UP ACK
21742
Decimal point In each display, when no decimal place is configured, the right-most
position character is blank.
When a single decimal position has been configured and values greater
than 1000 are displayed, the right-most character is blank but the decimal
point will be lit.

5.4 Monitoring Your Controller, Continued
Annunciators The following annunciator functions have been provided:

A visual indication of each Digital Output
1 2 3 4
A visual indication of the mode of the controller
AUTO - Automatic Mode
MAN - manual Mode
Annunciators showing the Control Setpoint
When activated by a Digital Input selection, these annunciators will blink.
SP 1st Setpoint
SP2 2nd Setpoint
SP3 3rdSetpoint
RSP Remote Setpoint
CSP Computer Setpoint
Loop Display
L1 Loop 1 indication
When L1 is lit
the upper display shows the PV for Loop 1
the lower display shows the Loop 1 parameters and
the
PV for Loop 2
The controller setpoint annunciators show which
setpoint is currently being used for Loop 1.
L2 Loop 2 indication
When L2 is lit
the upper display shows the PV for Loop 2
the lower display shows the Loop 2 parameters and
the
PV for Loop 1
The controller setpoint annunciators show which
setpoint is currently being used for Loop 2.
For either Loop display, the “2” will blink when the Loop 1
output is being overridden by the Loop 2 output.
Cascade Control Annunciator
CAS The annunciator lights when the unit is in the Automatic
Cascade Mode.
Annunciators for Temperature Units
°F Degrees Fahrenheit
°C Degrees Celsius

Bargraphs In addition to the displays and indicators described in Figure 5-1, the
Operator Interface contains three bargraphs each containing 81 discrete
bars, plus two arrows (top and bottom), used to display - left to right -
(SP) Setpoint, (PV) Process Variable, and Output.
Each bar represents 1.25% full scale.
If the variable (SP, PV, Output):
• exceeds 100% of scale
- All bars and the top arrow light
• exceeds 102% of scale
- all bars light, top arrow blinks
• is 0% of scale
- only the bottom bar lights
• goes below 0% of scale
- bottom bar and bottom arrow light
• goes below –2% of scale
- bottom bar lights, bottom arrow blinks
ATTENTION A 2 Loop display is also available. See subsection 5.13 for

details.
The bargraph will flash when an alarm condition exists. See "Alarm
Operation" in subsection 5.17.
Setpoint Bargraph The Setpoint bargraph can be configured so that all the bars are lighted up
to the setpoint value or just one bar is lighted at the setpoint value.
See Section 3 - Configuration under Setup prompt "DISPLAY".

Viewing the operating

parameters
Press the LOWR DISP key to scroll through the operating parameters
listed in Table 5-4. The lower display will show only those parameters
and their value that apply to your specific model and the way in which it
was configured.
There is a 60 second time-out if the LOWR DISP key is not pressed.
The LOWR DISP key is also used to return to normal control mode
from the Setup mode.
Table 5-4 Lower Display Key Parameter Prompts
LOWER DEFINITION REMARKS
DISPLAY
INDICATION
(XXXX = Value)
OUTXXXX OUTPUT (Note 1) also estimated motor time for 3 Position Step
control
OT2XXXX OUTPUT #2 (note 1) appears only if 2 loop or Cascade is configured
SPXXXX LOCAL SETPOINT #1 (note 2) also current setpoint when using SP Ramp
2SPXXXX LOCAL SETPOINT #2 (note 2) where RSP does not apply or for 2 loop applications
3SPXXXX LOCAL SETPOINT #3 not available if RSP is configured
RSPXXXX REMOTE SETPOINT (note 3) not available if 3SP is configured
1INXXXX INPUT 1 for more than one input enabled
RA4XXXX INPUT 4 RATIO VALUE value can be selected using or keys
5INXXXX INPUT 5 for multi-input activated
CSPXXXX COMPUTER SETPOINT when SP is in override
DEVXXXX DEVIATION maximum negative display is –999.9
PID SET X TUNING PARAMETER SET 1 selected set for single or primary loop configuration
(note 4) where X = 1 or 2
2PID SET X TUNING PARAMETER SET 2 selected set for single or secondary loop
configuration where X = 3 or 4
RAMPXXXM SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP TIME time remaining in single setpoint ramp in minutes
1 PVXXXX PROCESS VARIABLE 1 process variable 1 for 2 loop or cascade
applications
2 PVXXXX PROCESS VARIABLE 2 process variable 2 for 2 loop or cascade
applications
NINEDIGIT PROCESS ID TAG a nine character, customer entered process ID tag
SPn SP RATE SETPOINT setpoint being used during setpoint rate
AUX AUXILIARY OUTPUT Displayed whenever Loop 1 is not Current Duplex
(note 5) and Loop 2 is not configured or configured for TIME

Viewing the operating

parameters,
continued
Table 5-4 Lower Display Key Parameter Prompts, continued
LOWER DEFINITION REMARKS
DISPLAY
INDICATION
(XXXX = Value)
OC1 LOOP1 OUTPUT Displayed if Loop 1 output is characterized.

CHARACTERIZED
OC2 LOOP 2 OUTPUT Displayed if Loop 2 output is characterized.
CHARACTERIZED
Σ (Sigma) CURRENT TOTALIZER VALUE Displays the total flow volume being measured
BIAXXXX MANUAL RESET VALUE Displays the manual reset value for algorithm
PD+MR.
TUNE OFF ACCUTUNE INDICATION(Note Appears when Accutune is enabled
1)
TUNE RUN Press to initiate Accutune
Display will read TUNE RUN
OT1 OUTPUT 1 Appears if using Output Override (2 PID loops
only). This value is the calculated Loop 1 internal
value before any override.
Note 1 The value can be changed only in Manual Mode.

Note 2 While viewing Setpoint 1 or Setpoint 2, the value can be changed by using the or
keys. To switch between Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2, press the SP1/SP2 key
Note 3 To switch between local and remote setpoint, press the RSP/CAS key
Note 4 When viewing the tuning parameters (PID SET1 or PID SET2), the selected set may be
changed using the or keys.
Note 5 Auxiliary Output is not displayed, but the parameter that it represents is always available
for display.

Diagnostic error The UDC6300 performs background tests to verify data and memory
messages integrity. If there is a malfunction, an error message will be displayed.
In the case of more than one simultaneous malfunctions, only the one with
the highest priority will appear on the lower display.
A list of error messages is contained in Table 5-5.
If any of these error messages occur, refer to Section 8 - Troubleshooting
for information to correct the failure.
Table 5-5 Error Messages

Prompt Description
EE FAIL Unable to write to non-volatile memory
IN1 FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 1 integration
FAILSAFE Input failure or internal diagnostics error
CONF ERR • Low limit greater than high limit for PV, SP, Reset, or
Output
• Conflict between the remote mode switches and the
input algorithm selection
• Too many high level inputs are configured for the
conversion rate being used
IN1 RANGE Input 1 out-of-range
Pulse input less than zero value or greater than span
value
PV RANGE PV ±10% out-of-range
PV = INPX x INPX Ratio + INPX Bias
If a Loop algorithm has been selected, this error
message will appear when the result of the algorithm
exceeds the PV limits.
RV RANGE Remote Variable out-of-range
Note: RV = InputX x RatioX x BiasX
DO FAILED The read value of Digital Output 1 to 4 does not compare
with the correct value.

5.5 Start Up Procedure
Procedure The Start-up procedure is given in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6 Procedure for Starting Up the Controller
Step Operation Press Action
1 Select manual until “MAN” indicator is ON.
mode MAN The controller is in manual mode.
AUTO
2 Adjust the to adjust the output value and ensure

output that the final control element is
or
functioning correctly.
Upper Display
shows the PV value

Lower Display
shows OUT and the

output value in %.
3 Tune the Make sure the controller has been
controller SET configured properly and all the values
UP and selections have been recorded on
the Configuration Record Sheet.
To tune your controller manually, see
Appendix A .
Refer to Set Up group ‘TUNING” to
ensure that the proper selections for
PROP BD or GAIN, RATE MIN, and
RSET MIN or RSET RPM have been
entered.
For 2 Loop or Cascade control, refer to
"TUNING L2" for tuning parameters.
For controllers with ACCUTUNE, see
the procedure in this section.
4 Enter the local Upper Display
setpoint LOWR
DISP shows the PV Value
Lower Display
SP and the local

setpoint value
To adjust the local setpoint to the value
at which you want the process variable
or
maintained.
The local setpoint cannot be changed if
the Setpoint Ramp function is enabled.
“H” or “R” appears in the upper display.
5 Select until “A” indicator is ON.
Automatic MAN The controller is in Automatic mode.
Mode AUTO
The controller will automatically adjust
the output to maintain the process
variable at setpoint, if the controller is
properly tuned.

5.6 Operating Modes
Available modes The controller can operate in any of five basic modes:
• Manual (One or Two Loops)
• Automatic with Local Setpoint (One or Two Loops)
• Automatic with Remote Setpoint (One or Two Loops)
• Manual (Cascade)
• Automatic (Cascade)
Manual and Automatic with Local set point are standard features and
Automatic with Remote Setpoint is optional.
Mode definitions Table 5-7 lists the five modes and their definitions.
Table 5-7 Operating Mode Definitions
Operating Mode Definition
MANUAL In Manual mode the operator directly controls the
controller output level.
When switched to manual mode, the controller holds
its output at the last value used during automatic
operation and stops adjusting the output for changes
in setpoint or process variable.
Instead, the configured High and Low Output Limits
are disregarded and you adjust the output to the limits
allowed by the output type by changing the value
shown in the lower display. See "Selecting Manual or
Automatic” in this subsection.
AUTOMATIC with In automatic local mode, the controller will operate
LOCAL SETPOINT from the local setpoint and automatically adjust the
output to maintain the setpoint at the desired value.
In this mode you can adjust the setpoint. See
Subsection 5.7 - “Setpoints”.
AUTOMATIC with In automatic remote mode, the controller will operate
REMOTE SETPOINT from the setpoint measured at input 2, 3, 4, or 5.
Adjustments are available to ratio this input and add a
constant bias before it is applied to the control
equation. See Section 3 - Configuration, Set up group
“Control”.
Not available in CASCADE.
MANUAL (CASCADE) In the manual cascade mode, both control loops are
in manual although there is only one output active.
This mode is used to bring both loops into a
reasonable operation area, at which point the unit is
placed into the Automatic Cascade Mode.
If Loop 1 is placed in Manual control mode, then
Loop 2, if in Auto, is then placed in a Pseudo-manual
mode thereby eliminating output bumps when Loop 1
is returned to Automatic Control Mode.
AUTOMATIC In Automatic Cascade mode, there are two control
(CASCADE) loops, with one loop's output acting as the setpoint for
the second control loop. There is only one physical
output in this mode.

5.6 Operating Modes, Continued
What happens when Table 5-8 explains what happens to the controller when you switch from
you change modes one mode to another.
Table 5-8 Changing Operating Modes
Mode Change Description
Manual to Automatic The local setpoint is usually the value previously
Local Setpoint stored as the local setpoint.
PV Tracking is a configurable feature which modifies
this. When it is selected, the local setpoint value
tracks the process variable value continuously while
in manual. LSP=PV at the moment you switch from
manual to automatic. LSP holds at this one value.
Manual or Auto Local The Remote setpoint value with Ratio and Bias
to Automatic Remote applied is used to calculate the control setpoint.
SP
Auto Bias is a configurable feature which modifies
this. When it is selected, the transfer from automatic
local to automatic remote or from manual remote to
auto remote adjusts the Bias based on the local
setpoint such that Bias = LSP - [RSP Input x R].
Automatic Remote SP If configured for Local Setpoint Tracking, when the
to Manual or Auto UDC transfers out of remote setpoint, the last value of
Local Setpoint the control setpoint is inserted into the local setpoint.
If LSP tracking is not configured, the local setpoint will
not be altered when the transfer is made.

Selecting Manual or An alternate action switch places the controller in Automatic or Manual
Automatic mode mode of operation.
Switching between manual and automatic will be bumpless, except when
PD+MR algorithm is selected.
Table 5-9 includes procedures for selecting automatic or manual mode
and changing the output while in manual.
Table 5-9 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode
1 Selecting until “AUTO” indicator is ON.
Automatic MAN The controller regulates its output to
Mode AUTO maintain the PV at the desired setpoint.
Upper Display
shows the PV value

Lower Display
shows SP and the

setpoint value
The deviation bargraph indicates the PV
deviation from the setpoint.
The annunciators will indicate whichever
setpoint is in use:
SP Local Setpoint
SP2 Second Local Setpoint
SP3 Third Local Setpoint
RSP Remote Setpoint
CSP Computer Setpoint
2 Selecting until “MAN” indicator is ON.
Manual Mode MAN The controller holds its output at the last
AUTO value used during automatic operation
and stops adjusting the output for
changes in setpoint or process variable.
Upper Display
shows the PV value

Lower Display
shows OUT and the

output value in (%).
The deviation bargraph indicates the PV
deviation from the setpoint.

Selecting Manual or
Automatic mode,
continued
Table 5-9 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode,
continued
3 Adjust the to adjust the output value while in
Output in manual mode.
or
Manual Mode Upper Display
shows the PV value

Lower Display
shows OUT and the

output value in %.
4 Return to The “A” indicator will appear indicating
Automatic MAN Automatic mode.
Mode AUTO

5.7 Setpoints
Introduction You can configure the following setpoints for the UDC6300 controller.
• A single local setpoint
• 2 local setpoints toggled by the SP1/SP2 key.
• A third local setpoint toggled by the RSP/CAS key.
Selecting the local Use the procedure in table 5-10 to select a local setpoint source.
setpoint source
Table 5-10 Procedure for Selecting the Local Setpoint Source
1 Enter Set Up until the displays read:
mode SET Upper Display
UP SET UP
Lower Display
CONTROL
or
Upper Display
SET UP
Lower Display
CONTROL2
for Loop 2
2 Display Local until the displays read:
Setpoint FUNC Upper Display
Source L1/L2 Setpoint source selections
selections 1 ONLY
Lower Display
TWO
LSP's
THREE
3 Select the to select the desired setpoint source in

desired source or the upper display.
4 Return to The controller will assume normal

control LOWR control.
DISP

5.7 Setpoints, Continued
Changing local Use the procedure in Table 5-11 to change any of the local setpoint
setpoint 1 or 2 or 3 values.
After changing a Local Setpoint value, if no other key is pressed, it takes a
minimum of 30 seconds elapsed time before the new value is stored in
non-volatile memory.
If power is removed before this time, the new setpoint value is lost and the
previous setpoint value is used at power up.
If after changing the LSP value, another key is pressed, then the value is
stored immediately.
Table 5-11 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoints
1 Select the until you see
setpoint LOWR
DISP Upper Display
The PV value
Lower Display
SP, SP2, or SP3 and
the local setpoint value
2 Change the to change the local setpoint to the value

value or at which you want the process
maintained.
SP, SP2, or SP3 indicator will light to
match the lower display.

Switching between Use the procedure in Table 5-12 to switch between Local Setpoint 1 and
local setpoint 1 2.
and 2
Table 5-12 Procedure for Switching Between Local Setpoint 1 and 2
1 Select the to alternately switch between local
setpoint SP1 setpoint 1 and local setpoint 2 (when
SP2 configured).
You will see:
Upper Display
The PV value
Lower Display
SP and the local
setpoint #1 value, or
2 SP and the local
setpoint #2 value

maintained. The display "blinks" if you
attempt to enter setpoint values beyond
the high and low setpoint limits.
ATTENTION "KEY ERROR" will

appear in the lower display if the 2nd
local setpoint is not configured as a
setpoint source or if you attempt to
change the setpoint while a setpoint
ramp is enabled. Setpoint ramp rate will
apply to changes between local SP and
local SP2, if enabled.

Switching between Use the procedure in Table 5-13 to switch between Local Setpoint 3 and
local setpoint 3 and Local Setpoint 1 or 2.
local setpoints 1
or 2.
Table 5-13 Procedure for Switching Between Local Setpoint 3 and
Local Setpoint 1 or 2
1 Select the to alternately switch between local
setpoint RSP setpoint 3 and local setpoint 1 or local
CAS setpoint 2 (when configured).

maintained. The display "blinks" if you
attempt to enter setpoint values beyond
the high and low setpoint limits.
ATTENTION "KEY ERROR" will

appear in the lower display if 3 local
setpoints are not configured or remote
setpoint is not configured.
Setpoint Ramp Rate will apply, if
enabled.

Selecting the remote You can select what you want your remote setpoint to be for each loop:
setpoint source • None
• Remote setpoint using input 2 toggled by the RSP/CAS key
• Remote setpoint using Loop 1 Input Algorithm
• Remote setpoint using Loop 2 Input Algorithm
Use the procedure in Table 5-14 to select the remote setpoint source.
Table 5-14 Procedure for Selecting the Remote Setpoint Source
1 Select Set Up Until you see:
Group SET Upper Display
UP SET UP
Lower Display
CONTROL
or
Upper Display
SET UP
Lower Display
CONTROL2
for Loop 2
2 Select the Until you see:
Remote FUNC Upper Display
Setpoint L1/L2 The Remote Setpoint
Source Prompt Lower Display source selection
RSP SRC
NONE - not used
Input 2 - Input 2 as RSP
IN ALG1- Input algorithm 1
IN ALG2 - Input algorithm 2
3 Change to change the remote setpoint source.

or
selection
ATTENTION You cannot change the
Remote Setpoint Value using these
keys.
4 Return to This will return the controller to normal
normal LOWR operation.
operation DISP

Switching between You can switch between Local and Remote setpoints. Use the procedure
local and remote in Table 5-15 to switch between setpoints.
setpoints
Table 5-15 Procedure for Switching Between Local and Remote
Setpoints
1 Select Local Until you see:
setpoint RSP
CAS Upper Display
The PV value
Lower Display
SP, SP2, or SP3 and
the local setpoint value
2 Change the The REMOTE setpoint cannot be

or
Local setpoint changed at the keyboard.
value
3 Select Remote You will see:
setpoint RSP
CAS Upper Display
The PV value
again Lower Display
RSP and the remote
setpoint value

Setpoint selection Table 5-16 shows how the indicators react and what the displays show for
indication each type of setpoint.
Table 5-16 Setpoint Selection Indication

Using Local Using Remote Using 2nd Using 3rd
Setpoint Setpoint Local Local
Setpoint Setpoint
Annunciat SP RSP SP2 SP3
or
Upper PV and the PV and the PV PV and the PV and the
Display PV value value PV value PV value
Lower SP and the RSP and SP2 and the SP3 and the
Display Local Setpoint Remote 2nd Local 3rd Local
Source Setpoint Value Setpoint Setpoint
Value Value

5.8 Setpoint Rate
Configuration You can configure a Setpoint Ramp Rate that will apply to any Local
setpoint change immediately.
Refer to the Configuration Section to enable the ramp for either loop and
set an upscale or downscale rate value.
Make sure SP RAMP is disabled.
Operation When a Local setpoint change is made, the controller will ramp from the
original setpoint to the new one at the rate specified. This changing
(current) setpoint can be viewed as SPn on the lower display.
Press the LOWR DISP key until you see SPn and the setpoint value in
the lower display.

5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp
Configuring the You can configure a single setpoint ramp to occur between the current
setpoint ramp local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to
255 minutes. You can RUN or HOLD the ramp at any time.
Power Ouage If power is lost during a SP Ramp, on power-up the controller ‘s PV will
equal the setpoint and the ramp time will be recalculated. The mode and
setpoint will be as configured in Set-up group ‘CONTROL”. Function
prompt “PWR MODE”.
Procedure
Table 5-17 lists the procedure for configuring the SP Ramp parameters.
Table 5-17 Procedure for Configuring a Setpoint Ramp
1 Select Until you see:
SP RAMP SET Upper Display
Set Up Group UP SET UP
Lower Display
SP RAMP
2 Select the Until you see:

Setpoint Ramp FUNC Upper Display
function L1/L2 Enable –SP Ramp for Loop 1
Lower Display Enable 2 –SP Ramp for Loop 2

SP RAMP Enable 12 –SP Ramp for
Loops 1 and 2
3 Enable Setpoint to enable the setpoint ramp function. Choose

Ramp the Loop(s) on which you want the ramp to
operate.
NOTE: You cannot change the current local
setpoint if the setpoint ramp function is
enabled. Make sure SP RATE is disabled.
4 Set the Ramp Until you see:
Time FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 The ramp time
in minutes
Lower Display
TIME MIN
to change the upper display value to the

or number of minutes in which you want the
final setpoint to be reached.
Setting Range = 1 to 255 minutes
NOTE: Entering “0” will imply an immediate
step change to the final SP.
5 Set the Final Upper Display
Setpoint value FUNC The Final
L1/L2 Setpoint value
Lower Display
FINAL SP
6 to change the upper display value to the

or desired final setpoint value.
Setting Range = within the setpoint limits

5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp, Continued
Running the setpoint Running a Setpoint Ramp includes starting, holding, viewing the ramp
ramp time, ending the ramp and disabling it.
Procedure Table 5-18 lists the procedure for running the Setpoint Ramp.
Table 5-18 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp
1 Put the until “AUTO” indicator is ON and you will
controller into MAN see:
Automatic AUTO Upper Display
mode H and the PV value
Lower Display
SP and the present

setpoint value
2 Set Start SP until the start setpoint value you desire is

or indicated in the lower display:
Upper Display
H and the PV value
Lower Display
SP and the start

setpoint value
3 Start the Ramp simultaneously, you will see:

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2
R and the PV value
Lower Display
and
SP and a changing
setpoint value
NOTE: The value in the lower display

will be increasing or decreasing toward
the final setpoint value.
The PV value in the upper display will
also change.
4 Hold/Run the simultaneously to hold the ramp at the
Ramp FUNC current setpoint value.
L1/L2
Press again to continue run.
and A “KEY ERROR” prompt will appear if
FUNC and key is pressed while
“SP RAMP” is disabled.
5 View the Until you see:
remaining LOWR Upper Display
ramp time DISP
R or H and
Lower Display
the PV value
RAMP XXXM
(Time remaining)

5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 5-18 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp, continued
6 Change to change the "HELD" setpoint if the
setpoint during or ramp is on "HOLD".
HOLD mode
However, the ramp time remaining is not
changed. Therefore, when returning to
RUN mode, the setpoint will ramp at the
same rate as previous to Local setpoint
changes and will stop if the Final
setpoint is reached before time expires.
If the time expires before the final
setpoint is reached, it will jump to the
final setpoint.
6 End the Ramp When the final setpoint is reached, the
“R” changes to “H” in the upper display
and the controller operates at the new
setpoint.
ATTENTION Anytime the local

setpoint is different from the final
setpoint value and the FUNC and
key is pressed - the ramp will start
again.
7 Disable the Until you see:
setpoint ramp SET Upper Display
function UP SET UP
Lower Display
SP RAMP
You will see:

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 Enable –SP Ramp for Loop 1
Lower Display Enable 2 –SP Ramp for Loop 2

SP RAMP Enable 12 –SP Ramp for
Loops 1 and 2
Until you see:

Upper Display
DISABL
Lower Display
SP RAMP
8 Return to
normal LOWR
operating DISP
mode

5.10 Using Two Set of Tuning Constants
Introduction You can use two set of tuning constants for single output types and 2
Loop or Cascade control and choose the way they are to be switched.
(Does not apply for Duplex Control).
The sets can be:
• Keyboard selected
• Automatically switched when a predetermined Process Variable
value is reached.
• Automatically switched when a predetermined Setpoint value is
reached.
The following procedures show you how to:
• Select two sets or Gain Scheduling
• Set the switch-over value
• Set tuning constant value for each set
• Switch between two sets via the keyboard (without automatic
switch-over)
Select two sets or The procedure in Table 5-19 tells you how to select two sets or gain
gain scheduling scheduling.
Table 5-19 Procedure for Selecting Two Set of Tuning Constants
1 Select Control Until you see: For Loop 2
Set Up group SET Upper Display Upper Display
UP SET UP SET UP
Lower Display Lower Display

CONTROL CONTROL2
or
PID SETS FUNC Upper Display
function L1/L2 Available selections
are listed below
Lower Display
PIDSETS
1 ONLY - 1 set of constants

2 KEYBD - 2 sets, keyboard selectable
2 PVSW - 2 sets, auto switch at PV value
2 SPSW - 2 sets, auto switch at SP value
GAIN SCDL - Gain used in control
algorithm calculations can be pre-entered
into eight user-defined segments, with
each segment applied over a user-
defined PV range. Refer to Section 3 -
Configuration under Set UP prompt
“TUNING” to set Gain segment values
and PV range values.
to select the type of PID SET.
or

5.10 Using Two Set of Tuning Constants, Continued
Set switchover value If you select 2 PVSW or 2 SPSW, you must set a value at which the sets
will switch over.
The procedure in Table 5-20 shows you how to set this value.
Table 5-20 Procedure for Setting Switchover Values
Switchover FUNC Upper Display
value function L1/L2 The switchover
value
assuming you Lower Display
are still in Set SW VALUE
Up group
”CONTROL”
to select the switch-over value in the

or upper display.
Set Tuning constant There are specific tuning constants that must be set for each set. The
values for each set procedure in Table 5-21 shows you how to access these constants and
change their values.
Table 5-21 Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant Values
1 Select Tuning Until you see:
Set Up Group SET Upper Display
UP SET UP
Lower Display
TUNING
2 Select the to successively display the following

tuning FUNC constants:
constants L1/L2 Upper Display
The tuning constant
value
Lower Display
PROP BD or GAIN*
RATE*
RSET*
CYCLE
PROP BD2 or GAIN2**
RATE 2**
RSET2**
CYCLE2
To change the value of any of the above

or listed prompts in the lower display.
*PIDSET1 – will be used when PV or SP, whichever is selected, is greater than the
switchover value.
**PIDSET2 – will be used when PV or SP, whichever is selected, is less than the
switchover value.

5.10 Using Two Set of Tuning Constants, Continued
Switch between two This procedure is operational only if 2 PID SETS was configured at
sets via the keyboard “CONTROL” set up group.
(without automatic
switch-over) The procedure in Table 5-22 shows you how to switch from one set to
another.
Table 5-22 Procedure for switching PID SETS from the Keyboard
1 Access the PID Until you see:
set display LOWR Upper Display
DISP The PV value
Lower Display
PIDSETX X= 1 or 2
to change PID SET 1 to PID SET 2 or

or vice versa.
You can use Adaptive Tune on each set.

5.11 2 Loops of Control Overview
Introduction
The UDC6300 can operate using Two Independent Loops of control or
Internal Cascade control.
TWO INDEPENDENT LOOPS - See Functional Overview Block
Diagrams for Loop 1(Figure 5-1) and Loop 2 (Figure 5-2) and Table 5-23
for selections based on these diagrams.
The following rules apply for Two independent loops:
• Current Output on Loop 2 requires 2nd Current output
• Loop 2 Current Duplex output is limited to 2nd Current output signal
only
• Loop 2 Digital output is always dedicated to Digital Output 4
• No Time Duplex Outputs on Loop 2
• No ON/OFF or 3 Position Step algorithms in Loop 2
INTERNAL CASCADE CONTROL - uses Loop 2 as the primary loop
with the output of loop 2 being the remote setpoint of Loop 1.
See Functional Overview Block Diagrams (Figure 5-3) and Table 5-23 for
selections based on these diagrams.
The following rules apply for Internal Cascade control:
• Loop 2 must be the primary loop
• Loop 1 must be the secondary (internal or slave) loop because all output
forms exist on Loop 1
• Loop 1 remote setpoint is fixed as Loop 2 output.
Selections Refer to Figures 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3 Block Diagrams and Table 5-23 for
selections based on these diagrams.
Table 5-23 Control Loop Selections
LOOP INPUT 1 INPUT 2, 3, 4, Low INPUT INPUT
Level 5, ALG1 ALG2
Pulse 5
LOOP 1 Process Variable Via configuration or Via Configuration or Yes Yes
Digital Input Digital Input
3, 4, 5, or 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6
Remote Setpoint Via configuration or Via configuration or Yes Yes
3, 4, 5, or 6 3, 4, 5, or 6
Feedforward Yes Yes Yes Yes
LOOP 2 Process Variable Via configuration or Via Configuration or Yes Yes
4, 5, or 6 2, 4, 5, or 6
Remote Setpoint Via configuration or Via Configuration or Yes Yes
4, 5, or 6 2, 4, 5, or 6
Feedforward Yes Yes Yes Yes

5.11 2 Loops of Control Overview, Continued
Single Loop Figure 5-2 is a Block Diagram of a Single Loop Controller - Loop #1.
Controller
Figure 5-2 Functional Overview Block Diagram of a Single Loop Controller - Loop #1
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5
Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio

Bias Bias Bias Bias Bias
• • • • •
To RSP • • 1 • • 2 • • 3 • • 4 • • 5
• • • •
IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 In Alg1 In Alg 2
To RSP To RSP To RSP To RSP
PV 1
Source 2
3
INPUT 4
INPUT A 5
RSP OUT 2 ALGORITHM 1/2
Other Alg
Source Output 1
FEEDFORWARD Output 2
To RSP INPUT A ONLY
1
2
3
PV 4
INPUT B 5
Other Alg
Remote SP PID Output 1
SP
SP CONTROL Output 2
Source ALGORITHM
Loop 1 1
Local SP 2
INPUT C 3
4
5
Other
SP 1 SP 3 Alg
SP 2 None
FEEDFORWARD
SUMMER OR
MULTIPLIER
Output
without
Feedforward
or Manual
Mode
To Final
OUTPUT Control 23035
Element

Loop 2 Figure 5-3 is a Block Diagram of a Loop 2 of a 2 Loop controller.

Figure 5-3 Functional Overview Block Diagram of Loop 2 of a 2 Loop Controller
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5
Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio

Bias Bias Bias Bias Bias
• • • • •
To RSP • • 1 • • 2 • • 3 • • 4 • • 5
• • • •
IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 In Alg1 In Alg 2
To RSP To RSP To RSP To RSP
PV 1
Source 2
3
4
INPUT INPUT A 5
RSP OUT 2 ALGORITHM 1/2 Other
Alg
Source
FEEDFORWARD Output 1
INPUT A ONLY Output 2
To RSP
1
2
3
PV
4
INPUT B 5
Remote SP Other
SP PID Alg
SP CONTROL Output 1
Source ALGORITHM Output 2
Loop 2 1
Local SP
2
INPUT C 3
4
5
SP 1 SP 3 Other
Alg
SP 2 None
FEEDFORWARD
SUMMER OR
MULTIPLIER
Output
without
Feedforward or
Manual Mode
To Final
OUTPUT
Control 21741
Element

Internal Cascade Figure 5-4 is a Block Diagram of Internal Cascade for a 2 Loop controller.
Figure 5-4 Functional Overview Block Diagram of Internal Cascade of a 2 Loop Controller
PRIMARY LOOP SECONDARY LOOP
PV SOURCE PV SOURCE
See Loop 2 See Loop 1
Block Diagram Block Diagram
SETPOINT PID PID

SETPOINT
SOURCE CONTROL CONTROL
SOURCE
See Loop #2 ALGORITHM ALGORITHM
Block Diagram Loop #1
Loop 2 Loop 1
INTERNAL
SP 1
OUTPUT
SIGNAL Local Setpoint SP 2
SP 3
Remote Setpoint
OUTPUT
To Final
Control
Element
INTERNAL CASCADE RULES 21746
• Loop #2 must be the primary loop.

• Loop #1 must be the secondary (internal or slave) loop because all output forms exist on Loop 1.
• Loop #1 Remote Setpoint is fixed as loop #2 output.

Override rules The UDC 6300 allows you to select high or low output override. Refer to
Section 3 - Configuration to select High or Low.
The following rules apply for high/low override:
• Only one physical output is required when override is enabled. It is the
output from Loop 1 because Loop 2’s internal output is routed through the
selector.
• Loop 2 output can also be available at all times if desired.
• In Manual mode, the Output may be overridden.
Figure 5-5 is a block diagram of the HI/LO Override Selector.
Figure 5-5 Hi/Lo Override Selector
OUTPUT 1
OT1 Value viewed
PV 1 OUTPUT 1 TERMINALS
PID on front display HI/LO
LOOP 1 OVERRIDE
SELECTOR
PV 2 OUTPUT 2 TERMINALS
PID
OUTPUT 2 IF DESIRED
LOOP 2 OT2 Value viewed
on front display

5.12 Configure 2 Loop of Control
Select 2 loop The procedure in Table 5-24 shows you how select the 2 loop algorithm.
algorithm
Table 5-24 Procedure for Selecting 2 Loop Algorithm
Algorithm Set SET Upper Display
Up Group UP SET UP
Lower Display
ALGORTHM
2 Select the PID to successively display the following

Loops FUNC constants:
L1/L2 Upper Display
1 LOOP
2LOOPS
Lower Display CASCADE
ALGORTHM
To select 2 Loops or Cascade.

or
Select the output See Subsection 5.11 for rules and regulations then follow the procedure in
algorithm for each Table 5-25.
loop
Table 5-25 Procedure for Selecting Output Algorithm
1 Select Output Until you see:
Algorithm Set SET Upper Display
Up Group UP SET UP
Lower Display
OUT ALG
2 Select Loop 1 to successively display the following

Algorithms FUNC constants:
L1/L2 Upper Display
TIME
CURRENT
Lower Display TIME DPLX
CUR DPLX
OUT ALG CUR TIME
TIME CUR
To select Loop 1 algorithm.

or

5.12 Configure 2 Loop of Control, Continued
Select the output

algorithm for each
loop, continued
Table 5-25 Procedure for Selecting Output Algorithm, continued
3 Select Loop 2 Until you see:
algorithms FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 NONE
TIME
Lower Display CURRENT
CUR DPLX
OUT 2 ALG CUR TIME
TIME CUR
To select Loop 2 algorithm.

or
Select control The procedure in Table 5-26 shows you how select the 2 loop algorithm.
parameters for each
loop
Table 5-26 Procedure for Selecting Control Parameters
1 Select Control Until you see:
Set Up Group SET Upper Display Upper Display
UP SET UP SET UP

CONTROL CONTROL2
or For
Loop 2
2 Refer to Subsection 5.11 for rules and
restrictions
and to
Section 3 - Configuration to select the
individual parameters.

5.12 Configure 2 Loop of Control, Continued
Select tuning The procedure in Table 5-27 shows you how select the Tuning
parameters for each Parameters.
group
Table 5-27 Procedure for Selecting Tuning Parameters
1 Select Tuning Until you see:
Set Up Group SET Upper Display Upper Display
UP SET UP SET UP

TUNING TUNING 2
or For
Loop 2
PID set 1 and 2 (TUNING) are for Loop
1 and single loop applications.
PID set 3 and 4 (TUNING2) are for
Loop 2 in two loop and cascade control
applications.
2 Select Tuning to successively display the following
constants FUNC constants:
L1/L2 Upper Display
The Tuning Constant Value
Lower Display
TUNING CONSTANTS for
Primary Loop
PROP BAND or GAIN

RATE (MIN)
RESET (MIN OR RPM)
CYCLE
PROP BAND2 or GAIN2
RATE2 (MIN)
RESET2 (MIN OR RPM)
CYCLE2
OR
TUNING CONSTANTS for
LOOP 2
PROP BAND3 or GAIN3
RATE3 (MIN)
RESET3 (MIN OR RPM)
CYCLE3
PROP BAND4 or GAIN4
RATE4 (MIN)
RESET4 (MIN OR RPM)
CYCLE4
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration for

detailed information.
You can Adaptive Tune both sets on
either loop. Refer to Subsection 5.19.
Use the FUNC key to switch

between loops.
To change the values.
or

5.13 Monitor 2 Loops of Control
Introduction Monitoring two individual loops of control or Internal Cascade is the

same as a single loop except that Indicator L1 and L2 become Loop 1 and
Loop 2 indicators when more than one control loop is enabled.
Digital display Table 5-28 shows you the meaning of the digital displays when
indication monitoring 2 loops of control.
Table 5-28 Digital Display Indication - 2 Loops
Indicator Loop Indication Definition
L1 Loop 1 When L1 is lit:
the upper display shows the Process
Variable (PV) for Loop 1;
the lower display shows the Loop 1
parameters and the PV and Output for
Loop 2.
The controller Setpoint annunciators
show the setpoint currently being used
for Loop 1.
L2 Loop 2 When L2 is lit:
the upper display shows the Process
Variable (PV) for Loop 2;
the lower display shows the Loop 2
parameters and the PV and Output for
Loop 1.
The controller Setpoint annunciators
show the setpoint currently being used
for Loop 2.

5.13 Monitor 2 Loops of Control, Continued
Bargraph indication What the Bargraphs represent depends on what selection you make at Set
for 2 loops Up prompt “DISPLAY”, function prompt “2 LOOP DIS”. Refer to
Section 3 - Configuration for selection information.
Table 5-29 shows you the meaning of the bargraphs when monitoring
2 loops of control.
Table 5-29 Bargraph Indication - 2 Loops
2 LOOP DIS Bargraph Indication
Selection
SPnPVnOn Left Indicates SP of Loop selected.
Center Indicates PV of same Loop.
Right Indicates output of same loop.
(Loop selected is indicated by L1 or L2.)
L1 L2 On Left Indicates Loop 1 PV as a column of bars ––
SP is a single blinking bar.
Center Indicates Loop 2 PV as a column of bars ––
Right Indicates Output of Loop selected as shown
by L1 or L2 digital display.
L1 –– On Left Indicates Loop 1 PV as a column of bars ––
Center Blank
–– L2 On Left Blank
Center Indicates Loop 2 PV as a column of bars ––
Loop display Display of Loop 1 or Loop 2 (if configured) is selected by toggling the
FUNC key.
Viewing each loop’s Regardless of which loop is being displayed “1” or “2”, the process
process variable variable of the non-displayed loop can be shown in the lower display by
repeated presses of the LOWR DISP key until “1PVXXXX” or
“2PVXXXX” is displayed.

5.13 Monitor 2 Loops of Control, Continued
Internal cascade When Internal Cascade has been configured, an “CAS” annunciator lights
indication as long as Loop 1 is operating in the remote setpoint mode (for example:
RSP is displayed).
If Local setpoint 1 and 2 is being used, the “CAS” will disappear until the
remote setpoint RSP CAS key is pushed to switch from local setpoint to
remote setpoint.
Switching between automatic and manual modes on either loop will not
affect the Internal Cascade indication.

5.14 Operate 2 Loops of Control
Loop operation Operation of two individual loops of control is identical to operating a

single loop of control except that TUNING 2 group applies to Loop 2 only
and two PID sets, 3 and 4, are available. TUNING group applies to Loop
1 with PID sets 1 and 2 applicable.
Operating modes and The rules for Auto/Manual modes and changing setpoint sources are the
setpoint source same as single loop operation.
Keyboard operation Note that the loop being displayed is the only loop affected by normal
keyboard operation. However, either loop can be re-configured when in
the Set Up mode regardless of which is being displayed during normal
operation.
Accutune TM - Two independent loops or cascaded loops can be Adaptive tuned at the
Adaptive tune same time, if configured.
Setpoint Ramp Either loop or both loops can be configured for a single setpoint ramp
operation by enabling the desired loop or loops (see Section 3 -
Configuration).
An “H” or “R” will appear when applicable, depending upon which loop
is being displayed.
The RUN/HOLD operation is shown in Table 5-18 “Running a Single
Setpoint Ramp”.
Digital inputs Digital Input 2 is dedicated to Loop 2 and Digital Input 1 and Digital
Input 3 are dedicated to Loop 1 when two loops or Cascade control is
configured.
Digital Inputs 4, 5, and 6 can be assigned to either loop.
Output override Hi/Lo Output Override allows you to select the higher of Output 1 and Output 2
select (Hi Select) or the lower of Output 1 and Output 2 (Lo Select) to appear at
Output 1 terminals to drive the final control element.
Refer to Subsection 5.11 for Override rules and block diagram.
Override prompts appear under Set Up group “ALGORTHM” and
function prompt “OUT OVRD”.

5.15 Input Math Algorithms
Introduction This controller is provided with two input algorithms. Each algorithm can
be configured to provide a derived (calculated) PV or a derived Remote
setpoint. Up to three inputs may be applied to the calculation. In
addition, the 2 algorithms may be “linked” to combine two calculations by
configuring one algorithm to be an input to the other algorithm.
Input algorithm Algorithm selections are made in Section 3 - Configuration; Set Up group
selections “ALGORITHM”, under the following function prompts:
IN ALG1
IN ALG2
These selections include the following algorithms:
Weighted Average
Feedforward Summer
Summer
Hi Select
Lo Select
 Mul Div
 Multiply
Mult Div
Multiply
Feedforward Multiplier
The formulas for these selections are given in Table 4-5 in Section 4 -
Definitions .
Input A, B, and C selections for these formulas are found in Section 3 -
Configuration; Set Up group “ALGORITHM”, under the following
function prompts:
ALG 1IN A
ALG 1IN B
ALG 1IN C
ALG 2IN A
ALG 2IN B
ALG 2IN C

5.15 Input Math Algorithms, Continued
8 segment Two 8-Segment Characterization selections can made in Section 3 -

characterization Configuration; Set Up group “ALGORITHM”, under function prompts:
8 SEG CHAR
Xn VALUE
Yn VALUE
8 SEG CHA2
Xn VALUE2
Yn VALUE2
An 8 segment characterizer can be applied to either Input 2 or Input 4,
Output 1, or Output 2.
When Input 2 or Input 4 is used, the selected inputs Ratio and Bias are
applied to the Xn values.
When one of the loop outputs is selected, the Xn Values are the output
from the control algorithm, and the Yn Output is the final control element
action.
An example of 8 Segment Characterization is shown in Figure 4-2.
Polynomial Equation A fifth order Polynomial equation can be used on any one of the five
Analog Inputs. The equation is in the form:
Y = C5 * 10-7 X5 + C4 * 10-5 X4 + C3 * 10-3 X3 + C2 * 10-1 X2 + C1 X +C0
Where:
X is the analog input selected
C0 is a value between –99.99 to +99.99
C1 - C5 are values between –9.999 to +9.999
Ratio and Bias can be applied on the "Y" output term as follows:
Calculated "Y" Value =
Y * Input x Ratio + InputX Bias
Where: "X" refers to the analog input being used and the
range assigned to the "X" input chosen applies to
the "Y" calculated value.
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration, Set Up group “ALGORTHM”,

function prompt “POLYNOM” to select an input, and “C0 VALUE”
through “C5 VALUE” to enter the coefficients.

5.15 Input Math Algorithms, Continued
Totalizer function A Flow Totalizer is available as part of the Math Algorithm option. This
calculates and displays the total flow volume being measured by input 1.
Alternatively, it can be applied to either Input Algorithm 1 or Input
Algorithm 2 to totalize the compensated flow rate being calculated by the
algorithm.
The totalizer displays the current totalized flow value (up to eight digits
maximum). Seven scaling factors are available (from 1 to 1 million). The
desired scaling factor is applied to the calculated value to extend the
maximum total flow range that can be displayed.
Five integration rates are available to match the totalizer rate to the rate
of flow being measured. The rate are:
Engineering Units (EU) per second
EU per minute
EU per hour
EU per day
Millions of units per day
The Totalizer value is stored in non-volatile memory once every eight
hours. If power is lost while the totalizer is in operation, the current value
of the totalizer will be lost. When power is restored, the Totalizer will
start operation for the last value stored in non-volatile memory. The “Σ
(Sigma)” display will blink to indicate this condition. Reset the Totalizer.
The Totalizer can be reset from the keyboard whenever desired or by
configuring a Comparator Logic Gate.
The Totalizer should always be reset to initialize the counters whenever it
is enabled, otherwise, the “Σ (Sigma)” display will blink
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration, Set Up group ALGORTHM”, function
prompt “TOTALIZER” to select an application and the function prompts
that follow “TOTALIZER” to enter your scale factor and rate of
integration.

5.16 Logic Gate Operation
Introduction The UDC6300 Logic Gate function lets you configure up to 5 Dual-Input
Logic Gates. Each gate can be one of the eight gate types listed below
including two comparators:
OR
NOR
AND
NAND
XOR
XNOR
These gates have two Digital input sources and one Digital output use.
B<A
B>A
These comparator gates have two Analog input sources and one Digital
output use with input B having a fixed hysteresis band of 0.1% of input B
span.
Gate configuration Refer to Section 3 - Configuration under Set Up group “ADVANCED

MATH” to make your choices for the following function prompts:
GATE TYPE
INPUT A SOURCE
INPUT B SOURCE
OUTPUT USE
for each gate you want to configure.
Gate Operation Section 4 - Definitions contains information which defines how the
different gates operate. In Digital Logic there are only two states that can
be present “0” -OFF or “1” -ON. Section 4 lists the types of gates
available along with their truth tables. These tables indicate what happens
to the output of each gate with regard to the state of the inputs. The rules
and regulations are listed in Table 5-30.

5.16 Logic Gate Operation, Continued
Rules and regulations The output of the Logic Gates are subject to the configuration constraints
and dynamic operational status of the UDC 6300 as listed in Table 5-30.
Table 5-30 Logic Gates Constraints and Dynamic Operation Status
UDC6300 Rules and Regulations
Alarms Alarms take precedent over gate outputs. No gate
output will occur if the output is directed to Digital
Output 1 or Digital Output 2 and the corresponding
Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Digital Input 3 - Alarm 3, Digital Input 4
- Alarm 4 is also configured.
Output Algorithms Certain output algorithms take precedence over gate
outputs. No gate output will occur if the output is
directed to Digital Output 3 or Digital Output 4 and a
conflicting output algorithm is also configured
(for example: Time Simplex, Time Duplex, etc.).
External Switch Some External Switch configurations take precedence
over gate outputs. No gate output will occur when the
following conditions exist:
• Gate output directed to Digital Output 3 or 4 and an
active external switch is configured for “OUT 3 ON” or
“OUT 4 ON” respectively.
• Gate Output directed to Manual/Auto mode and an
active external switch is configured for “TO MAN” or “TO
MANFSAFE”.
• Gate Output directed to Local/Remote Setpoint and an
active external switch is configured for “ToRSP”.
Gate Output will resume when the switch becomes
inactive.
Communications Communications takes priority over gate output as
follows:
• No Gate Output will occur if directed to Manual/Auto
and the Host computer places the unit (loop) into Manual
or Automatic mode.
• No Gate Output will occur if directed to Local/Remote
and the Host computer selects either Local or Remote
setpoint.
Gate output will resume when the Host computer puts
the unit (loop) into the monitor state or the unit sheds
from the Host.
Mode or Setpoint If a Logic Gate output is configured for Manual/Auto or
Local/Remote Setpoint, use of the MAN AUTO key
or RSP/CAS keys respectively will result in a key
error. However, the MAN AUTO key is permitted
during communications when the Host computer has
mode control.

5.17 Digital Outputs
Alarms Digital Outputs 1,2,3, and 4 can be configured through the keyboard to be
alarm signals. Refer to Section 3 - Configuration, Set Up group
“ALARMS” to set the following:
• Events on which you want to alarm
• Alarm Values
• High or Low states
• Hysteresis
• Action - energize or de-energize
• Latching or Non-Latching Alarm Outputs
Latching alarms
Bargraphs flash until the ALM/ACK key is pressed.
– If the alarm condition has ended, the Alarm Digital Output and
indicator will turn OFF
– If the alarm condition still exists, the Alarm Digital Output and
indicator will stay ON.
Non-Latching alarms
Bargraphs flash until the ALM/ACK key is pressed or alarm condition
ends.
– Alarm Digital Output and indicators will remain on until alarm
condition ends.
Alarm operation Table 5-31 shows the operation of the Digital Output, annunciator, and
bargraphs for both configurations.
Press the ALM/ACK key to view the Alarm Group Parameters.
Table 5-31 Latching and Non-Latching Alarm Operation
Alarm Alarm Alarm ACK Digital Outputs Annunciators Bargraphs
Configuration Condition Key ***
Pressed EN* DEN**
STILL EXISTS NO ON OFF FLASHING FLASHING
Non YES ON OFF ON NORMAL
Latching ENDED NO OFF ON OFF NORMAL
STILL EXISTS NO ON OFF FLASHING FLASHING
Latching**** YES ON OFF ON NORMAL
ENDED NO ON OFF FLASHING FLASHING
* "EN" is the "Digital Outputs Energized on Alarm" configuration

** "DEN" is the "Digital Outputs De-energized on Alarm" configuration
*** Only the Annunciator associated with the alarm will flash.
**** For CE conformity, Performance Criterion A, select “NON-LATCHING”.

5.17 Digital Outputs, Continued
Configuration Options Digital Outputs 1 and 2 can also be configured to operate as an Output for
- Digital Outputs 1 and a Logic gate:
2
• GATE 1 OUT, GATE 2 OUT, GATE 3 OUT, GATE 4 OUT, or
GATE 5 OUT prompt, under Set Up Group “Advanced Math”,
configured for DIG OUT 1 or DIG OUT 2.
Configuration options Digital Outputs 3 and 4 have several different configuration options from
- Digital Outputs 3 and which to choose:
4
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3
• DIG IN 1 (Digital Input 1) or DIG IN2 (Digital Input 2) prompt,
under Set Up Group “Options”, configured for OUT 3 ON.
• A3S1 TYPE (Alarm 3, Setpoint 1) or A3S2 TYPE (Alarm 3,
Setpoint 2) prompt, under Set UP Group “Alarms”, configured
for any selection except “NONE”.
• OUT ALG (Output Algorithm) prompt, under Set Up Group
“Output Algorithm”, configured for TIME, TIME DPLX,
CUR TIME, or TIME CUR.
configured for DIG OUT 3
DIGITAL OUTPUT 4
• DIG IN 1 (Digital Input 1) or DIG IN2 (Digital Input 2) prompt,
under Set Up Group “Options”, configured for OUT 4 ON.
• A4S1 TYPE (Alarm 4, Setpoint 1) or A4S2 TYPE (Alarm 4,
Setpoint 2) prompt, under Set UP Group “Alarms”, configured
for any selection except “NONE”.
• OUT ALG (Output Algorithm) prompt, under Set Up Group
“Output Algorithm”, configured for TIME DPLX.
• OUT2ALG (Output Algorithm 2) prompt, under Set Up Group
“Output Algorithm”, configured for TIME, CUR TIME, or
TIME CUR.
configured for DIG OUT 4

5.17 Digital Outputs, Continued
Priority level for The controller will control the Digital Outputs using the following
digital outputs structure:
Priority Level Function
1(Highest) Output Algorithm
2 Alarms
3(Lowest) Digital Input and Gate Outputs
Output algorithm and The output algorithm has the highest priority, so, that when an output
alarms priority algorithm is programmed to use a digital output, the alarm type for that
output will not be accessible form the keyboard.
For example:
If OUT ALG prompt in Set UP Group “Output Algorithm” is
configured for TIME, then A3S1 TYPE and A3S2 TYPE prompts
in Set UP Group “Alarms” will not be displayed in this Set Up
group.
Digital Input and gate The Digital Inputs and the Gate Outputs have the same priority. They
output priority operate as an OR function with one another. The digital output will be
active if either digital input or the gate output is a “TRUE” condition.
These conditions are ignored when an output is configured for either an
output algorithm or an alarm.

5.18 Digital Input Option (Remote Switching)
Digital Input 1 and 2 The Digital Input option detects the state of external contacts for either of
two inputs. On contact closure, the controller will respond according to
how each digital input is configured.
If the controller is configured for either Two Loop or Cascade control,
then switch #1 operates only on Loop 1 and switch #2 operates only on
Loop 2.
Make your selection under Set Up group “OPTION”, function group
prompt “DIG IN1” or “DIG IN2”. See Section 3 - Configuration.
Digital input 1 and 2 Table 5-32 lists the configuration prompt selections, the “Action on
Action on closure Closure”, and the display indication for each selection available.
Table 5-32 Digital Input 1 and 2 Option Action on Contact Closure
DIG IN1 or DIG IN2 Display Indication Action on contact closure*
selections
To MANUAL “MAN” blinks Puts the controller into manual mode.
To SP1 “SP” blinks Selects the local setpoint.
To SP2 “SP2” blinks Selects the second local setpoint.
To SP3 “SP3” blinks Selects the third local setpoint.
To DIRECT “1” or “2” blinks Selects direct controller action.
ToHOLD “H” blinks Suspends setpoint ramp.
ToPID2 PID2 in lower display Selects PID2.
“1” or “2” blinks
PV IS IN2 II Selects the PV to equal Input 2.
IN blinking
PV IS IN3 III Selects the PV to equal Input 3.
IN blinking
PV IS IN4 IV Selects the PV to equal Input 4.
IN blinking
PV IS IN5 V Selects the PV to equal Input 5.
IN blinking
To RUN “R” indicator blinks Starts a stopped SP Ramp.
TRACK 1 “O” blinks when L1 is lighted Allows Output 1 to track Input 4.
TRACK 2 “O” blinks when L2 is lighted Allows Output 2 to track Input 4.
TO OUT 2 “2” blinks when L1 or L2 is Allows Output 2 to override Output 1.
lighted
MANFSAFE “MAN” blinks Unit goes to Manual Mode, output goes to the
Failsafe value.
*Returns (toggles) to original state when contact opens.
**Open contact selects upward direction.

5.18 Digital Input Option (Remote Switching), Continued
Digital input 1 and 2

Action on closure,
continued
Table 5-32 Digital Input 1 and 2 Option Action on Contact Closure, continued
DIG IN1 or DIG IN2 Display Indication Action on contact closure*
selections
PULSEDOWN “1” or “2” blinks Select downward direction for pulse input
setpoint adjustment.**
OUT 3 ON Output 3 annunciator lights Output 3 energized
OUT 4 ON Output 4 annunciator lights Output 4 energized
INHIBIT 1 “1” or “2” blinks Inhibit PID Reset Action.
TO RSP “RSP” blinks Selects Remote Setpoint.
DSP LOOP L1/L2 L1 or L2 is lighted Displays loop not being displayed.
RESET FB “1” or “2” blinks Allows input 3 to override the internal reset value
providing external reset feedback.
TO A/M STA “LSP2” blinks When the switch is closed, the loop performs as
II follows:
IN blinking PV = In2
Action = Direct
PIDSET = 2
SP = LSP2
TO PURGE “MAN” blinks When the switch is closed, the loop is forced to
Manual mode with the Output value set to the
High Output Limit. The configuration of the
Latching function determines whether the action
is momentary or latching.
LOW FIRE “MAN” blinks When the switch is closed, the loop is forced to
Manual mode with the Output value set to the
Low Output Limit. The configuration of the
Latching function determines whether the action
is momentary or latching.
ToTUNE “TUNE” or “SP” Tuning - a Starts the Accutune process.
large “T” appears in the upper
display
“PV” tuning - displays a small
“t” in the upper display
Keyboard operation Front panel keys have no effect on the DI action in the closed state.

Digital input 1 and 2 The Digital Input combination selections listed in Table 5-33 and 5-34 can
combination be used in combination with the Digital Inputs 1 and 2 listed in Table 5-
selections
32.
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration and make your selections under Set Up
prompt “OPTIONS”; Function prompt “DIG 1 COMB” or “DIG 2
COMB”
Table 5-33 Digital Input Combinations “DIG IN 1”

Selections used in Display Indication Action on contact closure*
Combination with
“DIG IN1”
+ To PID2 Lower Display = PID SET 2 Selects PID 2.
+To DIRECT “1” or “2” blinks Puts the controller into direct controller action.
+ To SP2 “SP2” blinks Selects the Second Local Setpoint
+ DIS ADT1 “T” no longer lighted Disable Adaptive tune - Loop 1.
+ To SP1 “SP” blinks Selects the local setpoint.
To RUN “R” indicator blinks Starts or restarts RUN of SP Ramp.
Table 5-34 Digital Input Combinations “DIG IN 2”

Selections used in Display Indication Action on contact closure*
Combination with
“DIG IN2”
+ To PID2 Lower Display = PID SET 2 Selects PID 2.
+To DIRECT “1” or “2” blinks Puts the controller into direct controller action.
+ To SP2 “SP2” blinks Selects the second local setpoint.
+ DIS ADT2 “T” no longer lighted Disable Adaptive tune - Loop 2.
+ To SP1 “SP” blinks Selects the local setpoint.
To RUN “R” indicator blinks Starts or restarts RUN of SP Ramp.

Digital input 1 and 2 There are five possible situations that can occur when working with
combination Digital Input combinations. Table 5-35 lists these situations and the
operation
resulting action when the switch is active.
In the table:
Enabled means that the parameter is configured, and the action
will occur when the Digital Input is active
Action Disabled means that DIG IN or DIG COMB is configured but
the action cannot occur when the digital input is
active because the selected parameter is disabled.
Table 5-35 Digital Input 1 and 2 Combination Operation
DIG IN DIG COMB ACTION EXAMPLE
NONE Any Selection No action will occur when the
Digital Input is active
ENABLED DISABLED The DIG IN condition will occur DIG IN 1 = TO MANUAL
when the Digital Input is active. DIG COMB = DISABLED
Loop 1 will switch to MANUAL
when Digital Input 1 is active
ACTION ENABLED No action will occur when the DIG IN 1 = TO PID 2
DISABLED Digital Input is active PID SETS = 1 ONLY
DIG 1 COMB = +TO SP2
LSP’S = TWO
DIG IN 1 is action disabled
because PID SETS is set to
1ONLY. Therefore, when
Digital Input 1 is active, no
action will occur even though
DIG1 COMB is enabled.
ENABLED ACTION Action is indeterminate when the DIG IN 1 = TO PID 2
DISABLED Digital Input is active PID SETS = 2KEYBD
DIG 1 COMB = +TO SP2
LSP’S =1ONLY
Because DIG 1 COMB is
action disabled, the action will
be indeterminate when DIG
IN1 is active.
ENABLED ENABLED Both DIG IN and DIG COMB
action will occur.

Digital input 3,4,5,and The Digital Input option also detects the state of external contacts for
6 either Digital Input 3, 4, 5, or 6. On contact closure, the controller will
respond according to how each digital input is configured.
Make your selection under Set Up group “OPTION”, function group
prompt “DIG IN3”, “DIG IN4”,”DIG IN5”, or “DIG IN6”.
See Section 3 - Configuration.
Notes Digital Input 3 is internally connected (shares rear terminals) with the
Alarm 1 Digital Output 1.
Digital Input 4 is internally connected (shares rear terminals) with the
Alarm 2 Digital Output 2.
Alarm 3 Digital Output 3 which can be used by:
• Loop 1 Time Proportioning - Heat Output
• Alarm 3
• Logic Gates
Input.
Alarm 4 Digital Output 4 which can be used by:
• Loop 1 Time Time Duplex - Cool Output
• Loop 2 Time Simplex Output
• Alarm 4
• Logic Gates
Input.
Digital input 3, 4, 5, 6 Table 5-36 lists the configuration prompt selections, the “Action on
Action on closure Closure”, and the display indication for each selection available.
Table 5-36 Digital Input 3, 4, 5, 6 Option Action on Contact Closure
DIG IN3, DIG IN4, Display Indication Action on contact closure*
DIG IN5, DIG IN6
selections
To MANUAL “MAN” blinks Puts the controller into manual mode.
To SP1 “SP” blinks Selects the local setpoint.
To SP2 “SP2” blinks Selects the second local setpoint.
To SP3 “SP3” blinks Selects the third local setpoint.
To RUN “R” indicator blinks Starts a stopped SP Ramp.
ToHOLD “H” blinks Suspends setpoint ramp.
ToPID2 PID2 in lower display Selects PID2.
PV IS IN1 I Selects the PV to equal Input 1.
IN blinking

Digital input 3, 4, 5, 6
Action on closure ,
continued
Table 5-36 Digital Input 3, 4, 5, 6 Option Action on Contact Closure, continued

DIG IN3, DIG IN4, Display Indication Action on contact closure*
DIG IN5, DIG IN6
selections
PV IS IN2 II Selects the PV to equal Input 2.
IN blinking
PV IS IN3 III Selects the PV to equal Input 3.
IN blinking
PV IS IN4 IV Selects the PV to equal Input 4.
IN blinking
PV IS IN5 V Selects the PV to equal Input 5.
IN blinking
RSP - IN1 “RSP” blinks Selects Input 1 as Remote Setpoint
To DIRECT “1” or “2” blinks Selects direct controller action.
MANFSAFE “MAN” blinks Unit goes to Manual Mode, output goes to the
Failsafe value.
TO A/M STA “LSP2” Lights When the switch is closed, the loop performs as
follows:
PV = In2
Action = Direct
PIDSET = 2
SP = LSP2
TO PURGE “MAN” blinks When the switch is closed, both loops are forced
to Manual mode with the Output values set to
the High Output Limit. The loops can only be
returned to the Automatic mode by pressing the
MAN/AUTO key on the front panel.
This a momentary switch input, therefore, no
action occurs when the switch is opened.
LOW FIRE “MAN” blinks When the switch is closed, both loops are forced
to Manual mode with the Output values set to
the Low Output Limit. The loops can only be
returned to the Automatic mode by pressing the
MAN/AUTO key on the front panel.
This a momentary switch input, therefore, no
action occurs when the switch is opened.
*Returns (toggles) to original state when contact opens - except when overruled by the keyboard.

5.19 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression
Introduction Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression minimizes overshoot after a setpoint change

or a process disturbance. This is especially useful in processes which
experience load changes or where even a small overshoot beyond the
setpoint may result in damage or lost product.
How it works The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it
approaches the setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal controller
response action as necessary to avoid an overshoot. There is no change to
the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning
parameters. This feature can be independently Enabled or Disabled as
required by the application to work with “TUNE” On-Demand tuning or
the “SP” tuning algorithm.
Configuration To configure this item, refer to Section 3 - Configuration:

• Set Up Group “ACCUTUNE”
• Function Prompt “FUZZY”
• Select “ENABLE” or “DISABLE” ( or )

5.20 Accutune™
Introduction There are several types of Accutune from which to choose:

• (TUNE) Demand Tuning - Tuning is done on demand by:
- pressing the Lower Display and keys simultaneously, or
- by selecting prompt “TUNE RUN” in the lower display, or
- via Digital Input.
• (SP Only) Setpoint Tuning - SP Only tuning will continually adjust the
Gain or Proportional Band (P), Reset (I), and Rate (D) tuning constants
in response to setpoint changes.
• (TUNE) Demand Tuning + PV Adapt - provides “TUNE” On
Demand tuning plus “PV” adaptive tuning whenever a PV process
disturbance of 0.3% span or greater occurs.
• (SP Only) Setpoint Tuning+ PV Adapt - provides “SP Only” tuning
plus “PV” adaptive tuning whenever a PV process disturbance of 0.3%
span or greater occurs.
Configuration To configure this item, refer to Section 3 - Configuration:

• Set Up Group “ACCUTUNE”
• Function Prompt “ACCUTUNE” or “ACCUTUNE 2” depending
on
which loop you are tuning.
• Select “DISABLE”, “TUNE”, “SP Only”, “TUNE + PV”, or
“SP Only + PV. USE( or )
If “SP Only” Selected:
- Enter the Setpoint Change Value, Function Prompt “SP CHANG(2)”
- Verify or change the Process Gain Value, Function Prompt
”KPG(2)”
- Verify Criteria, Function Prompt “CRITERIA(2)”
Two loop and Accutune II can be used on either or both loops. However, while one loop
cascade operation is operating SP Only tuneing, the configuration of either loop cannot be
changed.
When one loop is operating by PV adaptine tuning, the other loop can
have its configuration changed.

5.20 Accutune™, Continued
Rules and regulations Table 5-37 is a list of rules and regulations for Accutune.
Table 5-37 Accutune Rules and Regulations
TUNE SP Only Applicable Rule or Regulation

X TUNE (On Demand) tuning will work for all Control Algorithms except “On/Off”.
X TUNE (On Demand) tuning works for Integrating Processes.
X SP tuning will work only for algorithms PID-A or PID-B selections, i.e. it will
NOT work with ON/OFF, THREE POSITION STEP, or PD+MR control
algorithms.
X SP tuning can tune on all Local or Computer setpoints except ramping
setpoints, i.e. cannot be done during SP Ramp or SP Program or when using
Remote Setpoint.
X X Tuning is done in Automatic mode.
X X Tuning can be monitored or re-configured using communications option.
X X Tuning can be enabled via Digital Inputs.
X X Tuning can be aborted by going to Manual mode or disabling via configuration.
X X When tuning is in progress, a large “T” appears in the upper display and
disappears as soon as tuning is completed.
X X can tune two independent loops

How TUNE TUNE tuning provides virtually foolproof, trouble-free on-demand tuning
(Demand”) tuning in the UDC6300 controller. No knowledge of the process is required at
works
start-up. The operator simply enters the desired setpoint and initiates the
tuning.
The UDC controller immediately starts controlling to the setpoint while it
identifies the process, calculates the tuning constants and enters them into
the Tuning group, and begins PID control with the correct tuning
parameters. This works with any process, including integrating type
processes, and allows retuning at a fixed setpoint.
The tuning sequence will cycle the controller’s output two full cycles
between 0% and 100 % (or configured output limits) while allowing only
a very small Process Variable change above and below the SP during each
cycle.
The algorithm then calculates new tuning parameters and enters them into
the tuning group. A large “T” appears in the upper display
Starting TUNE After “TUNE” or ‘TUNE+PV” has been enabled, use the procedure in
(Demand ) tuning Table 5-38 to start tuning
Table 5-38 Procedure for Starting TUNE (Demand) Tuning
Step Action
1 Set the Setpoint to the desired value.
2 Switch to “Automatic” mode - Manual/Auto key.
3 Initiate Tuning by:
• pressing the key when the Lower Display

prompt = “TUNE-OFF”,
• pressing the Lower Display and keys simultaneously, or
• using the Digital Input (if configured).
Aborting Tuning If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning process, press the
Manual/Auto key and the controller will return to Manual mode.
You can also disable “TUNE” OR “TUNE + PV” in the “ACCUTUNE”
OR “ACCUTUNE2” set up group.

TUNE for Duplex “TUNE” can be done for applications using Duplex (Heat/Cool) control.
(Heat/Cool) During tuning, Accutune II requires SP 1 will cause a Heating demand,
and then the calculated tuning parameters will be automatically entered as
PID SET 1. Likewise, it requires tuning at Local SP 2 will cause a
Cooling demand, and the cooling parameters will be entered as PID SET
2.
The tuning sequence will cycle the controller’s output two full cycles
between the high output limit and 50% for HEAT or between 50% and the
low output limit for COOL while allowing only a small process variable
change above and below the setpoint during each cycle.
Configuring TUNE for To configure this item, refer to Section 3 - Configuration:

Duplex (Heat/Cool) • Set Up Group “ACCUTUNE”
• Function Prompt “ACCUTUNE” OR “ACCUTUNE2”
• Select “TUNE” OR “TUNE+PV”. Use ( or )
Using TUNE at Start- After “TUNE” or “TUNE+PV” has been enabled, use the procedure in
up for Duplex Table 5-39 to use “TUNE” at Start-up for Duplex (Heat/Cool) control.
(Heat/Cool)
Table 5-39 Procedure for Using TUNE at Start-up for Duplex
Step Action
1 Heat Zone:
a. Adjust the Local SP1 to a value within the Heat Zone.
b. Insure that the UDC is in Automatic mode.
c. Press the Lower Display and keys simultaneously to initiate
Heat tuning.
The output will cycle between 50% and 100% (or high output limit).
A large “T” appears in the upper display until tuning is completed and
final Heat parameters are entered for PID Set 1 in the Tuning group.
2 Cool Zone:
a. Adjust the Local SP2 to a value within the Cool Zone.
b. Insure that the UDC is in Automatic mode.
c. Press the Lower Display and keys simultaneously to initiate
Cool tuning.
The output will cycle between 0% and 50% (or low output limit).
A large “T” appears in the upper display until tuning is completed and
final Cool parameters are entered for PID Set 2 in the Tuning group.

How “SP Only” “SP Only” tuning will continually adjust the Gain or Proportional Band
Tuning works (P), Reset (I), and Rate (D) tuning constants in response to setpoint
changes.
SP Only tuning handles all Local and Computer Setpoint changes. It uses
time domain analysis, and the rule based expert system techniques to
identify the two most dominant process lags plus any dead time.
It then automatically readjusts the PID parameters as necessary. It does
this while controlling to setpoint in automatic (closed loop) control mode.
These calculated PID values can be changed, if desired, by disabling SP
Tune and entering different values.
Tuning can be aborted by pushing Manual key to return to manual
mode.
Two criteria are available — “Normal” and “Fast” through configuration.
Setpoint changes During start-up, or whenever the setpoint changes beyond the “SP
Change” value, SP Only tuning employs time domain analysis to tune the
process at any desired setpoint without any prior initialization or process
knowledge.
Using SP Only tuning After “SP Only” or “SP Only + PV” has been enabled, use the procedure
at Start-up in Table 5-40 to use “SP Only” tuning at Start-up.
Table 5-40 Procedure for Using SP Only Tuning at Start-up
Step Action
1 Put the controller into manual mode- Manual/Auto key.
2 Let the PV stabilize.

3 Adjust the Setpoint to the desired value.
4 Put the controller into automatic mode- Manual/Auto key.
The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start
to move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper tuning
constants.
A large “T” appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate
that (SP ) tuning is in progress.

SP Only Tuning for “SP Only” tune can be done for applications using Duplex (Heat/Cool)
Duplex (Heat/Cool) control.
Configuring SP Only To configure this item, refer to Section 3 - Configuration:

Tuning for Duplex • Set Up Group “ACCUTUNE”
(Heat/Cool)
• Function Prompt “ACCUTUNE” or “ACCUTUNE2”
• Select “SP Only” or SP Only + PV”. Use ( or )
• Enter the Setpoint Change Value, Function Prompt “SP
CHANG” or “SPCHANG2”.
- Verify the Process Gain Value to be 1.0, Function Prompt
”KPG”
or “KPG2”
- Verify Criteria selected is “FAST”, Function Prompt
“CRITERIA” or “CRITERIA2”
Using SP Only tuning After “SP Only” or “SP Only + PV” has been enabled, use the procedure in
at Start-up for Duplex Table 5-41 to use “SP” tuning at Start-up for Duplex (Heat/Cool) control.
(Heat/Cool)
Table 5-41 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up for Duplex
Step Action
1 Put the controller into manual mode- Manual/Auto key.
2 Heat Zone:
a. Adjust the output to a value ABOVE 50% and at least 5% lower
than the normal Heating Setpoint value.
b. Let the PV stabilize.
c. Press the Manual/Auto key to start tuning for Heat Zone.
to move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper HEAT
tuning constants.
When the “T” disappears, tuning is completed and final values are
entered for PID Set 1 parameters in the Tuning group.
3 Cool Zone:
a. Adjust the output to a value BELOW 50% and at least 5% above
the normal Cooling Setpoint value.
b. Let the PV stabilize.
c. Press the Manual/Auto key to start tuning for Cool Zone.
to move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper COOL
tuning constants.
When the “T” disappears, tuning is completed and final values are
entered for PID Set 2 parameters in the Tuning group.

SP Only tuning SP Only tune will occur whenever the controller is in automatic mode and
(after Start-up) a setpoint change occurs which is greater than the previously configured
minimum setpoint change value.
The controller will delay using any setpoint changes for 30 seconds to
enable it to calculate whether to “SP” tune or not. But, if the controller is
toggled between LSP1 and LSP2 or if any other key (such as
LOWER/DISPLAY) is pressed, the setpoint change is immediate.
A large “T” is displayed in the upper display whenever tuning is in
progress. During this time, no changes to the configuration parameters,
including the setpoint, are permitted.
Aborting SP Only If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning:

Tuning
• press the Manual/Auto key to return to Manual mode. This will cause
an immediate abort of tuning.
• Disable “SP Only” or “SP Only + PV” in the Accutune Set Up group at
function prompt “ACCUTUNE” or “ACCUTUNE2”.
Re-Tuning The controller will evaluate current tuning as SP changes occur. When re-
tuning is required, the controller operates in automatic mode and identifies
new tuning constants.
At that point, the “T” disappears and tuning values are entered and used
until re-tuning occurs again.

TUNE+PV ADAPT or The (TUNE) Demand Tuning or the (SP Only) Setpoint Tuning portions
SP+PV ADAPT of these selections work as stated previously.
(Process variable
disturbances)
During Process Variable (PV) disturbances which result from non-
linearities, process dynamics, load changes or other operating conditions,
PV ADAPT will occur whenever a PV disturbance of 0.3% span or larger
occurs. When this condition exists, the controller monitors the process
response to determine whether there has been a true process change or a
momentary upset. It will take 1 and 1/2 process cycles around the setpoint
before any process recognition can occur.
For this configuration, the controller operates with only one set of Tuning
Parameters for each loop. The second set, normally used for Duplex
Output or for Keyboard, PV or SP Switching, is not used because
Adaptive Tune continually updates the tuning parameters based on the PV
deviation.
PV tuning indications A small “T” is displayed in the upper display whenever PV ADAPT mode
is in progress. During this time, changes to the configuration parameters
are permitted. However, this may cause the PV ADAPT process to abort.
The selection of Fast or Normal criteria has no effect on PV Adapt.
Aborting PV Adaptive If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning:

Tuning
• press the Manual/Auto key to return to Manual mode. This will cause
an immediate abort of tuning.
• Disable “TUNE+PV” or “SP Only + PV” in the Accutune Set Up group
at function prompt “ACCUTUNE” or “ACCUTUNE2”.

Error prompt When an error is detected in the Accutune process, the message “AT
accessing procedure ABORT” will appear in the lower display.
In order to determine what is causing the error:
• Select “ACCUTUNE” or “ACCUTUNE2” Set Up Group
• Access function prompt “AT ERROR” or “AT ERR2” for error prompt.
Table 5-30 lists the Accutune error codes that will be displayed in the
Upper Display and their definitions.
Error prompt Table 5-42 lists the Adaptive Tune error prompts and their definitions.
Table 5-42 Adaptive Tune Error Prompt Definitions

Upper Display Prompt Definition Action to Take
Prompt
NONE NO ERRORS None
OUTLIMIT SP Adapt step is greater than high • Check the output limits under Set Up
output limit or less than low output limit group prompt “CONTROL”, function
prompts “OUTHILIM” and
Output step insufficient to get to SP “OUTLOLIM” in Section 3 -
Value Configuration.
• Check “PROCESS GAIN” . Refer to
Table 5-36.
IDFAIL Process Identification Failure Try to SP tune again.
A illegal value of gain, Rate, or reset
was calculated.
ABORT • Manual abort has occurred Try to TUNE or SP tune again.
(Only error code – Accutune will abort if the
available for MAN/AUTO key is pressed during
“TUNE”)
tuning
• Digital Input detected
• Automatic Abort has occurred
– Accutune will automatically abort
when a PV oscillation has been
detected during “SP ADAPT”,
whenever any SP values are
changed during a “PV ADAPT”, or
when Accutune is disabled.
LOW PV PV not changed sufficiently or the PV NONE - After a period of about 5
has increased by more than 4% and minutes, the “SP Ony” will be re-tried
Deadtime not determined. automatically with a larger output step.
RUNNING Informational prompt indicating that None
“SP Only” is still active checking
process gain even though “T” is not lit.
It does not affect the keyboard
operation.

5.21 Input 5 - Pulse Input
Introduction This pulse input counts pulses sent from a 2-wire, 3-wire, or externally
powered external pulse device. The circuit is on an optional printed wiring
board which mounts to the Digital I/O board. This option is mutually
exclusive with the low level input board.
The input can be used as either a frequency input or as a pulse input. The
pulse input can be a pulse train or a method of adjusting the Remote
setpoint value up or down. Minimum Span = 100Hz; Resolution:±5Hz.
Frequency Input This selection is normally used with frequency output devices, such as
Turbine Flowmeters. For this configuration, the controller counts the
number of pulses received over 1/3 second period then multiplies this
value by three to convert to Hertz (cycles per second). This conversion is
done so that the pulse input will operate at the same Loop sample rate as
the rest of the controller. The frequency range is 0 to 25,000 Hz maximum
and
0–100 Hz Minimum Span.
Pulse Input There are two pulse input selections from which to choose:
• REMOTE SETPOINT PULSE TRAIN - The controller counts the total
number of pulses received, scales the value of each pulse by the
calibration values and the Input 5 High and Low range values, and then
sets the remote setpoint (RSP). For example: If the pulse input was
calibrated for 0 Hz (zero value) to 10,000 Hz (span Value) and the Input
5 high and low range values were 1000 and 0 respectively, then each
individual pulse would be equal to 1000 divided by 10000 or 0.1. So if a
pulse train sent to the controller contained 1581 pulses, then the RSP
would be set to 158.1.
While the controller is receiving a pulse train, the RSP will remain
steady at the last received value until the pulse train has ended. At that
point, the RSP is calculated and set as shown above. A pulse train is
defined to have ended after a minimum of 2/3 seconds have elapsed with
no pulses received. At this point, the RSP is calculated and used in
control equations, so that any new pulses received are interpreted as
being the start of a new pulse train.
• REMOTE SETPOINT ADJUST PULSE UP/DOWN - The controller

adjusts the current RSP value up or down by counting the number of
pulses received and scaling the total as shown in the pulse train
example. Digital Input #1 must be used to select the desired direction of
change. Each pulse adjusts the RSP value up or down — depending on
the Digital input status (closed = pulse down, or open = pulse up) — in
increments calculated as in the pulse train example. The RSP is
calculated and set every 1/3 second while pulses are being received.
Wiring Make sure the controller is wired to an external pulse device as shown in
the wiring diagrams in Section 2 - Installation.

5.21 Input 5 - Pulse Input, Continued
Configuration Configure your controller for the type of pulse input required
(See table 5-43). Press the SETUP key until you get the set up group
prompt you want, then press the FUNC key until you see the required
function group prompt in the lower display.
Use the or keys to change the value or make you selection in the
upper display.
Table 5-43 Controller Configuration Selections for Pulse Input
Pulse Operation Set Up Group Function Group Selection
Selection Prompt Configuration (Upper Display)
(Lower Display) Prompt
(Lower Display)
Frequency Input INPUT_5 IN5_PULSE FREQ_INP
Pulse Train INPUT_5 IN5_PULSE PULSE
(Loop 1 shown)
INPUT_5 IN_5_HIGH (same as PV high)
INPUT_5 IN_5_LOW (same as PV low)
CONTROL RSP_SOURCE INPUT_5
OPTIONS DIG_IN_1 (any selection except PULSE
DOWN)
OPTIONS DIG_IN_2 (any selection except PULSE
DOWN)
Pulse Up/Down INPUT_5 IN5_PULSE PULSE
(Loop 1 shown)
INPUT_5 IN_5_HIGH (same as PV high)
INPUT_5 IN_5_LOW (same as PV low)
CONTROL RSP_SOURCE INPUT_5
OPTIONS DIG_IN_1 PULSE DOWN
(any selection except PULSE
OPTIONS DIG_IN_2 DOWN)

5.22 Three Position Step Control
Introduction The Three Position Step Control algorithm allows the control of a valve
(or other actuator) with an electric motor. Digital Outputs 3 and 4
generate control signals that drive external relays; one to move the motor
upscale, the other to move it downscale, without a feedback slidewire
linked to the motor shaft. Adaptive Tune does not function with this
algorithm.
How it works Three Position Step control is an extension of the On-Off Duplex Control
to include internal feedback of the state of the Digital Outputs.
In this algorithm, the error signal is compared with a feedback signal and
the result determines the state of the Digital Outputs as follows:
Positive Error > Feedback Digital Output 3 On
Negative Error < Feedback Digital Output 4 On
Otherwise, the outputs are both off.
Estimated motor The Three Position Step control algorithm provides an output display
position (“OUT”) which is an estimated motor position since the motor is not using
any slidewire feedback.
Although this output indication is only accurate to a few percent, it is
corrected each time the controller drives the motor to one of its stops
(0% or 100%).
It avoids all the control problems associated with the feedback slidewire
(wear, dirt, noise).
When operating in this algorithm, the estimated “OUT” display is shown
to the nearest percent (i.e. no decimal).
Setting the motor Table 5-44 lists the procedure for setting the motor time. This is the time
travel time it takes the motor to travel from 0% to 100%.
Table 5-44 Procedure for Setting the 3PSTEP Motor time
1 Enter the Set Until you see:
Up mode SET Upper Display
UP SET UP
Lower Display
ALGORTHM
2 Select 3PSTEP Until you see:

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 Current Selection
Lower Display
CONTR ALG
To select “3PSTEP” in the upper display

or

5.22 Three Position Step Control, Continued
Setting the motor

travel time, continued
Table 5-44 Procedure for Setting the 3PSTEP Motor time, continued
3 Enter the Motor Until you see:
Travel Time FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 (Motor Time
in seconds)
Lower Display
MTR TIME
To select the Motor Travel Time.

or
Range of setting: 5 to 255 seconds
Displaying the motor Table 5-45 lists the procedure for displaying the motor position.
position
Table 5-45 Procedure for Displaying the 3PSTEP Motor Position
1 Access the Until you see:
displays LOWR Upper Display
DISP
The PV value
Lower Display
OUT and the estimated 3PStep

motor position in percent.
Power up output When the controller powers up after a power outage, the position of the
motor will correspond to whatever was configured at set up group prompt
“CONTROL”, function prompt “PWR MODE”, selection MANUAL,
AorM SP, or AorM LSP. Refer to Subsection 4.11, Table 4-10 for
definition of each selection.
If Burnout = NONE is configured for the PV Input, the FAILSAFE output
value in the “CONTROL” group must be configured for 0% or 100%.

5.23 Auto/Manual Station
Introduction When you select “AM STA” (auto manual station) under “OPTION”
setup group, function prompt “DIG IN1”, “DIG IN2”, “DIG IN3”, “DIG
IN4”, “DIG IN5”, or “DIG IN6” (digital input options), contact closure on
the selected digital input causes the controller to switch to Auto/Manual
Station mode.
Function As shown in Figure 5-5, State 2 is the “A/M Station mode” where the
programmable logic controller (PLC) output is sent through the
Auto/Manual Station. You can switch to manual and change the output at
the controller. (It uses PIDSET2.)
State 1 is the “Backup PID mode” which is triggered by opening the
Digital Input. (It uses PIDSET1.)
Figure 5-5 is an example using DIG IN 1 as the selection under
“OPTIONS” Set Up Group.
Figure 5-5 Auto/Manual Station Using Digital Input #1 and Backup Control Feature
T/C PLC
PV SP
T/C
Control output
4-20 mA
DI #1 = "AM STA"
OPEN (new
CLOSED selection)
IN1 IN2
State 1: State 2:
DI #1: Open DI #1: Closed
BACKUP A/M STATION
PID PV PV Alarm
CONTROL – Direct action Output on
– PD+MR Manual
Aux LSP = SP1 LSP = SP2
PID A PD+MR – SP = SP2 Mode
Output – PV = IN2 (new
SP1 = – PIDSET2 selection)
new PIDSET1
selection P= same
I=
D=
}as
PLC
OUT1 OUT1
Configure
State 2 per
next page.
Output 1
4-20 mA
To valve 22793

5.23 Auto/Manual Station, Continued
Description The “AM STA” selection of digital input creates a repeater station when
the digital input is closed. This is accomplished by a multi-selection from
the digital input menu.
• “ACTION” is forced as “DIRECT”.
• “CONT ALG” is forced as “PD+MR”.
• Active setpoint is forced to LSP2.
• The PV is switched to “PV 2IN”.
• The tuning parameters used are the second set of parameters.
When the switch is open the unit becomes a normal controller with
“CONT ALG” of “PID A”, using tuning parameters set 1, LSP1, PV as
IN1 and “DIRECT” or “REVERSE” as selected by customer
configuration.
Input 1 is typically the PV of some upper controller and Input 2 is

typically that controller’s output.
If the upper control fails, the upper device or some watch dog opens the
digital input switch and UDC 6300 back-up PID A control is active.
When the upper control reactivates, the digital input switch is closed and
the Auto/Manual Station becomes a repeater station and allows the upper
control output signal to pass through.
Configuration There are some things to consider when configuring the controller.
The PV range stays as the IN1 range, even while IN2 is the PV when the
switch is closed, therefore:
• The IN2 HI must be less than or equal to the IN1 HI.
(Suggest: IN2 HI = 100.0)
• The IN2 LO must be greater than or equal to the IN1 LO.
(Suggest: IN2 LO = 0.0)
• The TUNING GAIN2 must be equal to
(IN1 HI – IN1 LO) / (IN2 HI – IN2 LO).

Configuration Refer to Table 5-46 and set up the controller in the order shown.
(continued)
Table 5-46 Auto/Manual Station Mode Configuration Procedure
SET
FUNC
Press s t
Step Press
UP
Press Enter Remarks
to Select to Select Value or
Setup Group Function Selection
Prompts
1 Control PID SETS 2 KEYBD Select other control parameters as needed by
the application.
LSP’s TWO
SP TRACK NONE
2 Algorithm CONTR ALG PD+MR This allows setting of the Manual Reset value.
3 Tuning MAN RESET 0 Manual Reset of 0 for no output Bias and
requires LSP2=0%. If Bias is required, set MR
to equal the desired output Bias value.
4 Algorithm CONT ALG PID A Defines Back-up Control Algorithm.
5 Tuning RSET2MIN 50.00
GAIN2 See Note 1 Note 1. Set the Gain 2 equal to
Input 1 Span
Input 2 Span
If “PB” is selected under “Control” setup group,

function prompt “PBorGAIN”, set the PROP BD2
to
Input 2 Span
100 x
Input 1 Span
RATE2MIN 0.00 Select PIDSET1 tuning parameters as needed

by the application.
6 Options DIG IN1 through AM STA
DIG IN 6
CAUTION DO NOT SELECT

• In the CONTROL setup list, do not select SP TRACK as PV or RSP.
• In the SP RAMP setup list, do not select SP RATE as ENABLE.
• In the ALGORTHM setup list, do not select CONT ALG as
PID B, ON-OFF, or 3PSTEP.
• In the Display menu when PIDSET# is displayed, DO NOT change the
selection.

Operation Set the Local Setpoint 2 to 0% of the Input 2 range.
These features work with the Auto/Manual Station.

• In the SP RAMP setup list, SP PROG (acts on SP1 for backup
operation).
• In the SP RAMP setup list, SP RAMP (acts on SP1 for backup
operation).
• In the CONTROL setup list, ACTION as DIRECT or REVERSE for the
backup PID A operation.
The PD+MR Action is forced to be DIRECT as required for the
pass through of the output signal.

Section 6 – Input Calibration
6.1 Overview
Introduction This section describes the field calibration procedures for Input 1, Input 2,
Input 3, Input 4, and optional Input 5.
Every UDC 6300 controller contains all input actuation ranges fully
factory calibrated and ready for configuration to range by the user.
However these procedures can be implemented if the factory calibration
of the desired range is not within specifications.
Note that the field calibration on Input 5 will be lost if a change in input
type configuration is implemented at a later time. The original factory
calibration data remains available for later use after a field calibration is
done.
To restore Factory calibration on any of the inputs, refer to
Subsection 6.12.
What’s in this section This section contains the following topics:

Topic See Page
6.1 Overview 217
6.2 Minimum and maximum range values 218
6.3 Input 1, 2, 3, and 4 Preliminary Information 219
6.4 Input 1, 2, 3, and 4 Set Up Wiring 221
6.5 Input 1, 2, 3, and 4 Calibration Procedure 222
6.6 Input 5 Low Level Inputs Preliminary Information 224
6.7 Input 5 Low Level Inputs Set Up Wiring 226
6.8 Input 5 Low Level Inputs Calibration Procedure 230
6.9 Input 5 Pulse Input Preliminary Information 232
6.10 Input 5 Pulse Input Calibration Procedure 233
6.11 Input 5 Pulse Input Verification 235
6.12 Restoring Factory Calibration 236
Calibration steps Use the following steps when calibrating an input.

Step Action
1 Find the minimum and maximum range values for your PV input
range from Table 6-1.
2 Disconnect the field wiring and find out what equipment you will need
to calibrate. DO NOT remove external resistor assemblies (if
present).
3 Wire the calibrating device to your controller according to the Set Up
wiring instructions for your particular input.
4 Follow the calibration procedure given for Input #1, 2, 3, 4, or 5

6.2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values
Select the range You should calibrate the controller for the minimum (0%) and Maximum
values (100%) range values of your particular sensor.
Calibrate each input separately.
Select the Voltage or Resistance equivalent for 0% and 100% range
values from Table 6-1. Use these value when calibrating your controller.
Table 6-1 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0% and 100% Range Values
Sensor Type PV Input Range Range Values
°F °C 0% 100%
B Thermocouple 105 to 3300 41 to 1815 0 mV 13.763 mV
E Thermocouple -454 to 1832 –270 to 1000 –9.835 mV 76.358 mV
J Thermocouple 0 to 1600 –18 to 871 –0.885 mV 50.059 mV
K Thermocouple 0 to 2400 –18 to 1316 –0.692 mV 52.939 mV
NiNiMoly T/C 32 to 2500 0 to 1371 –0.001 mV 71.330 mV
Nicrosil Nisil T/C 0 to 2372 –18 to 1300 –0.461 mV 47.502 mV
R Thermocouple 0 to 3100 –18 to 1704 –0.089 mV 20.275 mV
S Thermocouple 0 to 3100 –18 to 1704 –0.092 mV 17.993 mV
T Thermocouple -300 to 700 –184 to 371 –5.341 mV 19.095 mV
W5W26 T/C 0 to 4200 –18 to 2316 –0.234 mV 37.066 mV
RTD (IEC=0.00385)
100 Ohms -300 to 900 –184 to 482 25.18 Ω 274.96 Ω
100 Ohms (low) 0 to 300 –18 to 149 93.03 Ω 156.90 Ω
200 Ohms -300 to 900 –184 to 482 50.36 Ω 549.92 Ω
500 Ohms -300 to 900 –184 to 482 125.90 Ω 1374.80 Ω
Radiamatic (RH) 1400to3400 760 to 1871 0.99 mV 57.12 mV
Milliamps 4 to 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA
Millivolts 0 to 10 mV 0 mV 10 mV
10 to 50 mV 10 mV 50 mV
Volts 1 to 5 Volts 1 Volt 5 Volts
0 to 10 Volts 0 Volts 10 Volts

6.3 Input 1, 2, 3, or 4 Preliminary Information
Disconnect the field Depending on which input (#1, 2, 3, or 4) you are going to calibrate, tag
wiring and disconnect any field wiring connected to the input terminals on the
rear of the controller.
Figure 6-1 shows the wiring terminal designations for Input #1, 2, 3, or 4
Figure 6-1 Input #1, 2, 3, or 4 Wiring Terminals
R
1 14 1+ Inputs
+ 1, 2, 3, and
2 15 2+ 4
- 3 16 Signal Terminals
Common
4 17 3+
5 18 4+
6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
22055

6.3 Input 1, 2, 3, or 4 Preliminary Information, Continued
Equipment needed Table 6-2 lists the equipment you will need to calibrate the Milliamp or
Volt ranges that are available for Inputs 1, 2, 3, or 4. You will need a
screwdriver to connect these devices to your controller.
Table 6-2 Equipment Needed

Type of Input Equipment Needed
Milliampere or Volts • A calibrating device with ±0.01% accuracy for
use as a signal source.
• Two insulated copper leads for connecting the
calibrator to the controller.
• Place current source at zero before switching
ON.
• Do not switch current sources OFF/ON while
connected to the UDC 6300 input.

6.4 Input 1, 2, 3, or 4 Set Up Wiring
1 to 5 Volts or 4–20 Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of
mA Inputs Input #1, 2, 3, or 4. See Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Wiring Connections for 1 to 5 Volts or 4 to 20 mA

Input
Connections
Calibrating
1 14 14 + Input 1
Device
2 15 15 + Input 2 – +
3 16 16 - Signal
Common
4 17 17 + Input 3
5 18 18 + Input 4
6 19
7 20
Dropping resistor(s) Connect
8 21 + and -
required for mA field
9 22 calibration to specific
250ž (4-20 mA) or input
10 23 100ž (10-50mA) terminals
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
22054

6.5 Input #1, 2, 3, or 4 Calibration Procedure
Introduction Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 1 hour before you
calibrate.
Please read “Set Up Wiring” before beginning the procedure.
Make sure you have “LOCKOUT” set to “NONE.” See Section 3 –
Configuration.
CAUTION For linear inputs, avoid step changes in inputs. Vary smoothly
from initial value to final 100% value.
Procedure The Calibration procedure is the same for Input #1 and 2, 3, or 4 except
that the displays will indicate 2, 3, or 4. The procedure is listed in Table 6-
3.
Table 6-3 Input #1, 2, 3, or 4 Calibration Procedure
Step Description Press Action
1 Enter Calibration Mode Upper Display
for the Input selected SET CALIB
UP
Lower Display
until you see INPUT X X = 1, 2, 3, or 4
You will see:

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 DISABL
Lower Display
CAL INX X = 1, 2, 3, or 4
The calibration sequence is enabled and you will

see:
Upper Display
BEGIN
Lower Display
CAL INX X = 1, 2, 3, or 4
At the completion of the sequence, the selection

automatically reverts to disable.
2 Calibrate 0% You will see:
FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 APPLY
Lower Display
IN1 ZERO X = 1, 2, 3, or 4
Adjust your calibration device to an output signal

equal to the 0% range value for your particular input
sensor.
Wait 15 seconds, then go to the next step.

6.5 Input #1, 2, 3, or 4 Calibration Procedure, Continued
Table 6-3 Input #1, 2, 3, or 4 Calibration Procedure, continued

3 Calibrate 100 % You will see:
FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 APPLY
Lower Display
INX SPAN X = 1, 2, 3, or 4

equal to the 100% range value for your particular
input sensor.
4 Exit the Calibration The controller will store the calibration constants.
Mode FUNC
L1/L2
or To exit the calibration mode.
ATTENTION Press the [FUNC/L1-L2] key first to

LOWR
DISP store constants.

6.6 Input 5 - Low Level Inputs Preliminary Information
Disconnect the field Figure 6-3 shows the wiring terminal designations for Input #5 - Low
wiring Level Inputs. Tag and disconnect any field wiring connected to the input
terminals on the rear of the controller. Leave field wiring connected to all
inputs which are not being field calibrated.
Figure 6-3 Input #5 - Low Level Inputs Wiring Terminals
R
Input 1 14
5 + 2 15
Terminals - 3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
22056

6.6 Input 5 - Low Level Inputs Preliminary Information,
Continued
Equipment needed Table 6-4 lists the equipment you will need to calibrate the specific types
of inputs that are listed in table 6-1. You will need a screwdriver to
connect these devices to your controller.
Table 6-4 Equipment Needed

Type of Input Equipment Needed
Thermocouple Inputs • A calibrating device with ±0.01% accuracy for
(Ice Bath) use as a signal source such as a millivolt
source.
• Thermocouple extension wire that
corresponds with the type of thermocouple
that will be used with the controller input.
thermocouple extension wire from the ice
baths to the precision calibrator.
• Two containers of crushed ice.
(Precision Resistor) use as a signal source such as a millivolt
source.
• A precision 500 ohm resistor ±0.1% connected
across input #5 terminals 1(R) and 3(–).
(Ambient Temperature) use as a signal source such as a millivolt
source.
RTD (Resistance • A decade box, with ±0.01% accuracy, capable
Thermometer Device) of providing stepped resistance values over a
minimum range of 0 to 1400 Ohms with a
resolution of 0.1 ohm.
• Three insulated copper leads for connecting
the decade box to the controller.
Milliampere, Millivolt, Volts, • A calibrating device with ±0.01% accuracy for
and Radiamatic use as a signal source.
• Place current source at zero before switching
ON.
• Do not switch current sources OFF/ON while
connected to the UDC6300 input.

6.7 Input #5 - Low Level Inputs Set Up Wiring
Thermocouple inputs Refer to Figure 6-4 and wire the controller according to the procedure
using an ice bath given in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using

An Ice Bath
Step Action
1 Connect the copper leads to the calibrator.
2 Connect a length of thermocouple extension wire to the end of each
copper lead and insert the junction points into the ice bath.
3 Connect the thermocouple extension wires to the terminals for Input
#5. See Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice

Bath
R 1
Cold 14
+ 2 Junction 15
Resistor
- 3 16
Thermocouple 4 17
Extension
5 18
Wire
6 19
7 20
8 21
Copper 9 22
leads
10 23
11
12 L1
+ -
Ice 13 L2/N
Calibrating
Device Baths
22053

6.7 Input #5 - Low Level Inputs Set Up Wiring, Continued
Thermocouple inputs Refer to Figure 6-5 and wire the controller according to the procedure
using a precision given in Table 6-6.
resistor
Table 6-6 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using
a Precision Resistor
Step Action
1 Connect the copper leads to the calibrator.
2 Disconnect the cold junction resistor.
3 Install a 500 Ohm precision resistor across terminal 1(R) and
terminal 3(—). See figure 6-5.
4 Subtract the millivolt value for 77°F (25°C) from the zero and span
value for your range (see Table 6-1 for zero and span values) and
use the adjusted value when calibrating.
Figure 6-5 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using a

Precision Resistor
R 1 14
Millivolt + Precision
2 Resistor 15
Source
- 3 1 16
4 17
5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
22067
1 The accuracy of the controller is directly affected

ATENTION by the accuracy of this resistor. At a minimum,
use a 0.1% 25 PPM resistor.

RTD Inputs Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of
Input #5. See Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Wiring Connections for RTD (Resistance Thermometer

Device)
R
Decade 1 14
Resistance + 2 15
Box - 3 16
4 17
5 18
Copper leads 6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
22051

Radiamatic, Millivolts, Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of
Volts, or milliamps Input #5. See Figure 6-7.
Inputs
Figure 6-7 Wiring Connections for Radiamatic, Millivolts, Volts, or

Milliamps
Copper
leads
R 1 14
+ 2 15
- 3 16
4 17
+ –
5 18
Calibrating
Device 6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
22052

6.8 Input #5 - Low Level Inputs Calibration Procedure
Introduction Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 1 hour before you
calibrate.
Please read “Set Up Wiring” before beginning the procedure.
Make sure you have “LOCKOUT” set to “NONE.” See Section 3 –
Configuration.
CAUTION For linear inputs, avoid step changes in inputs. Vary smoothly
from initial value to final 100% value.
Procedure The Calibration procedure for Input #5 is listed in Table 6-7.

Table 6-7 Input #5 Calibration Procedure
SET CALIB
UP
Lower Display
until you see INPUT 5
You will see:

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 DISABL
Lower Display
CAL IN5

see:
Upper Display
BEGIN
Lower Display
CAL IN5

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 APPLY
Lower Display
IN5 ZERO

equal to the 0% range value for your particular input
sensor. See Table 6-1 for Voltage or Resistance
equivalents.
Wait 15 seconds, then go to the next step.

6.8 Input #5 - Low Level Inputs Calibration Procedure,
Continued
Table 6-7 Input #5 Calibration Procedure, continued

3 Calibrate 100 % You will see:
FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 APPLY
Lower Display
IN5 SPAN

equal to the 100% range value for your particular
input sensor. See Table 6-1 for Voltage or
Resistance equivalents.
Wait 15 seconds, and
If… Then…
you are calibrating a Go to step 4
Thermocouple input
you are calibrating other Go to step 5
than a Thermocouple input
4 Check the Cold Junction The calculations for zero and span are now stored
Temperature FUNC and you will see:
L1/L2 Upper Display
ATTENTION The cold junction
The accuracy of the temperature at the
Lower Display rear terminals
controller is directly
affected by the accuracy C-J TEMP
of this value. Change
this value only if the The value in the upper display is in the tenths of a
zero and span degree. It is the current reading of the temperature
calibration procedures as measured at the thermocouple terminals and
did not bring the recognized by the controller. You can change this
controller within the value, if it is in error, using the or key.
specified accuracy
requirements. ATTENTION When calibrating T/C inputs using a
precision resistor, calibrate the cold junction as 77°F
(25°C).
5 Exit the Calibration The controller will store the calibration constants.
Mode FUNC
L1/L2
ATTENTION Press the [FUNC/L1-L2] key first to

LOWR

6.9 Input #5 - Pulse Input Preliminary Information
Equipment needed No equipment is required to do the calibration procedure for Input 5 Pulse
Inputs. However, to verify the results, the following will be required:
• Screwdriver
• Frequency Generator with 0.01% accuracy for use as a signal
source
• Two insulated copper leads for connecting the calibrator to the
controller
Range Specifications The following are the range specifications for Input 5 Pulse Inputs.
• Frequency Range: 0 – 25000 Hz (Minimum span = 100 Hz)
• Resolution: ± 5 Hz
• High Input Level: +5 to +24 Vdc
• Low Input Level: 0 to 0.5 Vdc

6.10 Input #5 - Pulse Input Calibration Procedure
Procedure Follow the procedure in Table 6-8 to calibrate Input 5 Pulse Inputs.
Table 6-8 Input #5 - Pulse Input Calibration Procedure
SET CALIB
UP
Lower Display
until you see INPUT 5
You will see:

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 DISABL
Lower Display
CAL IN5

see:
Upper Display
BEGIN
Lower Display
CAL IN5

2 Calibrate Zero You will see:
FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 (Value)
Lower Display
IN5 ZERO
The value displayed represents 1/10 of the actual

calibration value.
For example: If 500 Hz is the desired zero value,
enter 50 for input 5 Zero Value.
Minimum Zero Value = 0 Hz
to adjust the zero value then go to the next step.
or

6.10 Input #5 - Pulse Inputs Calibration Procedure, Continued
Table 6-8 Input #5 Calibration Procedure, continued

3 Calibrate Span You will see:
FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 (Value)
Lower Display
IN5 SPAN
The value displayed represents 1/10 of the actual

calibration value.
For example: If 10,000 Hz is the desired span value,
enter 1000 for input 5 Span Value.
Minimum Span Value = 100 Hz (enter 10)
Maximum Span Value = 25,000 Hz (enter 2500)
to adjust the span value
or
4 Exit Calibration Mode to store the calibration constants
FUNC
L1/L2
then
LOWR to exit the calibration mode

DISP

6.11 Input #5 - Pulse Input Verification
Set up Refer to Figure 6-8 and wire the controller according to the procedure
given in Table 6-9.
Table 6-9 Pulse Input Verification Setup
Step Action
1 Connect the copper leads from the terminals for Input 5 to the
Frequency Input Generator (Terminals 2 and 3).
2 Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for one hour before
verification.
Figure 6-8 Test Equipment connections for Calibrating Pulse Inputs
Copper Leads 1 14
+ 2 15
– 3 16
4 17
+ 5 18
–
Frequency 6 19
Input
Generator 7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
22674
Verification Enter the desired Zero and Span frequency range from the Input Generator
and check to see that the displays read the calibrated Zero and Span
values.

6.12 Restoring Factory Calibration
How to restore it The factory calibration constants for all the input actuation types that can
be used with the controller are stored in its nonvolatile memory. Thus,
you can quickly restore the “Factory Calibration” for a given input
actuation type by simply changing the actuation type to another type and
then changing it back to the original type. See Table 6-10 for the
procedure.
INPUT 1, 2, 3, or 4
change Function Prompt “XMITTERn” (n=1, 2, 3, or 4)
INPUT 5
change Function Prompt “IN 5 TYPE”
ATTENTION This procedure applies only for factory-installed inputs. Input 5 that was
field-installed must be field calibrated.
Procedure Table 6-10 lists the procedure for restoring factory calibration.
Table 6-10 Restoring Factory Calibration

Step Operation Press Action/Result
1 Set SET
Until you see:
“LOCKOUT” UP Upper Display
to “CALIB” or SET UP
“NONE”
Lower Display
TUNING
FUNC
Until you see:
L1/L2 Upper Display
One of the following
NONE
Lower Display CALIBRATE
+ CONF
LOCKOUT + VIEW
MAXIMUM
Until “CALIBRATE” or “NONE” is in the

upper display.
or
2 For INPUTS 1 THROUGH 4 go to step 3

For INPUT 5 go to step 4
Table 7-1 is continued on next page

6.12 Restoring Factory Calibration, Continued
Table 6-10 Restoring Factory Calibration, continued
INPUTS 1, 2, 3, OR 4
3 Enter SET
Until you see:
“INPUT UP Upper Display
1,2,3,4” Setup SET UP
Group
Lower Display
INPUTn
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4
FUNC
Until you see:
L1/L2 Upper Display
Current Selection
Lower Display
XMITTERn
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4
to change the current selection to

another selection.
or
FUNC
Until the lower display rolls through the
L1/L2
rest of the functions and returns to
Upper Display
New Selection
Lower Display
XMITTERn
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4
Until you change the input selection in

the upper display back to the proper
or
selection. You will see:
Upper Display
Original input
selection that
Lower Display matches your
XMITTERn type of sensor.
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4
GO TO STEP 5.

Table 6-10 Restoring Factory Calibration, continued
INPUT 5
4 Enter SET
Until you see:
“INPUT 5” UP Upper Display
Setup Group SET UP
Lower Display
INPUT 5
FUNC
Until you see:
L1/L2 Upper Display
Current Selection
Lower Display
IN5 TYPE
to change the current selection to

another selection.
or
FUNC
Until the lower display rolls through the
L1/L2
rest of the functions and returns to
Upper Display
Current Selection
Lower Display
IN5 TYPE
Until you change the input selection in

the upper display back to the proper
or
selection. You will see:
Upper Display
Original input
selection that
Lower Display matches your
IN5 TYPE type of sensor.
5 Return to To return to Normal operating mode.

LOWR
normal
DISP The factory calibration will be restored. If
operating
mode the problem is not corrected, contact the
Honeywell Technical Assistance Center
1-800-423-9883 USA
1-800-461-0013 Canada

CAUTION A restored factory calibration overwrites any previous field calibration

done for the input and may change the High and Low Range Limits. Be
sure to protect any field calibration from accidental overwrites by
configuring the appropriate “LOCKOUT” selection after calibration. See
the Section 3 - Configuration for specific instructions to set the lockout.

Section 7 – Output Calibration
7.1 Overview
Introduction This section describes the field calibration procedures for the following
types of outputs:
• Current Output
• 2nd Current Output
• Three Position Step Control
What’s in this section This section contains the following topics:

Topic See Page
7.1 Overview 241
7.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration 242
7.3 2nd Current Output Calibration 245

7.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration
Introduction Calibrate the controller so that the output provides the proper amount of
current over the desired range.
The controller can provide an output current range of from 0 to 21
milliamperes and can be calibrated at 4 mA for 0% of output and 20 mA
for 100% of output or any other values between 0 and 21 mA.
We recommend that the expected output load be connected for optimum
accuracy.
Equipment needed You will need a standard shop type milliammeter, with whatever accuracy
is required, capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps.
Calibrator Refer to Figure 7-1 and wire the controller according to the procedure
connections given in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Set Up Wiring Procedure Current Proportional Output
Step Action
1 Tag and disconnect the field wiring, at the rear of the controller, from
terminals 20(+) and 21(–). See Figure 7-1.
2 Connect a Milliammeter across these terminals.
3 Connect a load resistor, equivalent to the process load, in series with
the milliammeter. See Figure 7-1.
4 Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 15 minutes before
you calibrate.

7.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration, Continued
Calibrator
connections,
continued
Figure 7-1 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional
Output
1 14
2 15 Milliammeter
3 16
4 17
+ –
5 18
6 19 Load
+
7 20
8 21 –
9 22
10 23
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
21761

7.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration, Continued
Procedure The procedure for calibrating the Current Proportional Output is listed in
Table 7-2. Make sure “LOCKOUT” in the Tuning Set Up group is set to
“NONE.” See Section 3 – Configuration.
Table 7-2 Current Proportional Output Calibration Procedure
SET CALIB
UP
Lower Display
until you see CURRENT

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 (Value)
Lower Display
ZERO VAL
until the desired 0% output (normally 4mA) is read

on the milliammeter. Use the values shown below
or depending on the action of your controller.
*When attempting to achieve 0 mA, always adjust the
output to about 0.5 mA, and slowly decrease until the
output just goes to zero. Further decrementing will not
change the output current (since the circuit cannot produce
negative current) but will affect the accuracy of the output
by creating a dead zone where no current flows.
3 Calibrate 100% This stores the 0%value and,

FUNC You will see:
L1/L2 Upper Display
(Value)
Lower Display
SPAN VAL
until the desired 100% output (normally 20mA) is

read on the milliammeter. Use the values shown
or below depending on the action of your controller.
4 Exit the Calibration The controller will store the span value.
Mode FUNC
L1/L2
LOWR ATTENTION Press the [FUNC/L1-L2] key first to


7.3 2nd Current Output
Introduction Calibrate the controller so that the Second Current Output provides the
proper amount of current over the desired range.
The controller can provide a 2nd Output current range of from 0 to 21
milliamperes and can be calibrated at 4 mA for 0% of output and 20 mA
for 100% of output or any other values between 0 and 21 mA.
Equipment needed You will need a standard shop type milliammeter with whatever accuracy
is required, capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps.
Calibrator Refer to Figure 7-2 and wire the controller according to the procedure
connections given in Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 2nd Current Output

Step Action
1 Tag and disconnect the field wiring, at the rear of the controller, from
terminals 4(+) and 5(–). See Figure 7-2.
2 Connect a Milliammeter across these terminals.
3 Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 15 minutes before
you calibrate.

7.3 2nd Current Output, Continued
Calibrator
connections,
continued
Figure 7-2 Wiring Connections for Calibrating 2nd Current Output
Milliammeter
1 14
2 15
+ –
Load 3 16
+
4 17
– 5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11
12 L1
13 L2/N
21762

7.3 2nd Current Output Calibration, Continued
Procedure The procedure for calibrating the 2nd Current Output is listed in Table 7-
5. Make sure “LOCKOUT” in the Tuning Set Up group is set to “NONE.”
See Section 3 – Configuration.
Table 7-4 2nd Current Output Calibration Procedure
SET CALIB
UP
Lower Display
until you see CUR OUT2

FUNC Upper Display
L1/L2 (a value)
Lower Display
ZERO VALU
until the desired 0% output (normally 4mA) is read

on the milliammeter. Use the values shown below
or depending on the action of your controller.
*When attempting to achieve 0 mA, always adjust the
output to about 0.5 mA, and slowly decrease until the
output just goes to zero. Further decrementing will not
change the output current (since the circuit cannot produce
negative current) but will affect the accuracy of the output
by creating a dead zone where no current flows.
3 Calibrate 100% This stores the 0%value and,

FUNC you will see:
L1/L2 Upper Display
(value)
Lower Display
ZERO VALU
until the desired 100% output (normally 20mA) is

read on the milliammeter. Use the values shown
or below depending on the action of your controller.
4 Exit the Calibration The controller will store the span value.
Mode FUNC
L1/L2
LOWR ATTENTION Press the [FUNC/L1-L2] key first to

DISP store value.

Section 8 – Troubleshooting / Service
8.1 Overview
Introduction Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and
application problems as well as hardware problems. We recommend that
you investigate the problems in the following order;
• Installation related problems
• Application related problems
• Hardware and software related problems
and use the information presented in this section to solve them.
If a replacement of any part is required, follow the procedures listed under
“Parts Replacement Procedures”.
What’s in this The following topics are covered in this section.

section?
Topic See Page
8.1 Overview 249
8.2 Troubleshooting Aids 251
8.3 Power-up Tests 253
8.4 Status Tests 254
8.5 Background Tests 257
8.6 Controller Failure Symptoms 259
8.7 Troubleshooting Procedures 260
8.8 Parts Replacement Procedures 266
8.9 Maintenance 277
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD
TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO
HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE
PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE
THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE
UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.

8.1 Overview, Continued
Installation related Read the Installation section in this manual to make sure the UDC6300
problems has been properly installed. The installation section provides information
on protection against electrical noise, connecting external equipment to
the controller, and shielding and routing external wiring.
ATTENTION System noise induced into the controller will result in

diagnostic error messages recurring. If the diagnostic error messages can
be cleared, it indicates a “soft” failure and is probably noise related.
If system noise is suspected, completely isolate the controller from all
field wiring. Use calibration sources to simulate PV and check all
controller functions; i.e. Gain, Rate, Reset, Output, Alarms, etc.
Application related Review the application of the controller; then, if necessary, direct your
problems questions to the local sales office.
Hardware and Use the troubleshooting error message prompts and controller failure
software related symptoms to identify typical failures which may occur in the controller.
problems
Follow the troubleshooting procedures to correct them.

8.2 Troubleshooting Aids
Overall error An error message can occur
messages • at power-up
• during continuous background tests while in normal operation
• when the Status Tests are requested
Table 8-1 lists all the error message prompts that you could see, the
reason for the failure, and under what test group the prompt could appear.
Refer to Tables 8-3 (Power-up), 8-5 (Status), and 8-6 (Background) for
the particular test group indicated.
Table 8-1 Error Message Prompts
Error Message Reason for Failure Test Group Refer to
(lower display) Table
CAL TEST Calibration test failure Power-up or 8-3
Status 8-5
CONF ERR Low limit > than high limit for Background 8-6
PV, SP, Reset, or Output
CONFTEST Configuration data in Power-up or 8-3
controller in error Status 8-5
DO FAILED Digital Output 1 through 4 in Background 8-6
error
E E FAIL Unable to write to non-volatile Background 8-6
memory
FACT CRC Factory Calibration Cyclic Status 8-5
Redundancy test
FAILSAFE Controller in Failsafe Power-up, 8-3
Background, or 8-5
Status 8-6
IN1 FAIL Two consecutive failures of Background 8-6
IN2 FAIL Input integration
IN3 FAIL
IN4 FAIL
IN5 FAIL Two consecutive failures of Background 8-6
Input 5 integration
IN1 RNG Input Out of Range Background 8-6
IN2 RNG
IN3 RNG
IN4 RNG
IN5 RNG
LOOPBACK DMCS Loopback Test Status 8-5
PV RANGE Derived PV Out of Range Background 8-6
RAM TEST RAM test failed Power up or 8-3
Status 8-5
RV RANGE Remote Input Out of Range Background 8-6
VERSION Software Version Status 8-5

8.2 Troubleshooting Aids, Continued
Controller failure Other failures may occur that deal with the Power, Output, or Alarms.
symptoms Refer to the controller failure symptom in Table 8-7 to determine what is
wrong and the troubleshooting procedures to use to correct the problem.
Check Installation If a set of symptoms still persists, refer to Section 2 - Installation and
ensure proper installation and proper use of the controller in the system.
Customer support If you cannot solve the problem using the troubleshooting procedures
listed in this section; get the model number and serial number from the
label on the chassis molding, and software version (see Table 8-2) then:
call Customer Support Phone Number

1-800-423-9883 USA
1-800-461-0013 Canada.
If it is determined that a hardware problem exists and the controller is still

within the two year warranty, a replacement controller will be shipped
with instructions for returning the defective unit.
Determining the Table 8-2 lists the procedure for identifying the software version number.
software version
Table 8-2 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version
STATUS SET Upper Display
Set Up Group UP READ
Lower Display
STATUS
2 Read the Until you see:

software FUNC Upper Display
version L1/L2 Software
version
Lower Display Number
VERSION
Please give this number to the Customer

Support person. It will indicate which
version of UDC 6300 you have and help
them determine a solution to your
problem.

8.3 Power-up Tests
What happens at When the controller is powered-up, three tests are run by the UDC6300
power-up software to ensure memory integrity.
As the tests are run, the displays will appear as shown in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3 Power-up Tests
Lower Display Upper Display
RAM TEST PASS or FAIL
CONFTEST PASS or FAIL
CAL TEST PASS or FAIL
After these tests, every segment in the display is turned on for 5 seconds,
and then “TEST DONE” is shown in the Lower Didplay.
The controller then checks the non-volatile memory, displaying
‘CHECKING MEMORY” in the Lower Display.
Test failures If any of these tests fail, “FAIL” will appear momentarily in the upper
display, then a display test is run, after which the controller will go into
Failsafe Manual mode and you will see:
Upper Display
PV value
Lower Display
FAILSAFE (blinking)
Refer to “Status Tests” to determine which tests have failed and how to
correct them.

8.4 Status Tests
Introduction When required, the results of these tests can be checked to determine the
reason the controller has gone to “Failsafe”.
How to check the The procedure in Table 8-4 tells you how to display the results of the
status tests status tests. Table 8-5 lists the tests, the reason for the failure, and how to
correct the problem.
Table 8-4 Procedure for Displaying the Status Tests Results

STATUS SET Upper Display
Set Up Group UP READ
Lower Display
STATUS
2 Read the Until you see:

status tests FUNC Upper Display
results L1/L2 NO or YES YES indicates
a failure
Lower Display
FAILSAFE
Successive presses of the FUNC key

will display the results of the status tests
in the following order:
RAM TEST
CONF TEST
CAL TEST
FACT CRC
LOOPBACK
Identify the problem and correct the
failure as shown in Table 8-5.

8.4 Status Tests, Continued
Status Tests Table 8-5 lists the Status tests, the reason for their failure, and how to
correct the failure.
Table 8-5 Status Tests
Test Definition Upper Reason for Failure How to Correct the Failure
(Lower Display
Display)
FAILSAFE Failsafe Fault NO No Failure

FAILSF 2 YES Burnout configured for 1. Step through the rest of the
(Loop 2) none and input fails. STATUS check to identify the
–RAM TEST failed particular failure. Press FUNC
–CONFTEST failed
–CALTEST failed key and then step through all the
status prompts a second time to
verify if the particular failed code
has cleared and shows "Passed".
Also see Table 8-6, Background
tests.
RAM RAM test PASS No Failure RAM test passed.
TEST
FAIL RAM Failure 1. Power cycle to see if the error
clears.
CONF Configuration PASS No Failure Configuration checksum passed.
TEST Checksum
FAIL Configuration data in the 1. Step through STATUS tests – the
controller is in error. controller will recalculate the
checksum.
2. Check all configuration prompts for
accuracy.
See Section 3 - Configuration
CAL TEST Working PASS No Failure Working calibration checksum
Calibration passed.
FAIL The working calibration 1. If the controller has not been field
constants in the calibrated, see Section 3 -
controller are in error. Configuration and change the
input to a different type. Enter it,
loop through the status tests, then
return the input type to the original
one.
2. If the controller has been field
calibrated, recalibrate the
controller.

8.4 Status Tests, Continued
Status Test,
continued
Table 8-5 Status Tests, continued
Test Definition Upper Reason for Failure How to Correct the Failure
(Lower Display) Display
FACT CRC Factory PASS No Failure Factory calibration cyclic redundancy
calibration test passed
test
FAIL Factory set input 1. Cycle through Status to clear the
constants have been error.
changed due to the
change in input type. 2. Check the calibration. Make sure 0
and 100% are correct values.
3. Recalibrate if step 1 is
unsatisfactory. Refer to Section 6 -
Input Calibration.
LOOPTEST DMCS PASS No Failure Loopback Test passed.
Loopback
Test
FAIL Unable to communicate 1. Check to see if the DMCS board is
with the controller installed properly.
through DMCS
2. Check the rear terminal wiring.
See Section 2 - Installation for
terminal designations.

8.5 Background Tests
Introduction The UDC6300 performs on-going background tests to verify data and
memory integrity. If there is a malfunction, an error message will be
displayed (blinking) in the lower display.
Background Tests In the case of more than one simultaneous malfunction, only the one with
the highest priority will appear in the lower display. Table 8-6 lists these
background tests, the reason for their failure, and how to correct the
problem.
Table 8-6 Background Tests

Lower Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem
Display
EE FAIL Unable to write to non-volatile 1. Check the accuracy of the parameter and re-
memory. Anytime you change a enter.
parameter and it is not accepted, you 2. Try to change something in configuration.
will see EE FAIL.
3. Run through STATUS tests to re-write to
EEPROM.
FAILSAFE This error message shows whenever 1. Run through STATUS check to determine the
the controller goes into a failsafe reason for the failure.
mode of operation. This will happen if:
• RAM test failed 2. Press the SET UP key until STATUS
• Configuration test failed appears in the lower display.
• Calibration test failed
• EEPROM test failed 3. Press the FUNC key to see what tests pass
• Any input used for PV or or fail, then run through the STATUS codes a
RSP has failed. second time to see if the error cleared.
4. Correct according to the recommendations
given in Table 8-5.
IN1 FAIL Failure of input integration. i.e., cannot 1. Make sure the input configuration and wiring
IN2 FAIL make analog to digital conversion. is correct.
IN3 FAIL 2. Make sure the correct resistor is attached to
IN4 FAIL the rear terminals for the particular range
required.
3. Check for gross over-ranging.
IN5 FAIL Failure of input 5 integration. i.e., 1. Make sure the actuation is configured
cannot make analog to digital correctly. See Section 3 - Configuration.
conversion. 2. Make sure the input configuration and wiring
is correct.
3. Make sure the Cold Junction is connected to
the Thermocouple ranges.
4. Check for gross over-ranging.
5. Replace the Cold Junction Resistor.
CONF ERR • PV low limit is > PV high limit 1. Check the configuration for each item and
• SP low limit is > SP high limit reconfigure if necessary.
• Reset low limit is > Reset high limit
• Output low limit > Output high limit

8.5 Background Tests, Continued
Table 8-6 Background Tests, continued

Lower Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem
Display
IN1 RANGE Input out of range. The process input 1. Make sure the range and actuation are
IN2 RANGE is outside the range limits. configured properly.
IN3 RANGE
IN4 RANGE Input 5 Pulse Input - Pulse Input less 2. Check the input source.
IN5 RANGE than zero value or greater than span
value. 3. If the controller has not been field calibrated,
see Section 3 - Configuration and change the
ATTENTION input to a different type. Enter it, loop through
If the range goes the status tests, then return the input type to
outside the range limits, the controller the original one.
will switch to Manual and the
configured Failsafe output value. 4. If the controller has been field calibrated,
recalibrate the controller.
PV RANGE A. PV out of range. A1. Make sure the input signal is correct.
A2. Make sure the Bias setting is correct.

A3. Recheck the calibration. Use Bias of 0.0.
B. Loop Input algorithm exceeds B1. Reconfigure the Input algorithm.
the PV limit
RV RANGE RV out-of-range 1. Make sure the input signal is correct.
2. Make sure the Ratio and Bias settings are
correct.
3. Recheck the calibration. Use a Ratio of 1.0
and a Bias of 0.0.
DO FAILED The read state of Digital Output 1 1. Make sure the connections are correct.
through 4 does not compare with the
correct state. 2. Check if the connections are shorted.
3. Does the load exceed 300mA?
4. Is there a closed Digital Input switch
connected to an active Digital Output?

8.6 Controller Failure Symptoms
Introduction In addition to the error message prompts, there are failure symptoms that
can be identified by noting how the controller displays and indicators are
reacting.
Symptoms Compare your symptoms with those shown in Table 8-7 and refer to the
troubleshooting procedure indicated to correct the problem.
Table 8-7 Controller Failure Symptoms
Upper Lower Indicators Controller Probable Cause Trouble-
Display Display Output shooting
Procedure
Blank Blank Off None Power Failure 1
OK Displayed OK Controller Current 2
Output Output Proportional
disagrees disagrees Output
OK with Controller OK with Displayed Time 3
Output Output Proportional
(Digital) Output
OK OK OK External Alarm Malfunction in 4
function does alarm output
not operate
properly
Display does not function when a key is pressed Keyboard 5
Malfunction
Controller fails to go into “Slave” operation during communications Communications 6
Failure
Other symptoms If a set of symptoms or prompts other than the one you started with
appears while troubleshooting, re-evaluate the symptoms. This may lead
to a different troubleshooting procedure.
If the symptom still persists, refer to the installation section in this manual
to ensure proper installation and proper use of the controller in your
system.

8.7 Troubleshooting Procedures
Introduction The troubleshooting procedures are listed in numerical order as they

appear in Table 8-7. Each procedure lists what to do if you have that
particular failure and how to do it or where to find the data needed to
accomplish the task.
Equipment needed You will need the following equipment in order to troubleshoot the
symptoms listed in the tables that follow:
• DC Milliammeter – mAdc
• Calibration sources – T/C, mV, Volt, etc.
• Voltmeter
Procedure #1 Table 8-8 explains how to troubleshoot power failure symptoms.

Table 8-8 Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms
Step What to do How to do it
1 Check the AC line voltage. Use a Voltmeter to measure the
AC voltage across terminals L1
and L2 on the rear terminal panel
of the controller.
Check the earth ground
connection.
2 Make sure the chassis plugs Withdraw the chassis and visually
into the rear of the case inspect the controller board and
properly. the inside of the case.
3 Check the Voltage selection. See if the Power Select Jumper
Make sure the correct fuse is in on the controller printed wiring
the proper location. board is in the proper position for
the Voltage being used.
Make sure the correct fuse is
installed. See "Installing the Fuse,
Label, and Power Select Jumpers"
in Section 2 - Installation.
4 Check the system for Brown- Refer to Section 2 - Installation.
outs, heavy load switching, etc.;
and conformance to installation
instructions.

8.7 Troubleshooting Procedures, Continued
Procedure #2 Table 8-9 explains how to troubleshoot Current Proportional Output

failure symptoms.
Table 8-9 Troubleshooting Current Proportional Output Failure
1 Make sure the controller is Make Set Up group prompt “OUT
configured for Current output. ALG”. Function prompt “OUT
ALG” = selection “CURRENT” or
"OUT2 ALG = selection
"CURRENT".
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.
2 Check the field wiring. Output impedance must be less
than or equal to 1000 Ohms.
3 Make sure all the configurable Refer to Section 3 - Configuration
tuning constants, limits, and to check all this data and how to
configuration data stored in the reconfigure.
controller are correct.
Reconfigure, if necessary.
4 Check the output. Press the LOWR DISP key until
you see OUT in the Lower
Display. Change the output from 0
to 100% (4-20 mA).
Use a DC milliammeter at the rear
terminals 20 and 21 for current
output #1 or terminals 4 and 5 for
the second current output to verify
the output.
5 Recalibrate the Current Refer to Section 7 - Output
Proportional Output. Calibration for details.

Procedure #3 Table 8-10 explains how to troubleshoot Time Proportional Digital

Output(s) failure.
Table 8-10 Troubleshooting Time Proportional Digital Output(s)
Failure
1 Make sure the controller is Make Set Up group prompt “OUT
configured for Time Proportional ALG”. Function prompt “OUT
Digital output(s). ALG” = selection is
“TIME” (Digital Output 3)
“TIME DPLX” (Digital Output 3 &
4)
"CUR TIME" (Digital Output 3 =
Heat)
"TIME CUR" (Digital Output 3 =
Cool)
whichever is required.
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.
2 Check the field wiring. See Section 2 - Installation for
wiring diagrams.
• Check the power supply
connections at terminals 6 &7.
• Check Digital Outputs 3 & 4
connections at terminal 6 & 12
or 6 & 13.
• Make sure that any external
mechanical or Solid State relays
are receiving the signal.
3 Make sure all the configurable Refer to Section 3- Configuration
tuning constants, limits, and to check all this data and how to
configuration data stored in the reconfigure.
controller are correct.
Reconfigure, if necessary.
4 Check that the Digital Output • Check the Digital Output
actuates properly per the continuity at rear terminals 6 &
controller output value. 12 (Digital Output 3) and 6 & 13
(Digital Output 4)
• Place the controller in Manual
mode and verify that continuity
is correct when the Output is at
100% and when the Output is
0%.

Procedure #4 Table 8-11 explains how to troubleshoot Alarm Digital Output(s) failure.
Table 8-11 Troubleshooting Alarm Digital Output(s) Failure
1 Check the alarm configuration Reconfigure if necessary.
data. If it is correct, check the Refer to Section 3 - Configuration
field wiring. for details.
2 Check that the applicable Digital If the alarm type is set for PV,
Output energizes per error place the controller in manual
signal properly. It depends on mode. Vary the input to raise and
what you have set at "ALARMS" lower the PV around the setpoint.
group prompt "AxSxTYPE". Note that the bargraphs and
If it does, check the field wiring. proper annunciators flash.
If the alarm is set for OUTPUT,

put the controller into manual
mode. Raise or lower the output
above or below the value you
have set as the alarm setpoint.
Note that the bargraphs and
proper annunciators flash.
Check for proper continuity when
the alarm actuates.
3 Check the field wiring for Digital Refer to Section 2 - Installation for
Outputs 1, 2, 3, 4. details.
• Check the power supply
connection at the rear terminals
6 and 7.
• Check the Digital Output
connections at the following
terminals:
6, 10 D/O#1
6, 11 D/O#2
6, 12 D/O#3
6, 12 D/O#4
Check for proper continuity.
• Make sure that any external
mechanical or solid state relays
are receiving the Digital Output
signals.

Procedure #5 Table 8-12 explains how to troubleshoot a Keyboard failure.

Table 8-12 Troubleshooting a Keyboard Failure
1 Make sure the keyboard is Withdraw the chassis from the
connected properly to the case and visually inspect the
Display board. connection.
2 Controller Keyboard may be Use your 4 digit security code
“LOCKED OUT” via the security number to change the lockout
code. level. Refer to Section 3 –
Configuration.
ATTENTION Using “1000” as a

security code number will override
the 4-digit code previously
entered.
3 Run the keyboard test. Press the SET UP key and hold
in, then press the FUNC key at
the same time. The controller will
run a display test. Then you will
see:
Upper Display
KEYS
Lower Display
(Key Name)
Press each key. If it works, the

key name will appear in the lower
display.
4 Replace the keyboard if any Refer to “Parts Replacement
keys are shorted out. Procedures” in this section.

Procedure #6 Table 8-13 explains how to troubleshoot a DMCS Communications

failure.
Table 8-13 Troubleshooting a DMCS Communications Failure
1 Check the field wiring and Depending on the protocol used,
termination resistor. refer to the proper
communications Manual
Installation Section.
2 Make sure the DMCS Withdraw the chassis from the
Communications Printed Wiring case and inspect the board. See
Board is installed properly in the the exploded view (Figure 9-1) for
controller. location of the board. Return the
chassis to the case.
3 Determine if the DMCS Run the Local Loopback Test.
Communications board is faulty
by running a Press SET UP until you see:
LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST. Upper Display
If the test fails, replace the SET UP
board. Lower Display
COM
Press FUNC until you see:

Upper Display
DISABL
Lower Display
LOOPBACK
Press or , you will see:

Upper Display
ENABLE
Lower Display
LOOPBACK
ATTENTION The test will run

until the operator disables it here.

8.8 Parts Replacement Procedures
Introduction These procedures tell you how to access and replace the following printed
wiring boards in your controller.
• Bezel/Keyboard and/or Display Board

• MCU/Inputs Board
• Communications Option Board
• Power / DIO Board
• Input 5 - Low Level or Pulse Input Board
Figure 8-1 shows you how to remove the chassis from the case.
Figure 8-2 identifies all the printed wiring boards and parts necessary to
facilitate removing and replacing the parts listed above.
Figure 8-3 Identifies the accessed printed wiring boards.
Controller ATTENTION
replacement If you are replacing a UDC6000 or an existing UDC6300
the old unit and placing it in the new unit. Refer to Figure 8-2 for location
of the UDC6300 EEPROM and the following instructions:
• Replacing a UDC6000 with a UDC6300
remove the UDC6300 EEPROM at U106 and replace it with the
UDC6000 EEPROM at U26. This IC contains all the configuration
data that was in the UDC6000, so, the UDC6300 will now have
the same configuration as the UDC6000 that you are replacing.
• Replacing a UDC6300 with a
remove the EEPROM at U106 from the new UDC6300 and
replace it with the EEPROM from the old UDC6300. The new
UDC6300 will now have the same configuration as the one that
you are replacing.
Equipment needed To accomplish the procedures that follow, you will need the following
equipment:
• Phillips Head Screwdriver

• Flat Bladed Screwdriver
• Small Pliers

8.8 Parts Replacement Procedures, Continued
How to remove the Refer to Figure 8-1 for steps and follow the procedure listed in Table 8-
chassis 14.
Table 8-14 How to Remove the Chassis

Step Action
1 Pull down the flap covering the front screw and loosen the screw.
2 Grasp the bezel and pull the chassis out of the case.
Figure 8-1 Chassis Removal
Bezel/Keyboard/Display Assembly
Rear of case
23045
Front Screw

Parts Identification Figure 8-2 identifies all the Printed Wiring Boards and parts necessary to
facilitate removing and replacing the parts listed.
Figure 8-2 Replacement Parts Identification
Interconnect Spacer
Interconnect
MCU/Input PWB
EEPROM
at U106
Bezel/Keyboard/
Display Assembly
Rear of case
Front Screw PWB Mounting Screws (4)

Mounting Screw Communications PWB
Power/ DIO PWB
Chassis
Cable Assembly Option Input PWB
Power/DIO PWB
to Option Input Board 23044

How to replace Bezel/ To replace the

Keyboard/Display
assembly, Keyboard • Bezel/Keyboard/Display assembly - Procedure A
assembly, or Display • Keyboard assembly - Procedure B
PWB • Display printed wiring board Procedure C ,
refer to Figure 8-2 for parts location, remove the chassis from the case
(see Figure 8-1), and follow the procedures in Table 8-15.
Table 8-15 Bezel/Keyboard/Display Assembly Replacement
Procedure
Step Action
PROCEDURE A - Bezel/Keyboard/Display assembly (Part Number 30757007-501)
1A Remove the two screws on the bottom of the chassis frame that
hold the bezel/Keyboard/Display assembly in place on the chassis
frame (refer to Figure 8-2 for location of the screws).
2A Lift the two retainers (see Figure 8-3, next page) slightly away from
the printed wiring boards notch and the bracket on the other side
and pull the printed wiring boards and chassis out of plug P9 on
the back of the display board. The Bezel/Keyboard/Display board
will come away in one piece.
PROCEDURE B - Keyboard assembly (Part Number 30757071-501)
1B Do steps 1A and 2A.
2B Peel off the rubber bezel and glass and pull off the front of the
plastic bezel and see Figure 8-4 next page.
3B Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into each side of the
keyboard and gently pry up. The keyboard will unplug from the
display board.
4B Replace the keyboard. Position the plug on the keyboard into the
connector on the display board and snap the keyboard into place.
Make sure it is seated properly.
5B Reassemble the bezel and reattach it to the chassis frame.
PROCEDURE C - Display Printed Wiring board (Part Number 30757010-501)
1C Do steps 1B through 3B.
2C Place a thumb on either side of the plastic bezel (see Figure 8-4,
next page). With your fingers on the back of the display board,
separate the sides of the bezel with your thumbs and use your
fingers to push the top of the display board out through the front of
the bezel.
3C Lift the display board up and out of the bezel frame.
4C Insert the new display board down into the bezel frame.
BE CAREFUL THAT THE EVACUATION TUBE DOES NOT HIT
THE BEZEL FRAME.
5C Snap the display board into place in the bezel frame.
6C Replace the keyboard. Make sure it is seated properly.
7C Replace the rubber bezel assembly.
8C Attach the Bezel to the chassis with the two screws removed.

How to replace Bezel/ Figure 8-3 shows the location of the retainers on the controller board.
Keyboard/Display
assembly, Keyboard
assembly, or Display
PWB, continued
Figure 8-3 Bezel/Keyboard/Display Assembly
Top of rubber bezel
Lift
Retainers
Here
Power/DIO MCU/Input
Printed Wiring Board Printed Wiring
22060 Board
Figure 8-4 identifies the parts for Keyboard or Display removal.

Figure 8-4 Keyboard and Display Board Removal
Keyboard Removal Display Board Removal
Place Place
Display
thumb thumb
board
here here
Push
Bezel out
frame from
back
Keyboard
Keyboard Evacuation
Insert screwdriver
connector tube 22061
- pry up

How to access the Follow the procedure in Table 8-16 to access the Printed Wiring Boards.
Printed Wiring Boards
Table 8-16 Access the Printed Wiring Boards.
Step Action
1 Remove the chassis from the case as shown in Figure 8-1.
2 Follow the procedure in steps1A and 2A in Table 8-15 to remove
the Bezel/Keyboard/Display form the chassis
3 Remove the four screws (two on each side) that hold the two main
printed wiring boards onto the chassis (See figure 8-2 for location)
4 Use pliers to squeeze the ends of the spacer and push it through
the Power/ Digital I/O PWB. (See figure 8-2 for location of spacer)
5 Gently pull the MCU/Inputs and the Power/Digital I/O boards apart
out of the top and bottom interconnectors and lay the boards flat on
a non-conductive surface. (See figure 8-5).
6 Figure 8-6 identifies the location of the Printed Wiring Boards.
Figure 8-5 Printed Wiring Board Identification
W1
MCU/Inputs
Board Option
Input Board
J14
Cable
Assembly
W1 P14
Power / DIO Board

DMCS or
RS422/485
Communications
Option Board
22346

How to replace the To replace the MCU/Inputs printed wiring board

MCU/Inputs printed (Part Number 51309176-002), follow the procedure listed in Table 8-17
wiring board
and refer to Figure 8-5 for parts location.
Table 8-17 MCU/Inputs PWB Replacement Procedure

Step Action
1 Remove the chassis from the case. (See Table 8-14).
2 Remove the Bezel/Keyboard and Display board (See Table 8-15).
3 Access the Printed Wiring Boards (See Table 8-16)
4 Identify the MCU/Inputs PWB and remove the Communications
Option board if present (see Table 8-18).
5 Make sure the power select jumpers on the new board are in the
proper location for the voltage desired (see Figure 8-6).
6 Reassemble the Communications Option PWB to the MCU/Inputs
PWB if present.
7 Assemble the interconnects to the new MCU/Inputs board and
reassemble the boards reversing the procedure in Table 8-16
8 Reattach the Bezel/Keyboard and Display board.

How to replace the Figure 8-6 shows the location of the Power Select Jumpers on the
MCU/Inputs printed MCU/Inputs Printed Wiring Board.
wiring board,
continued CAUTION Applying the wrong power to the controller will severely
damage the controller and is a fire and smoke hazard. Make sure the
jumpers are set correctly.
Figure 8-6 Power Select Jumper Location
POWER SELECT JUMPER PLACEMENT
24Vac/dc 115 Vac 230 Vac

24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V
PWR SEL PWR SEL PWR SEL
MCU/Input Board
230Vac 230Vac
115Vac 115Vac
24V 24V
Power
Select
PWR SEL
Jumpers
Front Screw
23038

How to replace the To replace the

communications
option board • DMCS Communications option board (Part Number 30755408-503)
• RS422/485 Communications option board
(Part Number 30755865-504)
Refer to Figure 8-5 for parts location and follow the procedure in
Table 8-18.
Table 8-18 Communications Option Board Replacement Procedure
Step Action
4 Identify the Communications Option board and remove the two
screws that hold it onto the MCU/Inputs PWB
6 Assemble the new Communications Option PWB to the
MCU/Inputs PWB.
7 Assemble the interconnects to the MCU/Inputs board and
reassemble the boards reversing the procedure in table 8-16

How to replace the To replace the Power/DIO printed wiring board

Power/DIO printed (Part Number 51309179-002), follow the procedure listed in Table 8-19
wiring board
and refer to Figure 8-5 for parts location.
Table 8-19 Digital I/O PWB Replacement Procedure

Step Action
4 Identify the Power/DIO PWB and remove the Option Input board if
present (see Table 8-20).
5 Replace U109 PROM on the MCU/Inputs board with the new
PROM from the kit.
6 Reassemble the Option Input PWB to the Digital I/O-Power PWB if
present.
7 Assemble the interconnects to the new MCU/Inputs board and
reassemble the boards reversing the procedure in table 8-16

How to replace the To replace the Option Input Board, refer to Figure 8-5 for parts location
option Input board and follow the procedure in Table 8-20.
Table 8-20 Option Input Board Replacement Procedure
Step Action
4 Identify the Option Input board . The board is attached to the
Power/DIO board by mounting posts.
5 Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each posts together and
push it through the board.
6 Assemble the new Option Input PWB to the Power/DIO PWB.
ATTENTION If you are using the Low Level Option Input

board,
Part Number 30756715-501, make sure that the W1 jumper on
both the Option Input board and on the Power/DIO board are
removed (See Figure 8-5).
For the Pulse Option Input board, Part Number 51309184-501,
DO NOT remove the W1 jumper.
7 Assemble the interconnects to the MCU/Inputs board and
reassemble the boards reversing the procedure in Table 8-16

8.9 Maintenance
Cleaning If you find it necessary to clean the elastomer bezel, use mild soapy water.

Section 9 – Parts List
9.1 Exploded View
Introduction Figure 9-1 is an exploded view of the UDC 6300 Controller. Each part is
labeled with a key number. The part numbers are listed by key number in
Table 9-1. There is a list of parts not shown in Table 9-2.
Figure 9-1 UDC 6300 Exploded View
1 3 2 8 3 4
Rear of case
3 3 5 3 6 7 3 23036

9.1 Exploded View, Continued
Parts identification Table 9-1 lists the part numbers for the key numbers shown in the
exploded view.
Table 9-1 Parts Identification
Key Part Number Description Quantity
Numbe
r
1 30757071-501 Bezel/Keyboard/Display Printed 1
Wiring Board Assembly
30757007-501 Keyboard Switch Assembly
(included in 30757071-501)
30757010-501 Display Printed Wiring Board
(included in 30757071-501)
2 51309176-504 MCU/Inputs Printed Wiring Board 1
3 30755498-005 Hardware Kit 1
4 30754499-003 Rear Connector Kit, includes: 1
2 - terminal Blocks,
13 Connector
5 30755408-503 DMCS Communications PWB 1
30755865-504 RS422/485 Communications PWB
6 30756715-501 Input 5 PWB - Low Level Input 1
51309184-501 Input 5 PWB - Pulse Input
7 51309179- 502 Power/DIO PWB 1
8 Upgrade PROM 1
51450900-501 Upgrade Adaptive Tune
51450900-502 Upgrade Math & Adaptive
51450900-503 Upgrade 2 Loops & Adaptive
51450900-504 Upgrade All Options
51309350-501 Upgrade Prom – TPS
51309350-502 Upgrade Prom - Modbus RTU

9.1 Exploded View, Continued
Parts not shown Table 9-2 lists the part numbers of the parts not show in the exploded
view.
Table 9-2 Parts Not Shown
Part Number Description Quantity
30755469-001 Standby Manual Module 1
30755515-001 Standby Manual Module Adapter Kit, includes: 1
1 - 30 inch long connector/cable Assy
1 - Connector Mounting Bracket
2 - Mounting Screws with Washers
30755498-001 4-20 mA Resistor Kit, 250 Ohms 1*
30755498-002 10–50 mA Resistor Kit, 100 Ohms 1*
30757088-501 Cold Junction Resistor Kit 1
30756505-003 Vutronik Mask Kit (Gray) - See table 9-3. 1
30756505-004 Vutronik Mask Kit (Gray) - See table 9-3.
30755050-001 Mounting Kit 1
30754465-501 0 to 10V Range Voltage Divider 1
30755498-006 Power Select Kit 1
30755498-004 Fuse Kit 1
Vutronik mask kits Table 9-3 lists the Gray Vutronik Mask Kit Part Numbers.
Table 9-3 Gray Vutronik Mask Kits
Maximum Gray
Vutronik Unit Quantity of Vutronik Quantity
Cutout UDC6300 that Mask Kit of Kits
will fit in Part Number Required
Vutronik Cutout
1 Unit 0 None None
(opening must be widened)
2 Units 1 30756505-004** 1
3 Units 2 30756505-003* 2
4 Units 2 30756505-004** 2
5 Units 3 30756505-003* 3
8 Units 5 30756505-003* 4
(Multi-unit Case) 30756505-004** 1
* 30756505-003 contains: ** 30756505-003 contains:
1 Plate - 6.59 x 4.20 " Overall Size 2 Plates - 6.59 x 3.36 " Overall
1 Plate - 6.59 x 3.36 " Overall Size

Index
Communications failure, 265

Communications Group, 60
Communications Option Board Replacement
A Procedure, 274
Aborting PV Adaptive Tuning, 206 Communications option connections, 26
Aborting SP Only Tuning, 205 Communications selection, 128
Aborting Tuning, 201 Communications station address, 128
Accutune, 183, 199 COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS, 128
ACCUTUNE, 79 comparator gates, 187
Accutune error codes, 207 Composite wiring diagram, 17
Accutune function., 79 Computer Setpoint Bias, 131
Accutune Rules and Regulations, 200 Computer Setpoint ratio, 131
Accutune Set Up group, 40 Configuration, 27
Accutune Set Up Group, 40, 41, 79 Configuration Options - Digital Outputs 1 and 2, 190
Accutune., 3 Configuration options - Digital Outputs 3 and 4, 190
Adaptive tune - Loop 2 Available only if configured Configuration Procedure, 32
for 2Loop or Cascade., 80 Configuration Prompt Definitions, 71
Adaptive tune error status, 81 Configuration Record Sheet, 67
Advanced Math Parameters Set Up Group, 48, 98 Configuration Selections for Pulse Input, 209
Alarm Digital Output(s) failur, 263 Configuration Tips, 31
Alarm operation, 189 Control 2 algorithm, 85
Alarms, 189 Control algorithm, 82
Alarms Set Up Group, 62, 133 Control Algorithms, 3
Algorithm Data Set Up Group, 42, 82 Control Parameters Set Up Group, 111
Ambient Temperature, 8 Controller dropoff value, 114, 119
annunciator functions, 148 Controller failure symptoms, 252
Auto bias, 113, 118 Controller Failure Symptoms, 259
Auto Manual Station mode CURRENT DUPLEX, 104
backup control feature, 212 Current Output, 22
Auto/Manual Station, 212 Current Proportional Output Calibration, 242
Auto/Manual Station mode, 212 Current Proportional Output failure symptoms, 261
Auto/Manual Station Mode Configuration, 214 CURRENT SIMPLEX, 104
Automatic Mode, 156 CURRENT/TIME DUPLEX, 104
Automatic switchover value, 112, 117 Customer Support Phone Number, 252
Cycle time, 73
Cycle time 2, 73
B
background tests, 257 D
Bargraph indication for 2 loops, 181
bargraphs, 149 Deadband, 114, 119
Baud rate, 129 decimal position, 147
Bezel/Keyboard/Display Assembly Replacement Demand Tuning, 40, 199
Procedure, 269 Demand Tuning + PV Adapt, 199
Bias, 107 Diagnostic error messages, 152
BOX MODE, 131 Digital Display Indication - 2 Loops, 180
Digital I/O PWB Replacement Procedure, 275
Digital Input 1 and 2, 192
C Digital input 1 and 2 combination selections, 194
Calib Group, 66 Digital input 3,4,5,and 6, 196
CALIB RATE, 74 Digital Input and gate output priority, 191
calibrate Input 5 Pulse Inputs, 233 Digital input one selections, 122, 125
Calibration procedure for Input. 5 Digital inputs, 183
CE Conformity, 1, 8 Digital Inputs, 24
Characterizers, 3 Digital Inputs / Outputs, 2
Chassis Removal, 267 Digital Logic Gates, 3
Cleaning, 277 DIGITAL OUTPUT STATUS, 105
Cold Junction Resistor, 12 Digital Outputs, 25
Cold Junction Temperature, 231 Digital Outputs 1 and 2, 190
Communication units, 130 Digital Outputs 3 and 4, 190
Communications, 3 Dimensions, 13

Index
Direct acting control, 114, 118 How to replace the option Input board, 276
Direct Digital Control), 131 How to replace the Power/DIO printed wiring board,
Display Parameters Set Up Group, 65, 138 275
Displaying Functions, 31
Displaying Groups, 31
Displays and indicators, 4
I
Dual Loop / Internal Cascade, 3 Input. 5 - Pulse Input Calibration Procedure. 5
Duplex (Heat/Cool), 202, 204 Calibration Procedure
Input 1 Through 4 Parameters Set Up Group, 52, 106
E Input 5 - Low Level, 12
Input 5 - Pulse Input, 208
eight segment characterizer, 92 Input 5 high range value, 109
eight segment characterizer, 91 Input 5 low range value, 109
Eight Segment Characterizer, 97 Input 5 Parameters Set Up Group, 53, 108
Electrical considerations, 12 Input 5, Low level Input Connections, 20
Electrical noise, 15 Input 5-Pulse Inputs, 21
Emissivity, 110 Input algorithm selections, 184
Error messages, 251 Input Calibration, 217
Error prompt, 207 Input high range value, 106
Exiting SET UP mode, 31 Input low range value, 107
Input Math algorithms, 82
Input Math Algorithms, 184
F Inputs, 2
Factory calibration, 236 Installation, 7
Failsafe mode, 115, 119 Operating limits, 8
Failsafe output value, 115, 119 integration rates, 186
FEEDFORWARD MULTIPLIER, 89 Internal Cascade control:, 172
FEEDFORWARD SUMMER, 87 Internal cascade indication, 182
FILTER, 107
Filter for input 5, 109 K
Flow Totalizer, 186
Frequency Input, 208 K CONSTANT FOR MATH SELECTIONS, 89
Function of keys, 5 Key Error, 31
Function Parameter, 32 Keyboard failure, 264
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression, 40, 198 keyboard test, 264
FUZZY OVERSHOOT SUPPRESSION, 79 Keys, 5
G L
Gain, 72 Latching or Non-Latching Alarm Outputs, 189
Gain 2, 73 Line voltage wiring, 18
Gain Scheduling, 3 Local Loopback Test, 265
GAIN VAL 1, 75 Local setpoint change, 159
Gate configuration, 187 Local setpoint source, 112, 117, 158
Gate Operation, 187 Lockout, 74
Get Started, 30 Logic Gate function, 187
grounding, 12 Logic Gates, 48, 98
Logic Gates Constraints, x, 188
Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group, 54
H Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group, 56
High level input connections, 19 Low output limit, 114, 119
High output limit, 114, 119 LOW SCALING FACTOR, 89
HIGH SCALING FACTOR, 89 LOW SELECT, 88
HIGH SELECT, 88
How to access the Printed Wiring Boards, 271 M
How to remove the chassis, 267
How to replace Bezel/ Keyboard/Display assembly,, Manual Mode, 156
269 Manual reset, 73
How to replace the communications option board, 274 Mass Flow Compensation, 95
How to replace the MCU/Inputs printed wiring board, Math Options, 3
272 MAX IMUM, 74

Index
MCU/Inputs PWB Replacement Procedure, 272 power failure symptoms, 260

Mechanical Shock, 8 Power Select Jumper Location, 273
Model Number, 14 Power select jumper placement, 11
Model number interpretation, 9 power select jumpers, 10
Monitoring two individual loops of control, 180 Power up, 144
Mounting Power up controller mode recall, 113
Overall dimensions, 13 Power-up Tests, 253
Mounting procedure, 14 Precision resistor, 231
MULTIPLIER, 88 Precision Resistor, 12
MULTIPLIER WITH SQUARE ROOT, 88 Pre-installation information, 8
MULTIPLIER DIVIDER, 88 Preliminary Installation Procedure, 10
MULTIPLIER DIVIDER WITH SQUARE ROOT, 88 Printed Wiring Board Identification, 271
Priority level for digital outputs, 191
Process gain Loop 2, 80
N PROCESS VARIABLE (PV) POINT ADDRESS, 129
Non-Latching alarms, 189 Process Variable Source, 111
Prompt hierarchy, 28
Proportional band, 72
O Proportional band 2, 73
Operating Mode, 154 Proportional band units, 115
Operating parameters, 150 Protective bonding, 12
Operating parameters, continued, 151 pulse input, 208
Operation, 143 Pulse Input, 208
Operation of two individual loops of control, 183 PV Tuning, 40
Operator Interface, 4, 147 PV tuning indications, 206
Option Input Board Replacement Procedure, 276
Optional Input 5, 20, 21 R
Options, 3
Options Set Up Group, 58, 120 Rate 2, 73
OUTPUT (OP) POINT ADDRESS, 129 Rate action,, 72
Output 1 tracks input 4, 122 Rate down, 78
Output 2 tracks input 4, 123 Rate up, 78
Output algorithm, 104, 105 Relative Humidity, 8
Output algorithm and alarms priority, 191 Remote Cascade, 131
Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group, 51 Remote setpoint source, 112, 117, 162
Output Algorithms, 2 Remote switching, 192, 196
Output Calibration, 241 Replacement Parts Identification, 268
Output change rate, 114, 118 Reset, 73
Output Overrid, 82 Reset 2, 73
Output Override, 86, 183 Reset units, 115
Output rate down value, 114, 119 Restoring factory calibration, 236
Output rate up value, 114, 119 Restoring to the original value, 31
Outputs, 2 Reverse acting control, 114, 118
Override Selector, 176
Overshoot Suppression, 79 S
Overview, 1
Scrolling, 31
Second Current Output, 3, 23, 245
P security code, 146
Parity, 129 Security code, 74
Parts Identification, 268 Security Code, 146
Parts Replacement Procedures, 266 Selecting Manual or Automatic mode, 156
PD with manual reset, 83, 86 Selecting the Number of PID Loops, 82
Physical considerations, 13 Set Up groups, 31
PID A, 83, 85 Set Up mode, 32
PID B, 83, 85 Setpoint high limit, 113, 118
PID loop selection, 85 Setpoint low limit, 113, 118
Polynomial Curve Characterizer-, 3 Setpoint ramp, 77
Polynomial Equation, 93, 185 Setpoint Ramp
Power, 8 Configuring, 166
Power Consumption, 8 Running, 167

Index
Setpoint ramp final setpoint, 77 Timing out from Set Up mode, 31

Setpoint Ramp Set Up group, 39 totalizer displays, 186
Setpoint ramp time, 77 totalizer function, 94
Setpoint Ramp/Rate Set Up Group, 77 Totalizer function, 186
Setpoint rate, 39, 78 Totalizer Function -, 3
Setpoint selection indication, 164 Transmitter characterization, 106
Setpoint tracking, 118 Transmitter Power, 3
Setpoint Tracking, 113 Transmitter Supply, 8
Setpoint Tuning, 199 Troubleshooting / Service, 249
Setpoint Tuning+ PV Adapt, 199 Troubleshooting Aids, 251
Shed controller mode and output level, 131, 132 troubleshooting procedures, 260
Shed setpoint, 131, 132 TUNE, 79, 201
Shed time, 131 TUNE (Demand, 201
Shock hazard warning, 249 TUNE for Duplex (Heat/Cool), 202
Single Setpoint Ramp, 39 Tuning L2 Set Up group, 37
Software version, 252 Tuning parameter sets, 111, 116
SP Only tuning, 203, 205 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group, 72
SP Only Tuning for Duplex (Heat/Cool), 204 Tuning Set Up group, 34
SP Only tuning, 203 Two 8-Segment Characterization, 185
SP Tuning, 40 Two loop and cascade operation, 199
Standard inputs range selection, 12
Status Grou, 66
status tests, 254
V
SUMMER WITH RATIO AND BIAS, 88 Vibration, 8
Supervisory Control, 131 Voltage Divider Assembly, 12
Switchover value, 170
W
T
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD, 249
Technical Assistance, iii Warranty, iii
The Three Position Step Control, 210 Wiring
THREE POSITION STEP, 84 Electrical noise precautions, 15
TIME DUPLEX, 104 Wire bundling, 15
Time Proportional Digital Output(s) failure, 262 Wiring the controller, 16
Time Proportional Output, 104
TIME SIMPLEX, 104

Honeywell Inc.
1100 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034

UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual: Industrial Measurement and Control

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual: Industrial Measurement and Control

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual: Industrial Measurement and Control

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UDC 6300

Industrial Measurement and Control

Printed in U.S.A. – © Copyright 1999 by Honeywell Inc.

While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate,

This document was prepared using Information Mapping® methodologies and

UDC 6300 is a trademark of Honeywell Inc.

Industrial Measurement and Control

ii UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL)

Industrial Measurement and Control http://www.honeywell.com/imc

Organization Phone Number

United States and Canada Honeywell Inc. 1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support

Asia Pacific Honeywell Asia Pacific Inc. (852) 2829-8298

Europe Honeywell PACE, Brussels, Belgium [32-2] 728-2111

Latin America Honeywell Inc., Sunrise, Florida U.S.A. (954) 845-2600

1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual iii

WARNING, risk of electric shock. This symbol warns the user of a

Protective earth terminal. Provided for connection of the protective

iv UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

SECTION 4 – CONFIGURATION PROMPT DEFINITIONS ............................................71

SECTION 5 – OPERATION............................................................................................ 143

SECTION 6 – INPUT CALIBRATION ............................................................................ 217

SECTION 7 – OUTPUT CALIBRATION ........................................................................ 241

SECTION 8 – TROUBLESHOOTING / SERVICE ......................................................... 249

vi UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

SECTION 9 – PARTS LIST ............................................................................................279

1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual vii

Figure 1-1 Operator Interface Displays and Indicators............................................................. 4

viii UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

Table 1-1 Function of Keys........................................................................................... 5

1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual ix

Table 8-13 Troubleshooting a DMCS Communications Failure................................. 265

x UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual xi

3PSTEP............................................................................................ 3 Position Step Control

xii UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

Publication Publication Number

UDC6300 MODBUS 485RTU Communications Option manual 51-51-25-53

PM/APM UDC6300 Integration Manual PM12-520

1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual xiii

Function The UDC 6300 Process Controller is a microprocessor-based controller that

CE Conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the

Continued on next page

1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1

Inputs Four high-level inputs are standard. They can be:

Continued on next page

2 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

Options Available options include:

1/03 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 3

Figure 1-1 Operator Interface Displays and Indicators

FUNC LOWR MAN RSP SP1

Continued on next page

4 UDC 6300 Process Controller Product Manual 1/03

Table 1-1 Function of Keys

SET • Places the controller in the Configuration Set Up group

FUNC • Used in conjunction with the SET UP key to select the

• Press the FUNC key and key to start/halt setpoint

LOWR • Selects any one of 26 operating parameter to be shown in

MAN • Alternately selects: